Yamaha CXA5000BL Manual de usuario
- Categoría
- Sistemas de cine en casa
- Tipo
- Manual de usuario
Este manual también es adecuado para
English
AV Pre-Amplifier
Owner’s Manual
Read the supplied booklet “Safety Brochure” before using the unit.
En 2
CONTENTS
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
FEATURES 6
What you can do with the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Part names and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Front display (indicators) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
PREPARATIONS 17
General setup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
1 Placing speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Basic speaker configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Input/output jacks and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2 Connecting the power amplifier and subwoofers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Connecting a power amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Connecting subwoofers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3 Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
4 Connecting playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Connecting to the jacks on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
6 Connecting to a network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
7 Connecting other devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Connecting recording devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Connecting a device with analog multi-channel output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
8 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
9 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) . . . . . . . . . 41
Measuring at one listening position (single measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Checking the measurement results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
PLAYBACK 52
Basic playback procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Selecting an HDMI output jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch
(SCENE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Configuring scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Selecting setting items to be included as scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Selecting the sound mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP HD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Enjoying unprocessed playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Listening to FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Setting the frequency steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Selecting a frequency for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Registering favorite radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
HD Radio™ tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Radio Data System tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Operating the radio on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Playing back iPod music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Playback of iPod content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
En 3
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Connecting a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Playback of USB storage device contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Media sharing setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Playback of PC music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Listening to Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) . . . . . . . . . 82
Multi-zone configuration examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Preparing the multi zone system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Controlling Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Viewing the current status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Switching information on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Viewing the status information on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources
(Option menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Option menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
CONFIGURATIONS 95
Configuring input sources (Input menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Input menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Scene menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Configuring sound programs/surround decoders
(Sound Program menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Sound Program menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Configuring various functions (Setup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Setup menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Speaker (Manual Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Multi Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) . . . . . . . . . 122
Types of information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) . . . . . . 124
ADVANCED SETUP menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Turning on/off the remote control sensor (REMOTE SENSOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE CON AMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TUNER FRQ STEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MONITOR CHECK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Updating the firmware (FIRM UPDATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Checking the firmware version (VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Controlling external devices with the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Registering remote control codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Programming from other remote controls (learning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Editing device names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Operating multiple functions at once (macro) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Resetting the remote control configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Updating the unit’s firmware via the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
APPENDIX 137
Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Power, system and remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
USB and network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
En 4
Error indications on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Audio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
HDMI and video information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Yamaha technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Video signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Multi-zone output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Information on HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
HDMI signal compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Reference diagram (rear panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Accessories En 5
Accessories
Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product.
Remote control Batteries (x4)
AM antenna FM antenna
*One of the above is supplied depending on the region
of purchase.
YPAO microphone Microphone base
*Using for angle measurement
during YPAO.
Power cable
*The supplied power cable varies
depending on the region of purchase.
CD-ROM
(Owner’s Manual)
Setup Guide Safety Brochure
Insert the batteries the right way
round.
AAA, LR03, UM-4
Operating range of the remote control
• Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the operating range
shown below.
• The illustrations of the main unit used in this manual are of the U.S.A. model, unless otherwise
specified.
• Some features are not available in certain regions.
• Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice.
• This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control.
• This manual describes all the “iPod”, “iPhone” and “iPad” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to “iPod”, “iPhone”
and “iPad”, unless otherwise specified.
• indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations.
• indicates supplementary explanations for better use.
30° 30°
Within
6 m (20 ft)
FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit En 6
FEATURES
What you can do with the unit
Speakers
BD/DVD player
HDMI Control
Audio/Video
TV remote control
Audio (via power amplifier)
HDMI Control
Audio
Audio/Video
TV
Sequential operation of a TV,
AV receiver, and BD/DVD
player (HDMI Control)
. p.150
Supports 2- to 11-channel pre-out and up to 2
subwoofer connections. Allows you to enjoy favorite
acoustic spaces in various styles.
• Automatically optimizing the speaker
settings to suit your room (YPAO)
. p.41
• Reproducing stereo or multichannel
sounds with the sound fields like
actual movie theaters and concert halls
(CINEMA DSP)
. p.56
• Enjoying compressed music with
enhanced sound (Compressed Music
Enhancer)
. p.60
iPod/iPhone/iPad
USB device
Network contents
Wide variety of supported content
• iPod/iPhone/iPad
. p.68
•USB
. p.72
• Media server (PC/NAS)
. p.75
• Internet radio
. p.78
•AirPlay
. p.80
3D and Ultra HD (4K) signals supported
AV receiver (the unit)
Change the input source and favorite
settings with one touch (SCENE)
. p.53
Audio
Control
Audio/Video
(via HDMI/MHL)
Smartphone/Tablet
Control
FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit En 7
Full of useful functions!
❑ Connecting various devices (p.32)
A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks
on the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as
BD/DVD players), audio devices (such as CD players),
game consoles, camcorders, and other devices.
❑ Playing back TV audio in surround sound
with a single HDMI cable connection
(Audio Return Channel: ARC) (p.26)
When using an ARC-compatible TV, you only need one
HDMI cable to enable video output to the TV, audio
input from the TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control
signals.
❑ Easy operation and wireless music
playback from iPhone or Android device
By using the application for smartphone/tablet “AV
CONTROLLER”, you can control the unit from an
iPhone, iPad, iPod touch or Android devices. Visit the
Yamaha website for details.
❑ Listening to FM/AM radio (p.61)
The unit is equipped with a built-in FM/AM tuner. You
can register up to 40 favorite radio stations as presets.
❑ Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (p.60)
When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays
back the selected source with the least circuitry, which
lets you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.
❑ Easy operation with a TV screen
You can navigate through different types of content
(such as iPod, USB, and network), view information, or
easily configure the settings using the on-screen menu.
❑ Controlling other Yamaha products in
conjunction with operating the unit (p.39)
The trigger function enables you to control other
Yamaha products (such as power amplifiers and
subwoofers) in conjunction with operating the unit.
❑ DAC Digital Filter (p.111)
You can select the digital filter type of the audio DAC
(digital-to-analog converter) to have favorite sounds.
❑ Operating external devices with the
supplied remote control (p.128)
You can operate external devices with the supplied
remote control by registering the remote control codes
of the external devices (such as a TV and BD/DVD
players).
❑ Backlight illumination remote control
The backlight illumination allows you to easily operate
the remote control even in a dark home theater room.
BD/DVD
player
Game
console
Camcorder
TV
Set-top box
HDMI Control
TV audio
Video from
external device
Useful tips
I want to connect a playback device using HDMI for
video and non-HDMI for audio...
Use “Audio Select” in the “Option” menu to specify the
type of an audio input jack to be used for the
corresponding input source (p.93).
Video and audio are not synchronized...
Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay
between video and audio output (p.109).
I want to hear audio from the TV speakers...
Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to select the
output destination of signals input into the unit (p.114).
Your TV speakers may be selected as an output
destination.
I want to change the on-screen menu language...
Use “Language” in the “Setup” menu to select a
language from English, Japanese, French, German,
Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese (p.40).
I want to update the firmware...
Use “FIRM UPDATE” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu
to update the unit’s firmware (p.127). If the unit is
connected to the Internet, a message will be displayed
on the TV when a firmware update is available (p.136).
Many other settings are available that let you to
customize the unit. For details, see the following
pages.
• Input settings (p.95)
• SCENE settings (p.98)
• Sound program and surround decoder settings
(p.101)
• Various function settings (p.104)
• Information view (such as audio signal and video
signal) (p.123)
• System settings (p.124)
FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit En 8
The excitement of a concert hall and the powerful sense of being inside a movie - we all want to enjoy these
experiences in our own living room. Yamaha has pursued the fulfillment of these desires for more than 20 years, and
this fulfillment has now taken shape as the Yamaha AV receivers.
What is a sound field?
We perceive sound from a voice or an instrument not
only as the sounds that are heard directly but also as
the “reflected” or “reverberant” sound that has been
reflected by the walls or ceiling of the building. The
character of the reflected and reverberant sound is
affected by the shape, size, and material of the building,
and all of these sounds taken together are what give us
the auditory sensation of being in that specific place.
This unique acoustical character of a specific space is
what we call the “sound field”.
Conceptual diagram of a concert hall's sound field
Conceptual diagram of a sound field created by the unit
CINEMA DSP HD
Yamaha has accumulated a massive amount of
acoustical data by analyzing the actual sound fields of
concert halls and performance spaces around the
world. “CINEMA DSP” allows this data to be applied to
create sound fields. This unit contains a wide variety of
sound programs using CINEMA DSP.
By selecting a sound program that is appropriate to the
content of the playback source such as movies, music,
or games, you can maximize the acoustical
effectiveness of that specific content. (For example, a
sound program designed for movies can give you the
sensation of actually being in that scene.)
In addition, the “CINEMA DSP 3D” function uses
3-dimensional sound field data that includes the axis of
height, generating an even more realistic sound field
with a spatial sense.
“CINEMA DSP HD³” is Yamaha's flagship 3D sound field
playback technology that takes full advantage of the
massive amount of acoustic reflection data included in
the sound field data. With support for rear presence
speaker output, it delivers more than twice as much
capability for generating acoustic reflections as
conventional CINEMA DSP 3D, in addition to
high-frequency playback capability, delivering an utterly
natural and powerful spatial sound field.
Capability for reproducing reflections
(when the sound program “Hall in Munich” is selected)
CINEMA DSP
CINEMA DSP HD³
Level
CINEMA DSP 3D
Time
The included YPAO microphone can be used to analyze
the environment so that this information can be used to
automatically adjust various settings for the speakers and
the sound field. This allows the distinctive character of the
content you are hearing to be maximized, and optimizes
the effectiveness of Yamaha's sound field generating
technology for your specific listening environment.
YPAO-R.S.C.
In rooms that have not been designed or constructed
with acoustics in mind, reflections from the walls or
ceiling can cause problems such as a blurred
low-frequency range or a smearing of the acoustical
image. “YPAO-R.S.C.” is technology that reduces only
the unwanted reflections that can be difficult to avoid in
a typical home. This corrects the tonal changes and
inconsistencies in the sound field that can occur due to
speaker placement, thus creating a listening
environment comparable to that of a room specifically
designed for acoustic perfection.
Angle measurement
The direction (angle) of the front
speakers, surround speakers,
and presence speakers as seen
from the listening position is
measured, and compensation
is applied to the sound field in
order to maximize the
effectiveness of the CINEMA DSP sound field.
Optimizing speaker settings
for the environment (YPAO)
Compensation
Time
Level
Microphone base
FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit En 9
High-resolution music enhancer
Hi-bit high-sampling extension up to 96 kHz / 24-bit can
be applied to lossless 44.1/48 kHz content such as from a
CD (2-channel PCM) or a FLAC file for further heightening
of the musicality in the original content (p.93)
Before processing
After processing
High-quality video processing
From low-quality digital video to BD (Blu-ray disc)
images, any content can be played back as a
high-quality image (p.111).
• Motion adaptive and edge adaptive deinterlacing
• Multi-cadence (including 3-2 pull-down) detection
• Up to 6 presets that can be applied separately to each
input source
You can also apply fine touches such as detail
enhancement and edge enhancement.
Unrivaled audio and video quality
Frequency
Loudness
Playback bandwidth of a 44.1/48 kHz
signal (such as a CD)
Frequency
Loudness
Playback bandwidth of a
88.2/96 kHz signal
The best expandability in Yamaha
By connecting a power amplifier, you can enjoy the
highest peak of CINEMA DSP - an 11.2-channel
3-dimensional sound field.
• Flexible connectivity (ready for balanced and
unbalanced connections)
• High-quality audio transmission (XLR balanced
pre-out)
• XLR balanced input jacks for connecting a high-end
CD player
Multi-zone function
The multi-zone function (p.82) allows you to play back
different input sources in the room where the unit is
installed (main zone) and in other rooms (such as Zone2).
(The following shows examples of use.)
Enjoying music using speakers in another room
While enjoying multi-channel playback in your living
room, you can listen to music through the speakers of a
different room.
Enjoying videos using a TV in another room
(HDMI connection)
While enjoying multi-channel playback in your living
room, you can enjoy videos and music being input via
HDMI on a TV in a different room.
Expandable to meet diverse needs
Power amplifier
Living room (main zone)
Study room
(such as Zone2)
Living room (main zone)
Kitchen
(such as Zone4)
FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 10
Front panel
1 MAIN ZONE z key
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.
2 Standby indicator
Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the
following conditions.
• HDMI Control is enabled (p.113)
• Standby Through is enabled (p.114)
• Network Standby is enabled (p.115)
• An iPod is being charged (p.68)
3 Front display
Displays information (p.12).
4 Remote control sensor
Receives remote control signals (p.5).
5 PURE DIRECT key
Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.60).
6 INPUT knob
Selects an input source.
7 Front panel door
For protecting controls and jacks (p.11).
8 VOLUME knob
Adjusts the volume.
Part names and functions
4 5231
6
8
7
Opening the front panel door
• To use controls or jacks behind the front panel door, gently
press the bottom of the door to open it. Keep the door closed
when not using controls or jacks behind the front panel door.
(Be careful not to trap your fingers.)
FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 11
■ Inside of the front panel door
9 ON SCREEN key
Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.
0 Menu operations keys
Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter.
ENTER Confirms a selected item.
RETURN Returns to the previous screen.
A OPTION key
Displays the option menu (p.90).
B DISPLAY key
Displays status information on the TV (p.89).
C TONE/BALANCE key
Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range
of output sounds (p.91).
Adjusts the right/left channel volume balance for Zone2 or
Zone3 (p.88).
D STRAIGHT key
Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.59).
E PROGRAM keys
Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.55).
F SCENE keys
Select the registered input source, sound program, and
various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when
it is in standby mode (p.53).
G MULTI ZONE keys
ZONE 2–4 Enables/disables the audio output to
each zone (p.87).
ZONE CONTROL Changes the zone that is controlled by
the keys and knobs on the front panel
(p.87).
H INFO key
Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.89).
I MEMORY key
Registers FM/AM radio stations as preset stations (p.62).
J FM and AM keys
Switch between FM and AM (p.61).
K PRESET keys
Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.62).
L TUNING keys
Select the radio frequency (p.61).
M USB jack
For connecting a USB storage device (p.72) or an iPod
(p.68).
N YPAO MIC jack
For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.41).
O PHONES jack
For connecting headphones.
P VIDEO AUX jacks
For connecting a device, such as a camcorder and a game
console (p.35, 36) or a smartphone (p.35).
BE JL9ACD HIK0FG
MNO P
FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 12
Front display (indicators)
1 HDMI
Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output.
IN
Lights up when HDMI signals are being input.
OUT1/OUT2
Indicates the HDMI OUT jacks currently outputting an HDMI
signal.
2 STEREO
Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal.
TUNED
Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station
signal.
HD
(U.S.A. model only)
Lights up when the unit is receiving an HD Radio station
signal.
3 ZONE indicators
Lights up when Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 is enabled (p.87).
4 PA RT Y
Lights up when the unit is in the party mode. (p.88)
5 Information display
Displays the current status (such as input name and sound
mode name). You can switch the information by pressing
INFO (p.89).
6 MUTE
Blinks when audio is muted.
7 Volume indicator
Indicates the current volume.
8 ADAPTIVE DRC
Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.91) is working.
9 ENHANCER
Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.60) is
working.
0 CINEMA DSP indicator
“CINEMA DSP HD” lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.56) is
working. “CINEMA DSP ! ” lights up when CINEMA DSP
HD³ is activated.
A SLEEP
Lights up when the sleep timer is on.
B Cursor indicators
Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational.
C Channel indicators
Indicate channels (PRE OUT jacks) from which signals are
output.
A Front (L)
S Front (R)
D Center
F Surround (L)
G Surround (R)
H Surround back (L)
J Surround back (R)
K Surround back
Z Front/rear presence (L)
X Front/rear presence (R)
C Subwoofer (1)
V Subwoofer (2)
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2
SR
PL
CL R
PR
STEREO
ENHANCER
SLEEP
HD
TUNED PARTY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
2
87
6
0
9 BCB
1
5
A
3 4
(U.S.A. model)
FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 13
Rear panel
1 PHONO jacks
For connecting to a turntable (p.34).
2 DC OUT jack
For connecting to an optional accessory.
3 NETWORK jack
For connecting to a network (p.37).
4 AV 1–4 jacks
For connecting to video/audio playback devices and
inputting video/audio signals (p.32).
5 AV OUT jacks
For outputting video/audio to a recording device (such as a
VCR) (p.38).
6 MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
(composite video/S-video) jacks
For connecting to a TV that supports composite video or
S-video and outputting video signals (p.30) or for connecting
to a zone video monitor used in Zone2 or Zone3 (p.84).
7 HDMI OUT 1 jack
For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting
video/audio signals (p.26). When using ARC, TV audio signal
can also be input through the HDMI OUT 1 jack.
8 HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack
For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting
video/audio signals (p.31), or for connecting to an
HDMI-compatible device used in Zone2 or Zone4 (p.85).
9 COMPONENT VIDEO (AV 1–4) jacks
For connecting to video playback devices that support
component video and inputting video signals (p.32).
0 HDMI (AV 1–7) jacks
For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and
inputting video/audio signals (p.32).
A MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT (component video)
jacks
For connecting to a TV that supports component video and
outputting video signals (p.30) or for connecting to a zone
video monitor used in Zone2 or Zone3 (p.84).
B REMOTE IN/OUT 1–2 jacks
For connecting to an infrared signal receiver/emitter that
allows you to operate the unit and other devices from another
room (p.86).
C TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks
For connecting to devices that support the trigger function
(p.39).
D RS-232C terminal
This is a control expansion terminal for custom installation.
Consult your dealer for details.
NETWORKDC OUT
5V
0.5A
( 3
NET
)
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
HDMI OUT
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
12
HDMI
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
RS-232C
YP
B
P
R
YP
B
P
R
YP
B
P
R
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
IN OUT IN OUT
AV 1
AV 3
REMOTE
12
COMPONENT VIDEO
A
AV 2
B
C
AV 4
D
AV OUT
R
L
AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1
(1 BD/DVD)
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
3
COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
1
PHONO
GND
AC IN
OPTICAL
1
2
MULTI CH INPUT
ZONE OUT
AUDIO 4
AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
FRONT
REAR
PRESENCE
FRONT
PRESENCE
SURROUND
BACK
REAR
PRESENCE
FRONT
PRESENCE
SURROUND
BACK
SURROUND SURROUNDFRONT FRONTCENTER
PRE OUT
SURROUND SUR. BACK
5
COAXIAL
6
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
FRONT
SURROUND
SURROUND
BACK
FRONT
PRESENCE
REAR
PRESENCE
(SINGLE) (FRONT)
(REAR)
12V 0.1A
FM AM
75Ω
ANTENNA
HD Radio
(4 RADIO)
R
L
R L
R R R R R
L L L L L
21 3 7 8 D5 6 CA B904
* The area around the video/audio output
jacks is marked in white on the actual
product to prevent improper connections.
(U.S.A. model)
FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 14
E AUDIO 1–3 jacks
For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting
audio signals (p.34).
F AUDIO 4 (XLR) jacks
For connecting to an audio playback device and inputting
audio signals (p.34).
G ANTENNA jacks
For connecting to FM and AM antennas (p.36).
H MULTI CH INPUT jacks
For connecting to a device that supports multi-channel
output and inputting audio signals (p.38).
I ZONE OUT jacks
For connecting to an external amplifier used in Zone2 or
Zone3 and outputting audio (p.83).
J PRE OUT (RCA) jacks
For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (p.25) or
to a power amplifier (p.25).
K PRE OUT (XLR) jacks
For connecting to a power amplifier (p.24).
L AC IN jack
For connecting the supplied power cable (p.39).
NETWORKDC OUT
5V
0.5A
( 3
NET
)
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
HDMI OUT
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
12
HDMI
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
RS-232C
YP
B
P
R
YP
B
P
R
YP
B
P
R
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
IN OUT IN OUT
AV 1
AV 3
REMOTE
12
COMPONENT VIDEO
A
AV 2
B
C
AV 4
D
AV OUT
R
L
AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1
(1 BD/DVD)
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
3
COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
1
PHONO
GND
AC IN
OPTICAL
1
2
MULTI CH INPUT
ZONE OUT
AUDIO 4
AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
FRONT
REAR
PRESENCE
FRONT
PRESENCE
SURROUND
BACK
REAR
PRESENCE
FRONT
PRESENCE
SURROUND
BACK
SURROUND SURROUNDFRONT FRONTCENTER
PRE OUT
SURROUND SUR. BACK
5
COAXIAL
6
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
FRONT
SURROUND
SURROUND
BACK
FRONT
PRESENCE
REAR
PRESENCE
(SINGLE) (FRONT)
(REAR)
12V 0.1A
FM AM
75Ω
ANTENNA
HD Radio
(4 RADIO)
R
L
R L
R R R R R
L L L L L
K LE F I JHG
* The area around the video/audio output
jacks is marked in white on the actual
product to prevent improper connections.
(U.S.A. model)
FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 15
Remote control
1 Remote control signal transmitter
Transmits infrared signals.
2 SOURCE z key
Turns on/off an external device.
SOURCE/RECEIVER key
Changes the device (the unit or external device) that is
operated with the remote control (p.130). You can operate
the unit when this key lights up in orange, and an external
device when this key lights up in green.
RECEIVER z key
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.
3 Display window
Displays remote control information.
4 Input selection keys
Select an input source for playback.
AV 1–7 AV 1–7 jacks
V-AUX VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)
AUDIO 1–4 AUDIO 1–4 jacks
PHONO PHONO jacks
MULTI MULTI CH INPUT jacks
USB USB jack (on the front panel)
NET NETWORK jack (press repeatedly to select a
desired network source)
TUNER FM/AM radio
[A], [B], [C] Change the external device to operate with the
remote control without switching the input
source.
5 SCENE keys
Select the registered input source, sound program, and
various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when
it is in standby mode (p.53).
6 PROGRAM keys
Select a sound program (p.55).
7 External device operation keys
Let you play back and perform other operations for external
devices (p.130).
8 ON SCREEN key
Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.
9 Menu operation keys
Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter.
ENTER Confirms a selected item.
RETURN Returns to the previous screen.
0 MODE key
Switches the iPod operation modes (p.70).
(U.S.A. model only) Selects an HD Radio audio program
(p.63).
A PRESET keys
Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.62).
B TV operation keys
Let you select TV input and volume, and perform other TV
operations (p.129).
C VOLUME keys
Adjust the volume.
D MUTE key
Mutes the audio output.
E OPTION key
Displays the option menu (p.90).
F LIGHT key
Turns on the backlight of the remote control keys for about 10
seconds.
G DISPLAY key
Displays status information on the TV (p.89).
H Sound mode keys
Select a sound mode (p.55).
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-AUX
1 2 3 4
MULTI
PHONO
USB NET
TUNER
[ C ][ A ] [ B ]
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
TV VOL
MUTE
MODE
TOP M ENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
TV CH
PRESET
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
D
E
G
F
1
4
2
5
3
6
C
7
B
8
7
:
9
H
A
FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 16
■ Inside of the remote control cover
I Sound mode keys
Select a sound mode (p.55).
J INFO key
Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.89).
K Numeric keys
Let you enter numerical values, such as radio frequencies.
L ZONE key
Changes the zone that is controlled by the remote control
(p.87).
M PA RT Y k ey
Turns on/off the party mode (p.88).
N HDMI OUT key
Selects HDMI OUT jacks to be used for video/audio output
(p.52).
O Radio keys
Operate the FM/AM radio (p.61).
MEMORY Registers FM/AM radio stations as presets.
FM Switches to FM radio.
AM Switches to AM radio.
TUN./CH Select the radio frequency.
P SLEEP key
Switches the unit to standby mode automatically after a
specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press
repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min,
off).
Q LEVEL key
Adjusts the volume of each speaker (p.108).
R SETUP key
Switches the remote control to the setup mode (p.128).
• To operate external devices with the remote control, register a
remote control code for each device before using (p.128).
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-AUX
1 2 3 4
MULTI
PHONO
USB NET
TUNER
[ C ][ A ] [ B ]
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
TV VOL
MUTE
MODE
TOP M ENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
TV CH
PRESET
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
2 3
5
1
4 6
TUN./ CH
ENHANCER
SUR.
DECODE
HDMI OUT
MEMORY
INFO AM
PA RT Y
FM
0
10
LEVELENT
SETUPZONE
87
SLEEP
9
M
N
P
Q
R
I
K
J
L
O
PREPARATIONS ➤ General setup procedure En 17
PREPARATIONS
This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit!
General setup procedure
1 Placing speakers (p.18)
Select the speaker layout and connect the speakers to the power amplifier. For details on speaker
connections, refer to the instruction manual for the power amplifier.
2
Connecting the power amplifier and
subwoofers (p.24)
Connecting the power amplifier and subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit.
3 Connecting a TV (p.26)
Connect a TV to the unit.
4 Connecting playback devices (p.32)
Connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players) and audio devices (such as CD players) to the unit.
5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas (p.36)
Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.
6 Connecting to a network (p.37)
Connect the unit to a network.
7 Connecting other devices (p.38)
Connect external devices such as recording devices.
8 Connecting the power cable (p.39)
After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable.
9
Selecting an on-screen menu language
(p.40)
Select the desired on-screen menu language.
10
Optimizing the speaker settings
automatically (YPAO) (p.41)
Optimize the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room
(YPAO).
PREPARATIONS ➤ Placing speakers En 18
The unit has 11.2-channel pre-amplifiers. You can connect 2- to 11-channel speakers (via a power amplifier) and up to 2 subwoofers to create the favorite acoustic space in your
room.
You can also apply multi-zone configurations to enhance your system (p.82).
Functions of each speaker
• Use “Ideal speaker layout” (diagram on the right) as reference. You do not need to exactly adjust the
speaker layout to this diagram since the YPAO function of the unit will automatically optimize the speaker
settings (such as distances) to suit the speaker layout.
• When using only one surround back speaker, place it straight behind the listening position (middle of “SBL”
and “SBR” in the diagram).
• The unit creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to
produce 3-dimensional sound fields even when no front presence speakers are connected. However, we
recommend using front presence speakers in order to experience the full effect of the sound fields (and
rear presence speakers for further spatial sounds).
• The unit creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to
produce natural 3-dimensional sound fields when front presence speakers are connected but no rear
presence speakers.
Ideal speaker layout
1 Placing speakers
Speaker type Abbr. Function
Front (L) 1
Produce front right/left channel sounds (stereo sounds).
Front (R) 2
Center 3
Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogues and
vocals).
Surround (L) 4 Produce surround right/left channel sounds. Surround speakers
also produce surround back channel sounds when no surround
back speakers are connected.
Surround (R) 5
Surround back (L) 6
Produce surround back right/left channel sounds.
Surround back (R) 7
Front presence (L) E
Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds. In combination with CINEMA
DSP HD³ (p.56), the presence speakers create a natural
3-dimensional sound field in your room.
Front presence (R) R
Rear presence (L) T
Rear presence (R) Y
Subwoofer 9
Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and
reinforces bass parts of other channels.
This channel is counted as “0.1”. You can connect 2 subwoofers to the
unit and place them on the right/left (or front/rear) sides of the room.
E
12
39
4
6
T Y
5
9
R
7
0.3 m (1 ft) or more
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)
0.5 to 1 m
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)
0.5 to 1 m
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)
10°~30°10°~30°
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤ Placing speakers En 19
Basic speaker configuration
■ Placing speakers in your room
Depending on the number of speakers, place the speakers and subwoofer in your room. This section describes the representative speaker layout examples.
❑ 11.2-channel system
This speaker system brings out the full performance of the unit and allows you to enjoy
a highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field with any contents.
• When Zone3 output is enabled (p.87), the rear presence right/left channel output is not available in the
main zone.
❑ 9.2-channel system (using rear presence speakers)
This speaker system uses the front and rear presence speakers to produce a
highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field, and is suited for enjoying 5.1-channel contents.
• When Zone3 output is enabled (p.87), the rear presence right/left channel output is not available in the
main zone.
E
9
R
12
39
45
6 7
T Y
E
9
R
12
39
45
T Y
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤ Placing speakers En 20
❑ 9.2-channel system (using surround back speakers)
This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural
3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to enjoy extended surround sounds
using the surround back speakers.
• This speaker system creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround
speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field.
❑ 7.1-channel system (using front presence speakers)
This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural
3-dimensional sound field, and is suited for enjoying 5.1-channel contents.
• This speaker system creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround
speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field.
❑ 7.1-channel system (using surround back speakers)
This speaker system creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front,
center and surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows
you to enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back speakers.
❑ 5.1-channel system
This speaker system creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front,
center and surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and is suited for
enjoying 5.1-channel contents.
21
39
45
9
67
ER
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤ Placing speakers En 21
❑ Front 5.1-channel system
This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural
3-dimensional sound field, and creates the virtual surround speakers using the front
speakers to allow you to enjoy multi-channel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA DSP).
❑ 2.1-channel system
Even when no surround speakers are connected, the unit creates the virtual surround
speakers using the front speakers to allow you to enjoy multi-channel surround sound
(Virtual CINEMA DSP).
• Add the center speaker to configure a 3.1-channel system.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤ Input/output jacks and cables En 22
■ Video/audio jacks
❑ HDMI jacks
Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single
jack. Use an HDMI cable.
• Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using
a cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality
degradation.
• The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return
Channel (ARC), and 3D and Ultra HD (4K) video transmission
features.
• Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or Ultra HD (4K) videos.
❑ HDMI/MHL jack
Transmits digital video and digital sound. Use an MHL
cable.
• The VIDEO AUX jack on the front panel of the unit supports both
HDMI and MHL connections. Use a cable that matches the jack on
your MHL-compatible mobile device. When connecting an
HDMI-compatible playback device to the VIDEO AUX jack, use an
HDMI cable. For details on an MHL connection, see “MHL
connection” (p.35).
■ Video jacks
❑ COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
Transmit video signals separated into three
components: luminance (Y), chrominance blue (P
B),
and chrominance red (P
R). Use a component video
cable with three plugs.
❑ S VIDEO jack
Transmits S-video signals that include luminance (Y)
and chrominance (C) components. Use an S-video
cable.
❑ VIDEO jacks
Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable.
■ Audio jacks
❑ OPTICAL jacks
Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical
cable. Remove the tip protector (if available) before
using the cable.
❑ COAXIAL jacks
Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial
cable.
❑ AUDIO jacks
Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin
cable or an audio pin cable (RCA unbalanced cable).
Input/output jacks and cables
AV 1
HDMI cable
MHL cable
COMPONEN
AV 1
A
Component video cable
S-video cable
AV 1
Video pin cable
Digital optical cable
Digital coaxial cable
Stereo pin cable
PREPARATIONS ➤ Input/output jacks and cables En 23
❑ XLR jacks
Transmit analog audio signals. Use an XLR balanced
cable.
XLR input jacks
Match the pins and insert the “male” connector of the
XLR balanced cable until you hear a click.
• When disconnecting the cable from the unit, hold down the PUSH
button on the unit and then pull the connector out.
XLR output jacks
Match the pins and insert the “female” connector of the
XLR balanced cable until you hear a click.
• When disconnecting the cable from the unit, hold down the lever of
the connector and then pull it out.
AUDIO 4
R
XLR balanced cable (male)
CENTER
PRE OUT
XLR balanced cable (female)
About the XLR jacks
• The pin assignments for the XLR jacks of the unit are shown
below. Before connecting an XLR balanced cable, refer to the
instruction manual of your device and verify that its XLR jacks
are compatible with the pin assignments.
XLR input jacks
3. COLD
3. COLD
2. HOT
2. HOT
XLR output jacks
1. GND
1. GND
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting the power amplifier and subwoofers En 24
Connecting a power amplifier
Connect the input jacks of your power amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks of the unit so that
the audio source selected on the unit can be output to the power amplifier for playback.
Select a balanced (XLR) or an unbalanced (RCA) connection for each channel
depending on the input jacks available on your power amplifier.
• The XLR jacks and RCA jacks for each channel output the same signals.
■ Balanced connection
Depending on the speaker system you want to use, connect the corresponding PRE
OUT (XLR) jacks of the unit to the amplifier with XLR balanced cables.
• Before connecting XLR balanced cables, refer to the instruction manual of your power amplifier and verify
that its XLR jacks are compatible with the pin assignments of the unit (p.23).
• We recommend using a power amplifier with volume control bypass (or without volume control circuit).
2 Connecting the power amplifier and subwoofers
Caution
• To prevent the generation of loud noises or abnormal sounds, make sure you remove the power cable
of the unit and turn off the power amplifier before making connections.
XLR
XLR
The unit (rear)
PRE OUT
(XLR) jacks
(Female connector)
(Male connector)
Main input (XLR)
Power amplifier
Speaker
connections
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting the power amplifier and subwoofers En 25
■ Unbalanced connection
Depending on the speaker system you want to use, connect the corresponding PRE
OUT (RCA) jacks of the unit to the amplifier with audio pin cables (RCA unbalanced
cables).
• We recommend using a power amplifier with volume control bypass (or without volume control circuit).
Connecting subwoofers
Connect the subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the SUBWOOFER PREOUT 1–2 jacks
of the unit with audio pin cables (RCA unbalanced cables).
• Only unbalanced connections are available for subwoofers.
• You can connect 2 subwoofers to the unit and place them on the right/left (or front/rear) sides of the room.
When using 2 subwoofers, configure the “SWFR Layout” setting (p.108) in the “Setup” menu after
connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet.
The unit (rear)
Main input
(RCA)
Power amplifier
Speaker
connections
PRE OUT
(RCA) jacks
99
The unit (rear)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 26
Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV.
You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit.
The connection method varies depending on the functions and video input jacks
available on your TV.
Refer to the instruction manual of the TV and choose a connection method.
■
Connection Method 1 (HDMI Control/ARC-compatible TV)
Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable.
• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “HDMI” parameters
(p.113) in the “Setup” menu.
• HDMI Control is available only on the HDMI OUT 1 jack.
• Use an HDMI cable that supports ARC.
• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, any video input to the unit can be output to the TV,
regardless of the method used to connect the video device to the unit. For details, see “Video signal flow”
(p.148).
• You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.31).
3 Connecting a TV
About HDMI Control
HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV
that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s
power and volume with the TV’s remote control. You can also control playback
devices (such as an HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD player) connected to the
unit with an HDMI cable. For details, see “HDMI Control” (p.150).
About Audio Return Channel (ARC)
ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways under HDMI Control. If you connect a
TV that supports HDMI Control and ARC to the unit with a single HDMI cable, you
can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit.
Does your TV support
Audio Return Channel (ARC)?
Does your TV support
HDMI Control?
Does your TV have an
HDMI input jack?
■ Connection Method 3 (p.29)
■ Connection Method 2 (p.28)
■ Connection Method 1 (p.26)
■ Connection Method 4 (p.30)
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
HDMI OUT
ARC (ZONE OUT)
12
HDMI
ARC
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI OUT 1 jack
HDMI input
(ARC-compatible)
The unit (rear)
TV
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 27
❑ Necessary settings
To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the following settings.
For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.
1
After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback devices)
and the power cable to the unit, turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.
2
Configure the settings of the unit.
a Check that ARC is enabled on the TV.
b Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.
c Press ON SCREEN.
d Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
e Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”.
f Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER.
g Use the cursor keys to select “On”.
h Press ON SCREEN.
3
Configure the settings for HDMI Control.
a Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI
Control-compatible BD/DVD player).
b Turn off the TV’s main power and then turn off the unit and playback devices.
c Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV’s main power.
d Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.
e Check the following.
On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not,
select the input source manually.
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.
f Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or
adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.
This completes the necessary settings.
If you select a TV program with the TV remote control, the input source of the unit will be
automatically switched to “AUDIO 1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
If you cannot hear the TV’s audio, check that “ARC” (p.114) in the “Setup” menu is set
to “On”.
• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try turning off and on (or unplugging and then plugging in again)
the devices. It may solve the problem.
• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on
the TV.
• If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.114) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use an audio
cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable) to input TV audio to the unit (p.28).
• “AUDIO 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1
jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use
the SCENE function (p.53), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).
RETURN DISPLAY
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
RETURN
D
I
S
P
L
AY
OPTI
O
N
ON SCREEN
Cursor keys
ENTER
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 28
■ Connection Method 2 (HDMI Control-compatible TV)
Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and an audio cable (digital optical or
stereo pin cable).
• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “HDMI” parameters
(p.113) in the “Setup” menu.
• HDMI Control is available only on the HDMI OUT 1 jack.
• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, any video input to the unit can be output to the TV,
regardless of the method used to connect the video device to the unit. For details, see “Video signal flow”
(p.148).
• You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.31).
❑ Necessary settings
To use HDMI Control, you need to configure the following settings.
For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.
1
After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback
devices) and power cable of the unit, turn on the unit, TV, and
playback devices.
2
Configure the settings of the unit.
a Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.
b Press ON SCREEN.
c Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
d Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”.
e Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER.
f Use the cursor keys to select “On”.
g Press ON SCREEN.
HDMI OUT
ARC (ZONE OUT)
12
HDMI
OPTICAL
AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
5
AUDIO
OPTICAL
R
L
HDMI
HDMI
R
L
R
L
OO
The unit (rear)
HDMI OUT 1 jack
AUDIO 1
(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks
Audio output
(digital optical or analog stereo)
TV
HDMI input
RETURN DISPLAY
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
RETURN
D
I
S
P
L
AY
OPTI
O
N
ON SCREEN
Cursor keys
ENTER
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 29
3
Configure the settings for HDMI Control.
a Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as a HDMI
Control-compatible BD/DVD player).
b Turn off the TV’s main power and then turn off the unit and playback devices.
c Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.
d Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.
e Check the following.
On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not,
select the input source manually.
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.
f Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or
adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.
This completes the necessary settings.
If you select a TV program with the TV remote control, the input source of the unit will be
automatically switched to “AUDIO 1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try turning off and on (or unplugging and then plugging in again)
the devices. It may solve the problem.
• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on
the TV.
• “AUDIO 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1
jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use
the SCENE function (p.53), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).
■ Connection Method 3 (TV with HDMI input jacks)
Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and an audio cable (digital optical or
stereo pin cable).
If you select “AUDIO 1” as the input source by pressing AUDIO 1 or SCENE(TV) on the
remote control, the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, any video input to the unit can be output to the TV,
regardless of the method used to connect the video device to the unit. For details, see “Video signal flow”
(p.148).
• If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1 jacks, connect the TV to one of the AUDIO 2–3
jacks. To use the SCENE function (p.53), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).
• You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.31).
HDMI OUT
ARC (ZONE OUT)
12
HDMI
OPTICAL
AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
5
AUDIO
OPTICAL
R
L
HDMI
HDMI
R
L
R
L
OO
The unit (rear)
HDMI OUT 1 jack
AUDIO 1
(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks
Audio output
(digital optical or analog stereo)
TV
HDMI input
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 30
■ Connection Method 4 (TV without HDMI input jacks)
Depending on the video input jacks available on your TV, choose one of the following
connections.
If you select “AUDIO 1” as the input source by pressing AUDIO 1 or SCENE(TV) on the
remote control, the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
• If you connect your TV to the unit with a cable other than HDMI, video input to the unit via HDMI cannot be
output to the TV. Also, analog videos that can be output to the TV differ according to the “Analog to Analog
Conversion” setting in the “Setup” menu. For details, see “Video signal flow” (p.148).
• If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1 jacks, connect the TV to one of the AUDIO 2–3
jacks. To use the SCENE function (p.53), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).
❑ COMPONENT VIDEO connection (with a component video cable)
❑ S VIDEO connection (with an S-video cable)
❑ VIDEO (composite video) connection (with a video pin cable)
OPTICAL
AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
5
AUDIO
OPTICAL
R
L
YPB PR
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
YPB PR
COMPONENT VIDEO
P
R
P
B
Y
Y
P
R
P
B
R
L
R
L
OO
The unit (rear)
MONITOR OUT
(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks
Video input
(component video)
AUDIO 1
(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks
Audio output
(digital optical or analog stereo)
TV
OPTICAL
AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
5
AUDIO
OPTICAL
R
L
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
S VIDEO
R
L
R
L
S
S
OO
The unit (rear)
MONITOR OUT (S VIDEO) jack
Video input (S-video)
AUDIO 1
(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks
Audio output
(digital optical or analog stereo)
TV
OPTICAL
AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
5
AUDIO
OPTICAL
R
L
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
VIDEO
V
V
OO
R
L
R
L
The unit (rear)
MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack
Video input (S-video)
AUDIO 1
(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks
Audio output
(digital optical or analog stereo)
TV
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 31
■ Connecting another TV or a projector
The unit has two HDMI output jacks. If you connect another TV or a projector to the unit
with an HDMI cable, you can switch the TV (or projector) to be used for watching
videos with the remote control (p.52).
• HDMI Control is not available on the HDMI OUT 2 jack.
• If you set “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.118) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2” or “Zone4”, you can connect a video
monitor for Zone2 or Zone4 to the HDMI OUT 2 jack and enjoy videos and audio using the video monitor
(p.85).
HDMI
HDMI OUT
ARC (ZONE OUT)
12
HDMI
HDMI
The unit (rear)
HDMI OUT 2 jack
HDMI input
Projector
TV (already connected)
TV
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 32
The unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks including HDMI input jacks to allow
you to connect different types of playback devices. For information on how to connect
an iPod or a USB storage device, see the following pages.
• Connecting an iPod (p.68)
• Connecting a USB storage device (p.72)
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)
Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game
consoles to the unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video
device, choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI
connection if the video device has an HDMI output jack.
• Videos input to the unit via HDMI cannot be output to a TV connected to the unit with a cable other than
HDMI.
• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment”
setting (p.119) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COMPONENT VIDEO (A , B , C ,
D ), COAXIAL (a, b, f) and OPTICAL (c, d, e) jacks to another input source.
• If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit
will be determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.93) in the “Option” menu.
■ HDMI connection
Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable.
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–7 on the remote control, the video/audio
played back on the video device will be output from the unit.
■ Component video connection
Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable
(digital coaxial, digital optical or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the
unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4 on the remote control, the video/audio
played back on the video device will be output from the unit.
4 Connecting playback devices
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
The unit (rear)
HDMI output
Video device
HDMI (AV 1–7) jacks
Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit
Video Audio
Component video
Digital coaxial AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL)
Digital optical AV 3–4 (COMPONENT VIDEO + OPTICAL)
Analog stereo AV 1–4 (COMPONENT VIDEO + AUDIO)
YPB PR
YPB PR
R
L
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
PR
PB
Y
Y
PR
PB
C C
OO
R
L
R
L
The unit (rear)
AV 1–4
(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks
Video output
(component video)
Video device
Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)
Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL),
AV 3–4 (OPTICAL),
AV 1–4 (AUDIO) jacks
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 33
■ S-video connection
Connect a video device to the unit with an S-video cable and an audio cable (digital
coaxial, digital optical or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit)
depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4 on the remote control, the video/audio
played back on the video device will be output from the unit.
■ Composite video connection
Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital
coaxial, digital optical, or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit)
depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4 on the remote control, the video/audio
played back on the video device will be output from the unit.
Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit
Video Audio
S-video
Digital coaxial AV 1–2 (S VIDEO + COAXIAL)
Digital optical AV 3–4 (S VIDEO + OPTICAL)
Analog stereo AV 1–4 (S VIDEO + AUDIO)
S VIDEO
S
S
R
L
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
CC
L
R
L
R
OO
The unit (rear)
AV 1–4
(S VIDEO) jacks
Video output
(S-video)
Video device
Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)
Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL),
AV 3–4 (OPTICAL),
AV 1–4 (AUDIO) jacks
Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit
Video Audio
Composite video
Digital coaxial AV 1–2 (VIDEO + COAXIAL)
Digital optical AV 3–4 (VIDEO + OPTICAL)
Analog stereo AV 1–4 (VIDEO + AUDIO)
R
L
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
VIDEO
CC
L
R
L
R
OO
V
V
The unit (rear)
AV 1–4 (VIDEO) jacks
Video output
(composite video)
Video device
Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)
Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL),
AV 3–4 (OPTICAL),
AV 1–4 (AUDIO) jacks
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 34
Connecting audio devices (such as CD players)
Connect audio devices such as CD players, MD players, and a turntable to the unit.
Depending on the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the
following connections.
• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment”
setting (p.119) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COAXIAL (a, b, f) and OPTICAL
(c, d, e) jacks to another input source.
• Before connecting XLR balanced cables, refer to the instruction manual of your audio device and verify that
its XLR jacks are compatible with the pin assignments of the unit (p.23).
• If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit
will be determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.93) in the “Option” menu.
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4 or PHONO on the remote
control, the audio played back on the audio device will be output from the unit.
Audio output jacks on audio device Audio input jacks on the unit
Digital coaxial
AV 1–2 (COAXIAL)
AUDIO 2 (COAXIAL)
Digital optical
AV 3–4 (OPTICAL)
AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL)
Analog stereo (RCA)
AV 1–4 (AUDIO [RCA])
AUDIO 1–3 (AUDIO [RCA])
Analog stereo (XLR) AUDIO 4 (AUDIO [XLR])
Turntable (PHONO) PHONO
When connecting a turntable
• The PHONO jack of the unit is compatible with an MM cartridge. To connect a turntable with a
low-output MC cartridge, use a boosting transformer.
• Connecting the turntable to the GND terminal of the unit may reduce noise in the signal.
R
L
PHONO
GND
R
L
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
R
L
PHONO
GND
XLR
XLR
XLR
XLR
L
R
L
R
C C
OO
R
L
R
L
Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)
Any of AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4
(COAXIAL, OPTICAL, AUDIO [RCA],
AUDIO [XLR]) jacks
The unit
(rear)
Audio device
PHONO jacks
Audio output
(PHONO)
Turntable
Ground lead
(Male connector)
(Female
connector)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 35
Connecting to the jacks on the front panel
Use the VIDEO AUX jack to temporarily connect a playback device to the unit.
Use the USB jack to connect an iPod or a USB storage device. For details, see
“Connecting an iPod” (p.68) or “Connecting a USB storage device” (p.72).
Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on
the unit.
• When “USB” is selected as the input source, video signals input to the VIDEO AUX jacks are output to the
TV by default. You can change the video out setting in “Video Out” (p.96) in the “Input” menu.
❑ HDMI connection
Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the
unit with an HDMI cable.
If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX on the remote control on
the remote control, the video/audio played back on the device will be output from the
unit.
• To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI
OUT jack of the unit (p.26 to 29).
• You need to prepare an HDMI cable that matches the output jacks on your device.
❑ MHL connection
Connect an MHL-compatible mobile device (such as smartphones) to the unit with an
MHL cable. You can enjoy full HD videos and multichannel audio sources stored on the
mobile device. The VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack of the unit enables you to input
videos and audio directly from the mobile device to the unit.
If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played
back on the mobile device will be output from the unit.
• To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI
OUT jack of the unit (p.26 to 29).
• You need to prepare an MHL cable that matches the jack on your mobile device.
• If you cannot hear sounds played on the mobile device, check the volume of the mobile device.
• You can operate the mobile device using the menu operation keys, external device operation keys and
numeric keys on the remote control. However, some features may not be compatible, depending on the
mobile device or its application. In this case, operate the mobile device itself.
• If “Standby Through” (p.114) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, you can output mobile device videos/audio
to the TV or operate the mobile device using the remote control of the unit even when the unit is in standby
mode.
• The unit supplies power to the mobile device in the following conditions.
– The unit is turned on.
– The unit is in standby mode while “Standby Through” (p.114) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”.
HDMI
Game console
Camcorder
The unit (front)
MHL
MHL
Mobile device
MHL output
The unit (front)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting the FM/AM antennas En 36
❑ Composite video/analog stereo/digital optical connection
Connect a playback device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the unit with a
video pin cable and an audio cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable).
If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played
back on the device will be output from the unit.
• If you connect video devices to both the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack and VIDEO AUX
(VIDEO/AUDIO/OPTICAL) jacks, the unit outputs video/audio input through the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL
IN) jack.
Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.
Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface.
V RL
O
Game console
Camcorder
The unit (front)
5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas
• The location of the antenna jacks varies depending on the region of purchase.
FM antenna
AM antenna
The unit (rear)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network En 37
Assembling the AM antenna
Connecting the AM antenna
• Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit.
• The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity.
Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5
or higher straight cable).
You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and
Network Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit.
• If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit,
as the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to
configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network
parameters manually (p.115).
• You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in
“Network” (p.123) in the “Information” menu.
• Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router)
may block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the
security software or firewall settings appropriately.
• Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit.
• To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended.
Hold down Insert Release
6 Connecting to a network
LAN
WAN
Network Attached Storage
(NAS)
Internet
Modem
Router
Network cable
PC
The unit (rear)
Mobile device
(such as iPhone)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting other devices En 38
Connecting recording devices
You can connect video/audio recording devices to the AV OUT jacks. These jacks
output video/audio signals selected as the input.
• The AV OUT jacks cannot output video/audio signals input through the HDMI or COMPONENT VIDEO
jacks.
• Be sure to use the AV OUT jacks only for connecting recording devices.
Connecting a device with analog multi-channel output
You can connect an analog multi-channel output device such as a DVD player and an
SACD player to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.
If you select “MULTI CH” as the input source by pressing MULTI on the remote control,
the audio played back on the device will be output from the unit.
• You can select a video source to be displayed when “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source using
“Video Out” (p.96) in the “Input” menu. When connecting a video device (such as a DVD player) to the
MULTI CH INPUT jacks, use the input jack specified in “Video Out” for the video connection.
• Since the unit does not redirect signals input to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing
speakers, make appropriate settings on the external device (such as a DVD player) that suit to the speaker
configuration.
• When “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source, sound mode selection and tone control adjustment are
not available.
7 Connecting other devices
VIDEO
S VIDEO
AUDIO
OPTICAL
AV OUT
R
L
V
L
R
L
R
OO
S
S
V
The unit (rear)
AV OUT jacks
Video/audio input
Video/audio
recording device
MULTI CH INPUT
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
SURROUND SUR. BACK
L
R
L
R
L
R
The unit (rear)
MULTI CH
INPUT jacks
Channel output
(Center)
Device with analog
multi-channel output
(Subwoofer)
(Surround
back)
(Surround)
(Front)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting the power cable En 39
Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function
The trigger function can control an external device in conjunction with operating the
unit (such as powering on/off and input selection). If you have a power amplifier or a
Yamaha subwoofer that supports a system connection or a device with a trigger input
jack, you can use the trigger function by connecting the external device to one of the
TRIGGER OUT jacks.
• You can configure the trigger function settings in “Trigger Output1” and “Trigger Output2” (p.120) in the
“Setup” menu.
After all the connections are complete, connect the supplied power cable to the unit
and then to an AC wall outlet.
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
12V 0.1A
The unit (rear)
TRIGGER OUT
1–2 jacks
System
connection
input
Yamaha
subwoofer
Power amplifier
(such as
Yamaha MX-A5000)
Trigger In
(+12V)
8 Connecting the power cable
To an AC wall outlet
The unit (rear)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤ Selecting an on-screen menu language En 40
Select the desired on-screen menu language from English,
Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese.
1
Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
2
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit.
3
Press ON SCREEN.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press
ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Language” and
the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired
language.
6
To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
7
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
• The information on the front display is provided in English only.
9 Selecting an on-screen menu language
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
MULTI
PHONO
USB NET
TUNER
[ C ][ A ] [ B ]
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
TV VOL
MUTE
MODE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
TV CH
PRESET
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
U
D
I
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-
A
U
X
1
2
3
4
MUL
TI
L
L
PH
O
N
O
US
B
NE
T
TUNE
R
[
C
]
[
A
]
[
B
]
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
DIRE
CT
MUTE
TV
SC
EN
E
1
2
3
4
PR
OGR
A
M
V
O
LUME
TV
V
O
L
MUTE
M
O
D
E
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
DI
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
O
PTI
O
N
ON SCREEN
ENTER
RECEIVER z
Cursor keys
PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 41
The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function
detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to
your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the
speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic
parameters, to suit your room.
• The YPAO function of the unit adopts the YPAO-R.S.C. (Reflected Sound Control)
technology that enables to create natural sound fields like a room specifically
designed for acoustic perfection.
• Please note the following when using YPAO.
– Use YPAO after connecting a TV and speakers to the unit.
– During the measuring process, test tones are output at high volume. Ensure that
the test tones do not frighten small children. Also, refrain from using this function
at night when it may be a nuisance to others.
– During the measuring process, you cannot adjust the volume.
– During the measuring process, keep the room as quiet as possible.
– Do not connect headphones.
1
Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
2
Turn on the power amplifier.
3
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit.
4
Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If
the crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to
maximum.
5
Place the YPAO microphone at your listening
position (same height as your ears) and connect it
to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel.
10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
VOLUME HIGH CUT
CROSSOVER/
MIN MAXMIN MAX
9
YPAO MIC
9 9
12
3
45
ER
The unit (front)
YPAO
microphone
Ear height
Place the YPAO microphone at
your listening position (same height
as your ears). We recommend the
use of a tripod as a microphone
stand. You can use the tripod
screws to stabilize the microphone.
(The microphone direction is not
considered.)
YPAO MIC
jack
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
MULTI
PHONO
USB NET
TUNER
[ C ][ A ] [ B ]
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
TV VOL
MUTE
MODE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
TV CH
PRESET
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
U
D
I
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-
A
U
X
1
2
3
4
MUL
TI
L
L
PH
O
N
O
US
B
NE
T
TUNE
R
[
C
]
[
A
]
[
B
]
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
DIRE
CT
MUTE
TV
SC
EN
E
1
2
3
4
PR
OGR
A
M
V
O
LUME
TV
V
O
L
MUTE
M
O
D
E
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
DI
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
ENTER
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
RECEIVER z
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 42
The following screen appears on the TV.
• To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone before starting
the measurement.
6
If desired, select the measuring options.
a Use the cursor keys to select “Multi Position” (p.42) or “Angle”
(p.43) and press ENTER.
b Use the cursor keys to select a setting and then press ENTER.
• If the cursor keys do not work, the remote control may be set to operate
external devices. In this case, press SOURCE/RECEIVER (to light up the
key in orange) and then use the cursor keys.
This completes the preparations. See the following page to start the
measurement.
When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”:
“Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure)” (p.46)
When “Multi Position” is set to “No”:
“Measuring at one listening position (single measure)” (p.44)
❑ Multi Position
Selects multi measure or single measure.
Settings
• If you perform the multi measure, the speaker settings will be optimized for you to
enjoy surround sound in a wider space.
• If you perform the multi measure, first place the YPAO microphone at the listening
position you will be seated most frequently.
Yes
Select this option if you will have several listening
positions or if you want others to enjoy surround sound.
You can take measurements at up to 8 different positions
in the room. The speaker settings will be optimized to
suit the area defined by those positions (multi measure).
No (default)
Select this option if your listening position will always be
fixed. Take the measurements at only one position. The
speaker settings will be optimized to suit that position
(single measure).
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
MULTI
PHONO
USB NET
TUNER
[ C ][ A ] [ B ]
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
TV VOL
MUTE
MODE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
TV CH
PRESET
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
AV
A
U
D
I
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-
A
U
X
1
2
3
4
MUL
TI
L
L
PH
O
N
O
US
B
NE
T
TUNE
R
[
C
]
[
A
]
[
B
]
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
DIRE
CT
MUTE
TV
SC
EN
E
1
2
3
4
PR
OGR
A
M
V
O
LUME
TV
V
O
L
MUTE
M
O
D
E
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
DI
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
ENTER
SOURCE/RECEIVER
Cursor keys
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 43
❑ Angle
Enables/disables the angle measurement.
Settings
a b
a
a
b
c
d
e
c
d
de
bac
Multi measure
(5 listening positions)
Multi measure
(2 listening positions + front/back)
Multi measure
(1 listening position + front/back/left/right)
Single measure
Yes
Enables the angle measurement. The unit will measure
angle of each speaker at the listening position and
correct the speaker parameters so that CINEMA DSP
can create more effective sound fields.
No (default) Disables the angle measurement.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 44
Measuring at one listening position
(single measure)
When “Multi Position” is set to “No”, follow the procedure below for
measurement.
• Do not stand between the speakers and the YPAO microphone during the
measurement process (about 5 minutes).
• Move to the corner of the room or leave the room.
• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears,
see “Error messages” (p.50) or “Warning messages” (p.51).
1
To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to
select “Measure” and press ENTER.
The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER
again to start the measurement immediately.
• To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.
The following screen appears on the TV when the
measurement finishes.
(When angle measurement is disabled)
Proceed to Step 3.
(When angle measurement is enabled)
Proceed to Step 2.
2
Perform the angle measurement.
a Use the cursor keys to select “YES” and press ENTER.
Select “NO” to cancel the angle measurement.
b Place the supplied microphone base at the listening position and
set the YPAO microphone to the position “1”.
• We recommend using a tripod to place the microphone base at ear height.
Use the tripod screws to fix the microphone base in place.
• Do not move the microphone base until the third angle measurement
finishes.
FRONT
DIRECTION
Microphone
base
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
MULTI
PHONO
USB NET
TUNER
[ C ][ A ] [ B ]
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
TV VOL
MUTE
MODE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
TV CH
PRESET
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
U
D
I
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-
A
U
X
1
2
3
4
MUL
TI
L
L
PH
O
N
O
US
B
NE
T
TUNE
R
[
C
]
[
A
]
[
B
]
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
DIRE
CT
MUTE
TV
SC
EN
E
1
2
3
4
PR
OGR
A
M
V
O
LUME
TV
V
O
L
MUTE
M
O
D
E
T
O
P
MENU
DI
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
ENTER
RETURN
Cursor keys
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 45
c Press ENTER to start the first angle measurement.
The following screen appears on the TV when the first angle
measurement finishes.
d In the same way, perform the angle measurement for the
positions “2” and “3”.
The following screen appears on the TV when the third angle
measurement finishes.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and
press ENTER.
• To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see
“Checking the measurement results” (p.48).
4
To save the measurement results, use the cursor
keys (e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
The adjusted speaker settings are applied.
• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.
5
Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.
This completes optimization of the speaker settings.
Caution
• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
MULTI
PHONO
USB NET
TUNER
[ C ][ A ] [ B ]
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
TV VOL
MUTE
MODE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
TV CH
PRESET
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
U
D
I
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-
A
U
X
1
2
3
4
MUL
TI
L
L
PH
O
N
O
US
B
NE
T
TUNE
R
[
C
]
[
A
]
[
B
]
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
DIRE
CT
MUTE
TV
SC
EN
E
1
2
3
4
PR
OGR
A
M
V
O
LUME
TV
V
O
L
MUTE
M
O
D
E
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
DI
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
ENTER
Cursor keys
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 46
Measuring at multiple listening positions
(multi measure)
When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”, follow the procedure below for
measurement.
• Do not stand between the speakers and the YPAO microphone during the
measurement process. It takes about 15 minutes to measure 8 listening positions.
• Move to the corner of the room or leave the room.
• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears,
see “Error messages” (p.50) or “Warning messages” (p.51).
1
To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to
select “Measure” and press ENTER.
The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER
again to start the measurement immediately.
• To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.
The following screen appears on the TV when the
measurement at the first position finishes.
2
Move the YPAO microphone to the next listening
position and press ENTER.
Repeat Step 2 until measurements at all listening positions
(up to 8) have been taken.
3
When the measurements at the positions you want
to measure are completed, use the cursor keys to
select “CANCEL” and press ENTER.
When you have taken measurements at 8 listening
positions, the following screen appears automatically.
(When angle measurement is disabled)
Proceed to Step 5.
(When angle measurement is enabled)
Proceed to Step 4.
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
MULTI
PHONO
USB NET
TUNER
[ C ][ A ] [ B ]
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
TV VOL
MUTE
MODE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
TV CH
PRESET
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
U
D
I
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-
A
U
X
1
2
3
4
MUL
TI
L
L
PH
O
N
O
US
B
NE
T
TUNE
R
[
C
]
[
A
]
[
B
]
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
DIRE
CT
MUTE
TV
SC
EN
E
1
2
3
4
PR
OGR
A
M
V
O
LUME
TV
V
O
L
MUTE
M
O
D
E
T
O
P
MENU
DI
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
ENTER
RETURN
Cursor keys
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 47
4
Perform the angle measurement.
a Use the cursor keys to select “YES” and press ENTER.
Select “NO” to cancel the angle measurement.
b Place the supplied microphone base at the listening position you
will be seated most frequently and set the YPAO microphone to
the position “1”.
• We recommend using a tripod to place the microphone base at ear height.
Use the tripod screws to fix the microphone base in place.
• Do not move the microphone base until the third angle measurement
finishes.
c Press ENTER to start the first angle measurement.
The following screen appears on the TV when the first angle
measurement finishes.
d In the same way, perform the angle measurement for the
positions “2” and “3”.
The following screen appears on the TV when the third angle
measurement finishes.
5
Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and
press ENTER.
• To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see
“Checking the measurement results” (p.48).
6
To save the measurement result, use the cursor
keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
The adjusted speaker settings are applied.
• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.
FRONT
DIRECTION
Microphone
base
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
MULTI
PHONO
USB NET
TUNER
[ C ][ A ] [ B ]
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
TV VOL
MUTE
MODE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
TV CH
PRESET
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
U
D
I
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-
A
U
X
1
2
3
4
MUL
TI
L
L
PH
O
N
O
US
B
NE
T
TUNE
R
[
C
]
[
A
]
[
B
]
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
DIRE
CT
MUTE
TV
SC
EN
E
1
2
3
4
PR
OGR
A
M
V
O
LUME
TV
V
O
L
MUTE
M
O
D
E
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
DI
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
ENTER
Cursor keys
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 48
7
Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.
This completes optimization of the speaker settings.
Checking the measurement results
You can check the YPAO measurement results.
1
After the measurement, use the cursor keys to
select “Result” and press ENTER.
• You can also select “Result” from “Auto Setup” (p.104) in the “Setup” menu,
which displays the previous measurement results.
The following screen appears.
1 Measurement result items
2 Measurement result details
3 The number of measured positions (when multi
measure is performed)
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item.
• A speaker with a problem is indicated with a message enclosed in a red box.
• If there are speakers that cannot be detected, check the power amplifier
settings and connections.
3
To finish checking the results and return to the
previous screen, press RETURN.
Caution
• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).
2
3
1
Wiring
Polarity of each speaker
Normal: The speaker cable is connected with the
correct polarity (+/-).
Reverse: The speaker cable may be connected with the
reverse polarity (+/-).
Size
Size of each speaker (cross-over frequency of the
subwoofer)
Large: The speaker can reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively.
Small: The speaker cannot reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively.
Distance Distance from the listening position to each speaker
Level Output level adjustment for each speaker
Angle Angle of each speaker at the listening position
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
MULTI
PHONO
USB NET
TUNER
[ C ][ A ] [ B ]
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
TV VOL
MUTE
MODE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
TV CH
PRESET
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
U
D
I
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-
A
U
X
1
2
3
4
MUL
TI
L
L
PH
O
N
O
US
B
NE
T
TUNE
R
[
C
]
[
A
]
[
B
]
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
DIRE
CT
MUTE
TV
SC
EN
E
1
2
3
4
PR
OGR
A
M
V
O
LUME
TV
V
O
L
MUTE
M
O
D
E
T
O
P
MENU
DI
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
ENTER
RETURN
Cursor keys
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 49
Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments
When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not
suitable, follow the procedure below to discard the manual settings
and reload the previous YPAO adjustments.
1
In the “Setup” menu, select “Speaker”, “Auto
Setup”, and then “Result” (p.103).
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload” and
press ENTER.
3
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
MULTI
PHONO
USB NET
TUNER
[ C ][ A ] [ B ]
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
TV VOL
MUTE
MODE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
TV CH
PRESET
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
U
D
I
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-
A
U
X
1
2
3
4
MUL
TI
L
L
PH
O
N
O
US
B
NE
T
TUNE
R
[
C
]
[
A
]
[
B
]
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
DIRE
CT
MUTE
TV
SC
EN
E
1
2
3
4
PR
OGR
A
M
V
O
LUME
TV
V
O
L
MUTE
M
O
D
E
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
DI
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
O
PTI
O
N
ON SCREEN
ENTER
Cursor keys
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 50
Error messages
If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again.
Error message Cause Remedy
E-1: No Front SP Front speakers are not detected.
Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit and power amplifier, and then check the
power amplifier connections (to the unit or to the corresponding speakers).
(This error message will be also displayed if you perform YPAO when the power amplifier is turned off.)
E-2: No Sur. SP One of the surround speakers cannot be detected.
E-3: No F.PRNS SP One of the front presence speakers cannot be detected.
E-4: SBR → SBL A surround back speaker is connected to the R side only.
When using only one surround back speaker, you need to connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). Follow the
on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit and power amplifier, and then reconnect the speaker.
E-5: Noisy The noise is too loud.
Keep the room quiet and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If you select
“PROCEED”, YPAO takes the measurement again and ignores any noise detected.
E-6: Check Sur.
Surround back speakers are connected, but no surround
speakers are connected.
Surround speakers need to be connected in order to use surround back speakers. Follow the on-screen
instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit and power amplifier, and then reconnect the speakers.
E-7: No MIC The YPAO microphone has been removed.
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the
measurement again.
E-8: No Signal The YPAO microphone cannot detect test tones.
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the
measurement again. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service
center.
E-9: User Cancel The measurement has been canceled. Follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. To cancel the measurement, select “EXIT”.
E-10: Internal Error An internal error has occurred.
Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact
the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
E-11: No R.PRNS SP One of the rear presence speakers cannot be detected.
Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit and power amplifier, and then check the
power amplifier connections (to the unit or to the rear presence speakers).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 51
Warning messages
If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions.
However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings.
Warning message Cause Remedy
W-1: Out of Phase
A speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity
(+/-).
Select “Wiring” in “Result” (p.48) and check the cable connections (+/-) of the speaker identified by
“Reverse”. If the speaker is connected incorrectly, turn off the unit and power amplifier, and then reconnect
the speaker cable. Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message may appear even
if the speakers are connected correctly. In this case, you can ignore the message.
The pin assignments of the XLR jacks of the unit and power
amplifier are not same.
Check the pin assignments of the XLR jacks of the power amplifier. If they are not compatible with the pin
assignments of the unit (p.23), change the pin assignment setting of the power amplifier or use unbalanced
(RCA) connections.
W-2: Over Distance
A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft) from the listening
position.
Select “Distance” in “Result” (p.48) and move the speaker identified by “>24.00m (>80.0ft)” within 24 m (80
ft) of the listening position.
W-3: Level Error
There are significant volume differences between the
speakers.
Check the usage environment and cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the
subwoofer. We recommend using the same speakers or speakers with specifications that are as similar as
possible.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PLAYBACK ➤ Basic playback procedure En 52
PLAYBACK
1
Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or
BD/DVD player) connected to the unit.
2
Use the input selection keys to select an input
source.
3
Start playback on the external device or select a
radio station.
Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.
For details on the following operations, see the
corresponding pages.
• Listening to FM/AM radio (p.61)
• Playing back iPod music (p.68)
• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
(p.72)
• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
(p.75)
• Listening to Internet radio (p.78)
• Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay)
(p.80)
4
Press VOLUME to adjust the volume.
• To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute.
• To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu or
TONE/BALANCE on the front panel (p.91).
On-screen input selection
a Press ON SCREEN.
b Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.
c Use the cursor keys to select the desired input source and
press ENTER.
Selecting an HDMI output jack
1
Press HDMI OUT to select an HDMI OUT jack.
Each time you press the key, the HDMI OUT jack to be
used for signal output changes.
• You can also select an HDMI output jack by selecting a scene (p.53).
• When “OUT 1+2” is selected, the unit outputs video signals at the highest
resolution supported by both TVs (or projectors) connected to the unit. (For
example, if you have connected a 1080p TV to the HDMI OUT 1 jack and a 720p
TV to the HDMI OUT 2 jack, the unit outputs 720p video signals.)
• If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2 or Zone4 (p.118), you can turn on/off
each zone by pressing HDMI OUT repeatedly.
Basic playback procedure
OUT 1+2
Outputs the same signal at both the HDMI OUT 1
and HDMI OUT 2 jacks.
OUT 1
Output the signals at the selected HDMI OUT jack.
OUT 2
Off Does not output the signals at the HDMI OUT jacks.
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
STEREO
ENHANCER
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
OUT1+2
HDMIOUTSel.
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
MULTI
PHONO
USB NET
TUNER
[ C ][ A ] [ B ]
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
TV VOL
MUTE
MODE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
TV CH
PRESET
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
2 3
5
1
46
TUN./ CH
ENHANCER
SUR.
DECODE
HDMI OUT
MEMORY
INFO AM
PAR TY
FM
0
10
LEVELENT
SETUPZONE
87
SLEEP
9
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
SC
EN
E
1
2
3
4
PR
OGR
A
M
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
DI
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
O
PTI
O
N
2
3
5
1
4
6
T
U
N.
/
CH
ENHAN
CE
R
SUR
.
DE
CO
D
E
M
EM
O
RY
I
NF
O
AM
PA
RT
Y
FM
0
10
LEVE
L
EN
T
S
ET
UP
Z
O
NE
8
7
S
LE
E
P
9
HDMI OUT
ON SCREEN
ENTER
MUTE
VOLUME
[
C
]
[
A
]
[
B
]
Cursor keys
Input selection keys
PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) En 53
The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source, sound program, HDMI output and various settings with just one touch.
You can use up to 12 scenes to register your favorite settings and switch them depending on a playback source.
1
Press SCENE.
The input source and settings registered to the
corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on
automatically when it is in standby mode.
By default, the following settings are registered for each scene.
• You can select SCENE 1–4 by pressing SCENE on the remote control.
Additionally, you can create 8 scenes (SCENE 5–12) and select those scenes
from the “Scene” menu (p.97).
On-screen scene selection
a Press ON SCREEN.
b Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.
c Use the cursor keys to select a desired scene and press
ENTER.
Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)
SCENE (SCENE key) 1 (BD/DVD) 2 (TV) 3 (NET) 4 (RADIO)
Input
Input (p.52) AV 1 AUDIO 1 NET RADIO TUNER
Audio Select (p.93) Auto Auto — —
HDMI Output HDMI Output (p.52) OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2
Mode
Sound Program (p.55) Sci-Fi STRAIGHT 11ch Stereo 11ch Stereo
Pure Direct Mode (p.110) Auto Auto Auto Auto
Enhancer (p.60) Off On On On
Enhancer Hi-Res Mode (p.93) On On On On
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
MULTI
PHONO
USB NET
TUNER
[ C ][ A ] [ B ]
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
TV VOL
MUTE
MODE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
TV CH
PRESET
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
U
D
I
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-
A
U
X
1
2
3
4
MUL
TI
L
L
PH
O
N
O
US
B
NE
T
TUNE
R
[
C
]
[
A
]
[
B
]
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
DIRE
CT
MUTE
TV
PR
OGR
A
M
V
O
LUME
TV
V
O
L
MUTE
M
O
D
E
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
DI
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
O
PTI
O
N
ON SCREEN
ENTER
SCENE
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) En 54
Configuring scene assignments
1
Set the unit to the condition (such as input source
and sound program) that you want to assign to a
scene.
2
Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET
Complete” appears on the front display.
3
If you want to control the corresponding playback
device after selecting the scene, hold down the
corresponding SCENE key and input selection key
together for more than 3 seconds.
Once the setting is completed successfully, “OK” appears in the
display window on the remote control.
• If you have not registered the remote control code of the playback device yet, see
“Registering the remote control codes for playback devices” (p.129) to register it.
• The SCENE link playback function allows you to start playback of an external
device connected to the unit via HDMI. To enable SCENE link playback, specify
the device type in “Device Control” (p.98) in the “Scene” menu.
Selecting setting items to be included as
scene assignments
In addition to the default scene assignments (Input, HDMI Output
and Mode), you can also include the following setting items as the
scene assignments in “Detail” (p.99) in the “Scene” menu.
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
STEREO
ENHANCER
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
SETComplete
SCENE1
Sound Tone Control, Adaptive DRC
Surround
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode, Dialogue Lift, Dialogue
Level, Subwoofer Trim, Extended Surround
Video Video Mode, Video Adjustment
Vol ume Master Volume
Lipsync Lipsync, Delay
Speaker Setup Setting Pattern, PEQ Select
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
MULTI
PHONO
USB NET
TUNER
[ C ][ A ] [ B ]
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
TV VOL
MUTE
MODE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
TV CH
PRESET
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
DIRE
CT
MUTE
TV
PR
OGR
A
M
V
O
LUME
TV
V
O
L
MUTE
M
O
D
E
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
DI
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
ENTER
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
SCENE
[
C
]
[
A
]
[
B
]
Input selection keys
PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 55
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and
surround decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with
your favorite sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo
playback).
❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for movies
• MOVIE THEATER category (p.57):
Press MOVIE repeatedly.
• ENTERTAINMENT category (p.57):
Press ENTERTAIN repeatedly.
This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for viewing
video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games.
❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for music or
stereo playback
• CLASSICAL category (p.58):
Press CLASSICAL repeatedly.
• LIVE/CLUB category (p.58):
Press LIVE/CLUB repeatedly.
• STEREO category (p.58):
Press STEREO repeatedly.
This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for listening
music sources or stereo playback.
❑ Selecting a surround decoder
• Press SUR.DECODE repeatedly.
This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed multichannel playback from
2-channel sources (p.59).
❑ Switching to the straight decode mode
• Press STRAIGHT.
• This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed sounds in original
channels (p.59).
❑ Switching to the Pure Direct mode
•Press PURE DIRECT.
This mode lets you enjoy pure high fidelity sound by reducing the
electrical noise from other circuitry (p.60).
❑ Enabling Compressed Music Enhancer
• Press ENHANCER.
This mode lets you enjoy compressed music with additional depth
and breadth (p.60).
On-screen sound program/surround decoder selection
a Press ON SCREEN.
b Use the cursor keys to select “Sound Program” and press
ENTER.
c Use the cursor keys to select a sound program/surround
decoder and press ENTER.
• You can also switch the sound programs and surround decoder by pressing
PROGRAM.
• You can change the settings of the surround programs and surround decoders in
the “Sound Program” menu (p.100).
• The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source.
• You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the
channel indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.12) or at the “Audio Signal” screen in
the “Information” menu (p.122).
Selecting the sound mode
2 3
5
1
46
TUN./ CH
ENHANCER
SUR.
DECODE
HDMI OUT
MEMORY
INFO AM
PAR TY
FM
0
10
LEVELENT
SETUPZONE
87
SLEEP
9
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
MULTI
PHONO
USB NET
TUNER
[ C ][ A ] [ B ]
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
TV VOL
MUTE
MODE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
TV CH
PRESET
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
2
3
5
1
4
6
T
U
N.
/
CH
HDMI
OU
T
MEM
O
RY
INF
O
AM
PA
RT
Y
FM
0
10
LEVE
L
EN
T
S
ET
U
PZ
O
NE
8
7
S
LE
E
P
9
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
A
V
A
UDI
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
MUL
TI
L
L
PH
O
N
O
US
B
NE
T
TUNE
R
[
C
]
[
A
]
[
B
]
INPU
T
MUTE
TV
SC
EN
E
1
2
3
4
V
O
LUME
TV
V
O
L
MUTE
M
O
D
E
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
DI
S
P
L
AY
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
O
PTI
O
N
SUR.DECODE
ENHANCER
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO
STRAIGHT
PURE DIRECT
ON SCREEN
ENTER
PROGRAM
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 56
Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields
(CINEMA DSP HD)
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize
Yamaha’s original DSP technology (CINEMA DSP HD³). It allows
you to easily create sound fields like actual movie theaters or
concert halls in your room and enjoy natural stereoscopic sound
fields.
• To use the conventional CINEMA DSP, set “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.91) in the
“Option” menu to “Off”.
• The unit creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and
surround speakers to produce 3-dimensional sound fields even when no front
presence speakers are connected. However, we recommend using front presence
speakers in order to experience the full effect of the sound fields (and rear
presence speakers for further spatial sounds).
• The unit creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and
surround speakers to produce natural 3-dimensional sound fields when front
presence speakers are connected but no rear presence speakers.
■ Enjoying sound field effects without
surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP)
If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and
11ch Stereo) when no surround speakers are connected, the unit
utilizes Yamaha’s original virtual surround technology to reproduce
up to 7-channel surround sound and enable you to enjoy the
well-oriented sound field only with the front-side speakers. We
recommend using presence speakers in order to enjoy more
effective stereoscopic sound field.
■ Enjoying surround sound with
headphones (SILENT CINEMA)
You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel
speaker system, with stereo headphones by connecting the
headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting a sound program
or a surround decoder.
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
STEREO
ENHANCER
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
HallinVienna
CLASSICAL
MUSIC
“CINEMA DSP !” lights up
Sound program category
Sound program
PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 57
■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE)
The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as
movies, TV programs, and games.
❑ MOVIE THEATER
❑ ENTERTAINMENT
Standard
This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling
without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio,
such as Dolby Digital and DTS. Its design is based on the concept of the
ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful
reverberations from the left, right, and rear.
Spectacle
This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie
productions. It delivers an expansive sound space to match the
cinemascope wide-screen, and boasts a broad dynamic range, providing
everything from small delicate sounds to powerful loud booms.
Sci-Fi
This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the
latest Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of
cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear
separation between dialogue, sound effects, and background music.
Adventure
This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and
adventure movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but
puts emphasis on reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides,
powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth
creates a clear and powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation
of the sounds and the separation of the channels.
Drama
This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of
movie genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The
reverberations are modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects
and background music are reproduced with a gentle echo that does not
impinge on the articulation of the dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for
long periods.
Mono Movie
This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies,
in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a
pleasant space with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate
reverberation to the original audio.
Sports
This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts
and light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’
voices are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the
stadium is realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of
the fans in a suitable space.
Action Game
This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting
games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player
feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater
concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music
Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field.
Roleplaying Game
This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This
program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction
of background music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of
scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music
Enhancer for a clearer and more spatial sound field.
Music Video
This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as
if you were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere
thanks to the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence
sound field that emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround
sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.
Recital/Opera
This program controls the amount of reverberations at an optimum level and
emphasizes the depth and clarity of human voices to offer the
reverberations of an orchestra box in front the listener at the same time as
providing the acoustic positioning and feeling of presence on the stage.
The surround sound field is relatively moderate, but the data for concert hall
effects are used to represent the inherent beauty of music. The listener will
not be fatigued even after long hours of opera entertainment.
Pavilion
This program reproduces vocals clearly, letting you feel the spaciousness
of a pavilion. Reverberation, which is somewhat delayed, reproduces the
live acoustics unique to a pavilion, and helps to make concert scenes more
exciting.
Disco
This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the
heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also
characterized by high-energy, “immediate” sound.
PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 58
■ Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback
(MUSIC)
The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources.
You can also select stereo playback.
❑ CLASSICAL
❑ LIVE/CLUB
❑ STEREO
• CINEMA DSP HD³ (p.56) and Virtual CINEMA DSP (p.56) do not work when “2ch Stereo” or “11ch Stereo”
is selected.
Hall in Munich A
This sound field simulates a concert hall with approximately 2500 seats in
Munich, using stylish wood for the interior finishing as normal standards for
European concert halls. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly,
creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center
left of the arena.
Hall in Munich B
This hall is frequently used for recording orchestral music, and is a
shoe-box type concert hall with around 1300 seats. The hall is constructed
from marble, resulting in relatively flat resonance. Further, the high ceiling
causes sound to reverberate for longer than usual.
Hall in Frankfurt
This is a large shoe-box type concert hall with around 2400 seats located in
Frankfurt. This hall has a very solid, powerful sound. The listener’s virtual
seat is in the center-right section on the first floor.
Hall in Stuttgart
This is a large asymmetrical concert hall with around 2000 seats located in
downtown Stuttgart. Sound reflected off the concrete wall located to the left
of listeners has a powerful presence.
Hall in Vienna
This program simulates a 1,700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a
shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings
create extremely complex reverberations from all around the audience,
producing a very full, rich sound.
Hall in Amsterdam
The large, shoe box shaped hall seats about 2,200 around the circle stage.
Reflections are rich and pleasing while the sound travels freely.
Hall in USA A
This is a large 2600 seat concert hall in the United States which features a
fairly traditional European design. The interior is relatively simple, in the
American style. The middle and high frequencies are richly and beautifully
reinforced.
Hall in USA B
This spacious arch-shaped hall has a dome ceiling and can seat 2600. The
ample resonance apparent in the sound is a feature brought about by
longer than average period of reverberation. In addition to this, the reflector
suspended above the stage allows listeners to experience rich sound from
the direction of the stage.
Church in Tokyo
The acoustic environment of an ordinary church with moderate
reverberations. The reverberation lasts 2.5 seconds. This is ideal for
reproducing church organ and choral music.
Church in Freiburg
Located in the south of Germany, this grand, stone-built church has a
pointed tower at 120 meters in height. Its long and narrow shape and the
high ceiling enable the elongated reverberation time and limited initial
reflection time. Thus, the rich reverberation rather than the sound itself
reproduces the atmosphere of the church.
Church in
Royaumont
This program features the sound field created by the refectory (dining hall)
of a beautiful medieval Gothic monastery located in Royaumont on the
outskirts of Paris.
Chamber
This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an
audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable
for courtly music and chamber music.
Village Gate
This is the sound field at a jazz club that was in New York. It is in a
basement and has a relatively spacious floor area. The listener’s virtual seat
is at the center left of the hall.
Village Vanguard
The Jazz club is on 7th Avenue, New York. This small club with the low
ceiling makes the powerful reflections converge toward the stage located in
the center.
Warehouse Loft
The warehouse resembles some lofts in Soho. Sound reflects off the
concrete walls clearly with a lot of energy.
Cellar Club
This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and
homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds
that make you feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small
stage.
The Roxy Theatre
This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert
venue in Los Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the
hall.
The Bottom Line
This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a
famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left
and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.
Arena
This program gives you long delays between direct sounds and effect
sounds, with the extraordinarily spacious feel of a large arena.
2ch Stereo
Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When
multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and
output from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP).
11ch Stereo
Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back
multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and
then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger
sound field and is ideal for background music at parties.
PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 59
Enjoying unprocessed playback
You can play back input sources without any sound field effect
processing.
■ Playing back in original channels
(straight decode)
When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces
stereo sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as
CDs, and produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for
multichannel sources.
1
Press STRAIGHT.
Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is
enabled or disabled.
• To enable 6.1/7.1-channel playback from 5.1-channel sources when surround
back speakers are used, set “Extended Surround” (p.92) in the “Option” menu to a
setting other than “Off”.
■ Playing back 2-channel sources in
multichannel (surround decoder)
The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel
playback from 2-channel sources. When a multichannel source is
input, it works the same way as the straight decode mode.
For details on each decoder see “Glossary” (p.145).
1
Press SUR.DECODE to select a surround decoder.
Each time you press the key, the surround decoder
changes.
• You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoders when headphones are
connected or when “Surround Back” (p.107) in the “Setup” menu is set to
“None”.
VOLUME
SBL SBR
SW1
SL SR
CL R
STRAIGHT
bPro Logic
Uses the Dolby Pro Logic decoder suitable for all
sources.
bPLIIx Movie
Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic II decoder) suitable for movies.
bPLII Movie
bPLIIx Music
Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic II decoder) suitable for music.
bPLII Music
bPLIIx Game
Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic II decoder) suitable for games.
bPLII Game
Neo:6 Cinema Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder suitable for movies.
Neo:6 Music Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder suitable for music.
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
STEREO
ENHANCER
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
ProLogic
SUR.DECODE
2 3
5
1
46
TUN./ CH
ENHANCER
SUR.
DECODE
HDMI OUT
MEMORY
INFO AM
PAR TY
FM
0
10
LEVELENT
SETUPZONE
87
SLEEP
9
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
MULTI
PHONO
USB NET
TUNER
[ C ][ A ] [ B ]
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
TV VOL
MUTE
MODE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
TV CH
PRESET
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
2
3
5
1
4
6
T
U
N.
/
CH
ENHAN
CE
R
HDMI
OU
T
MEM
O
RY
INF
O
AM
PA
RT
Y
FM
0
10
LEVE
L
EN
T
S
ET
U
PZ
O
NE
8
7
S
LE
E
P
9
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
A
V
A
UDI
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
MUL
TI
L
L
PH
O
N
O
US
B
NE
T
TUNE
R
[
C
]
[
A
]
[
B
]
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
MO
VI
E
S
TERE
O
INPU
T
PUR
E
D
IRE
CT
MUTE
TV
SC
EN
E
1
2
3
4
PR
OGR
A
M
V
O
LUME
TV
V
O
L
MUTE
M
O
D
E
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
DI
S
P
L
AY
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
ENTER
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
SUR.DECODE
STRAIGHT
PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 60
Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct)
When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays back the
selected source with the least circuitry in order to reduce the
electrical noise from other circuitry (such as the front display). It
allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.
1
Press PURE DIRECT.
Each time you press the key, the Pure Direct mode is
enabled or disabled.
• When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the following functions are not available.
– Some settings for the speakers or sound programs
– Operating the on-screen and “Option” menus
– Using the multi-zone function
– Output from the AV OUT jacks
– Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation)
Enjoying compressed music with enhanced
sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)
Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the
sound, allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original
sound before it was compressed. This function can be used along
with any other sound modes.
In addition, Compressed Music Enhancer enhances the quality of
uncompressed digital audio (such as 2-channel PCM and FLAC)
when “Hi-Res Mode” (p.93) in the “Option” menu is set to “On”
(default).
1
Press ENHANCER.
Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer
is enabled or disabled.
• Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling
rate is over 48 kHz.
• You can also use “Enhancer” (p.93) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable
Compressed Music Enhancer.
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
STEREO
ENHANCER
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
PUREDIRECT
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
STEREO
ENHANCER
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
EnhancerOn
“ENHANCER” lights up
2 3
5
1
46
TUN./ CH
ENHANCER
SUR.
DECODE
HDMI OUT
MEMORY
INFO AM
PAR TY
FM
0
10
LEVELENT
SETUPZONE
87
SLEEP
9
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
MULTI
PHONO
USB NET
TUNER
[ C ][ A ] [ B ]
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
TV VOL
MUTE
MODE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
TV CH
PRESET
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
2
3
5
1
4
6
T
U
N.
/
CH
SUR
.
D
E
CO
D
E
HDMI
OU
T
MEM
O
RY
INF
O
AM
PA
RT
Y
FM
0
10
LEVE
L
EN
T
S
ET
U
PZ
O
NE
8
7
S
LE
E
P
9
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
A
V
A
UDI
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
MUL
TI
L
L
PH
O
N
O
US
B
NE
T
TUNE
R
[
C
]
[
A
]
[
B
]
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
MO
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INPU
T
MUTE
TV
SC
EN
E
1
2
3
4
PR
OGR
A
M
V
O
LUME
TV
V
O
L
MUTE
M
O
D
E
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
DI
S
P
L
AY
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
ENTER
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
ENHANCER
PURE DIRECT
PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 61
You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or
selecting from registered radio stations.
• The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is
being used. The explanation of this section uses a display with frequencies used
in U.K. and Europe models.
• If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM
antennas.
Setting the frequency steps
(Asia model only)
At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and
9 kHz for AM. Depending on your country or region, set the
frequency steps to 100 kHz for FM and 10 kHz for AM.
1
Set the unit to standby mode.
2
When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel,
press MAIN ZONE z.
3
Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “TUNER FRQ
STEP”.
4
Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”.
5
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby
mode and turn it on again.
Selecting a frequency for reception
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2
Press FM or AM to select a band.
3
Use the following keys to set a frequency.
TUN./CH: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the
key for about a second to search stations automatically.
Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to
select 98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT).
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio
station.
“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.
• “Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of
reception range.
• (U.S.A. model only)
You can switch between “Auto” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM radio
reception in “Audio Mode” (p.94) in the “Option” menu. When the signal
reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may
improve it. (HD Radio programs are not available when the unit is in the
monaural reception mode.)
• (Except for U.S.A. model)
You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM
radio reception in “FM Mode” (p.94) in the “Option” menu. When the signal
reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may
improve it.
Listening to FM/AM radio
MAIN ZONE z STRAIGHT
PROGRAM
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
3
ZONE
2
STEREO
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
FM50/AM9
TUNERFRQSTEP
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CLR
PR
STEREO
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
FM87.50MHz
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
STEREO
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
FM98.50MHz
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
MULTI
PHONO
USB NET
TUNER
[ C ][ A ] [ B ]
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
TV VOL
MUTE
MODE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
TV CH
PRESET
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
2 3
5
1
4 6
TUN./ CH
ENHANCER
SUR.
DECODE
HDMI OUT
MEMORY
INFO AM
PAR TY
FM
0
10
LEVELENT
SETUPZONE
87
SLEEP
9
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
A
V
A
UDI
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
MUL
TI
L
L
PH
O
N
O
US
B
N
ET
[
C
]
[
A
]
[
B
]
SC
EN
E
1
2
3
4
PR
OGR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
DI
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
ENTER
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
ENHAN
CE
R
SUR
.
DE
CO
D
E
HDMI
OU
T
M
EM
O
RY
I
NF
O
PA
RT
Y
LEVE
L
S
ET
UP
Z
O
NE
S
LE
E
P
TUN./CH
FM
AM
TUNER
Numeric keys
PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 62
Registering favorite radio stations (presets)
You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have
registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their
preset numbers.
• You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals and HD
Radio stations (U.S.A. model only) by using “Auto Preset” (p.65, p.67).
■ Registering a radio station
Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.
1
Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.61)
to tune into the desired radio station.
• (U.S.A. model only)
To register a specific HD Radio program, select an audio program (p.63)
after tuning into the radio station.
2
Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds.
The first time that you do register a station, the selected
radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”.
Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered
to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most
recently registered number.
• To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning
into the desired radio station, use PRESET or numeric keys to select a
preset number, and then press MEMORY again.
■ Selecting a preset station
Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2
Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio
station.
You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by
using the numeric keys after pressing PRESET once.
• “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered.
• “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered.
• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.
• To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.65, p.67).
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
STEREO
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
PresetOK
01:FM98.50MHz
Preset
Preset number
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
STEREO
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
FM98.50MHz
02:Empty
Preset
“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
STEREO
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
01:FM98.50MHz
Preset
2 3
5
1
4 6
TUN./ CH
ENHANCER
SUR.
DECODE
HDMI OUT
MEMORY
INFO AM
PAR TY
FM
0
10
LEVELENT
SETUPZONE
87
SLEEP
9
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
MULTI
PHONO
USB NET
TUNER
[ C ][ A ] [ B ]
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
TV VOL
MUTE
MODE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
TV CH
PRESET
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
T
U
N.
/
CH
E
NHAN
CE
R
SUR
.
D
E
CO
D
E
HDMI
OU
T
I
NF
O
AM
PA
RT
Y
FM
LEVE
L
S
ET
U
PZ
O
NE
S
LE
E
P
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
A
V
A
UDI
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
MUL
TI
L
L
PH
O
N
O
US
B
NE
T
[
C
]
[
A
]
[
B
]
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
MO
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INPU
T
PUR
E
D
IRE
CT
MUTE
TV
SC
EN
E
1
2
3
4
PR
OGR
A
M
V
O
LUME
TV
V
O
L
MUTE
M
O
D
E
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
DI
S
P
L
AY
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TV
CH
ENTER
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
MEMORY
PRESET
TUNER
Numeric keys
PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 63
HD Radio™ tuning
(U.S.A. model only)
HD Radio Technology is a new technology that enables FM/AM
radio stations to broadcast programs digitally. Digital broadcasting
provides listeners with radically improved audio quality and
reception as well as new data services. Furthermore, supplemental
program services allow listeners to select from up to 8 HD Radio
programs multicast on a single FM HD Radio channel. For further
information on HD Radio Technology, visit
“http://www.ibiquity.com/”.
The unit is equipped with an HD Radio reception feature, facilitating
CD quality FM broadcasts as well as analog FM stereo quality AM
broadcasts. In addition, the unit can receive both audio and data
(such as song titles, artist names, album titles and program types)
from all HD Radio programs (HD1 to HD8).
When tuning into an HD Radio station
• The unit is capable of receiving both hybrid and all-digital FM/AM radio stations. If
you cannot search the desired all-digital HD Radio station by holding down
TUN./CH, enter the frequency directly using the numeric keys.
• When the unit is in the monaural reception mode (p.94), you can tune into the
analog part of a hybrid HD Radio station only.
■ Selecting an HD Radio™ audio program
You can select an audio program when the unit is tuned into an HD
Radio station that provides multiple audio programs (up to 8).
1
Press MODE repeatedly to select a desired audio
program.
You can also enter an audio program number (1 to 8)
directly by using the numeric keys. For example, to select
program 3, press 3 and then ENT (or just leave it).
■ Displaying the HD Radio™ information
You can switch the HD Radio information displayed on the front display.
1
Press INFO.
Each time you press the key, the item switches.
About 3 seconds later, the information is displayed.
• Some audio programs may not provide information depending on the station
or period of time.
Program Service Data: Contributes to the superior user experience
of HD RadioTechnology. Presents song name, artist, station IDs,
HD2/HD3 Channel Guide, and other relevant data streams.
Adjacent to traditional main stations are extra local FM channels.
These HD2/HD3 Channels provide new, original music as well as
deep cuts into traditional genre.
Digital, CD-quality sound. HD Radio Technology enables local radio
stations to broadcast a clean digital signal. AM sounds like today’s
FM and FM sounds like a CD.
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
WXYZ-FM
FM88.9MHz1
HD1/3
Relative/total program number
(when multiple programs are available)
“HD” lights up Absolute program number
(when multiple programs are available)
Station Info Frequency, station name (call sign)
Category Station name (call sign), program category
Artist/Song Station name (call sign), artist name/song title
Album Station name (call sign), album title
DSP Program Frequency, sound program selected on the unit
Audio Decoder Frequency, decoder selected on the unit
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
WXYZ-FM
FM88.9MHz3
HD2/3
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
Category
Info
Item name
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
RhythmandBlu
WXYZ-FM
FM88.9-1
2 3
5
1
4 6
TUN./ CH
ENHANCER
SUR.
DECODE
HDMI OUT
MEMORY
INFO AM
PAR TY
FM
0
10
LEVELENT
SETUPZONE
87
SLEEP
9
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
MULTI
PHONO
USB NET
TUNER
[ C ][ A ] [ B ]
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
TV VOL
MUTE
MODE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
TV CH
PRESET
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
E
NHAN
CE
R
SUR
.
D
E
CO
D
E
HDMI
OU
T
MEM
O
RY
AM
PA
RT
Y
FM
LEVE
L
S
ET
U
PZ
O
NE
S
LE
E
P
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
A
V
A
UDI
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
MUL
TI
L
L
PH
O
N
O
US
B
NE
T
TUNE
R
[
C
]
[
A
]
[
B
]
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
MO
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INPU
T
PUR
E
D
IRE
CT
MUTE
TV
SC
EN
E
1
2
3
4
PR
OGR
A
M
V
O
LUME
TV
V
O
L
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
DI
S
P
L
AY
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
ENTER
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
ENT
TUN./CH
INFO
MODE
Numeric keys
PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 64
■ Holding HD Radio™ information display
You can hold the HD Radio information currently displayed on the
TV (playback screen) and front display by using the hold function.
1
When the desired HD Radio information is
displayed, press OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Hold/Unhold”
(Hold/Unhold) and press ENTER.
The current information will remain displayed until
“Hold/Unhold” is selected again.
• Texts in parentheses denote indications on the front display.
• The hold function is automatically disabled if the unit is set to standby mode
or if another input source or another radio station is selected.
3
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
■ HD Radio™ operation on the TV
You can view the HD Radio information or select a radio station on
the TV.
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
❑ Playback screen
1 HOLD indicator
Flashes when the hold function (p.64) is enabled.
2 Radio station information
Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected
band (FM/AM) and frequency.
When tuning into an HD Radio station, the selected audio program
number and HD Radio information (station name [call sign], program
category, artist name, album name and song title) are also displayed.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
3 HD indicator
Lights up when an HD Radio station signal is received.
4 TUNED/STEREO indicators
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.
“STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received.
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
1
2
4
5
3
Menu Submenu Function
Manual Tuning
FM
Switches to FM/AM.
AM
Tuning (+/-) Selects a frequency.
Auto (+/-) Selects a radio station automatically.
Program (+/-)
Selects an audio program (when
multiple audio programs are
available).
Memory
Registers the selected station as
presets.
Direct Enters a frequency directly.
Browse
Moves to the browse screen (preset
station list).
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows
the background. Press one of the
menu operation keys to redisplay it.
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
MULTI
PHONO
USB NET
TUNER
[ C ][ A ] [ B ]
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
TV VOL
MUTE
MODE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
TV CH
PRESET
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
U
D
I
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-
A
U
X
1
2
3
4
MUL
TI
L
L
PH
O
N
O
US
B
NE
T
[
C
]
[
A
]
[
B
]
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
DIRE
CT
MUTE
TV
SC
EN
E
1
2
3
4
PR
OGR
A
M
V
O
LUME
TV
V
O
L
MUTE
M
O
D
E
T
O
P
MENU
DI
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
O
N
SC
REE
N
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
TUNER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 65
■ Browse screen
1 Preset station list
Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a
preset station and press ENTER to tune into it.
2 Preset number
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
• If HD Radio stations are detected by “Auto Preset”, only the audio program 1
(HD1) will be registered. If you want to register a specific HD Radio program,
register it manually (p.62).
Radio Data System tuning
(U.K. and Europe models only)
Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM
stations in many countries. The unit can receive various types of
Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program
Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio
Data System broadcasting station.
■
Displaying the Radio Data System information
1
Tune into the desired Radio Data System
broadcasting station.
• We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System
broadcasting stations (p.67).
2
Press INFO.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for
the displayed item appears.
Menu Submenu Function
Utility
Memory
Registers the current station to the
preset number selected in the list.
Auto Preset
Automatically registers HD Radio
(FM/AM) stations and FM radio
stations with strong signals (up to 40
stations).
Clear Preset
Clear the preset station selected in the
list.
Clear All Preset Clear all the preset stations.
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the
list.
1 Page Down
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows
the background. Press one of the
menu operation keys to redisplay it.
3
2
1
Program Service Program service name
Program Type Current program type
Radio Text Information on the current program
Clock Time Current time
DSP Program Sound mode name
Audio Decoder Decoder name
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
STEREO
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
ProgramType
Info
Item name
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
STEREO
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
CLASSICS
FM98.50MHz
Information
Frequency (always displayed)
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
MULTI
PHONO
USB NET
TUNER
[ C ][ A ] [ B ]
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
TV VOL
MUTE
MODE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
TV CH
PRESET
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
2 3
5
1
46
TUN./ CH
ENHANCER
SUR.
DECODE
HDMI OUT
MEMORY
INFO AM
PAR TY
FM
0
10
LEVELENT
SETUPZONE
87
SLEEP
9
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
A
V
A
UDI
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
MUL
TI
L
L
PH
O
N
O
US
B
N
ET
TUNE
R
[
C
]
[
A
]
[
B
]
SC
EN
E
1
2
3
4
PR
OGR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
DI
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
2
3
5
1
4
6
T
U
N.
/
CH
ENHAN
CE
R
SUR
.
DE
CO
D
E
HDMI
OU
T
M
EM
O
RY
AM
PA
RT
Y
FM
0
10
LEVE
L
EN
T
S
ET
UP
Z
O
NE
8
7
S
LE
E
P
9
INFO
ENTER
RETURN
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 66
• “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not
displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System
service.
■ Receiving traffic information
automatically
When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, the unit
automatically receives traffic information. To enable this function,
follow the procedure below to set the traffic information station.
1
When “TUNER” is selected as the input source,
press OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Traffic Program”
(TrafficProgram) and press ENTER.
The traffic information station search will start in 5 seconds.
Press ENTER again to start the search immediately.
• To search upward/downward from the current frequency, press the cursor
keys (q/w) while “READY” is displayed.
• To cancel the search, press RETURN.
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
The following screen appears for about 3 seconds when the
search finishes.
• “TP Not Found” appears for about 3 seconds when no traffic information
stations are found.
Operating the radio on the TV
You can view the radio information or select a radio station on the
TV.
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
■ Playback screen
1 Radio station information
Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected
band (FM/AM) and frequency.
(U.K. and Europe models only)
When tuning into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.65), the
Radio Data System information (“Program Service”, “Program Type,”
“Radio Text” and “Clock Time”) is also displayed.
2 Band icon
(Except for U.K. and Europe models)
Select this icon and press ENTER to switch between FM and AM.
3 TUNED/STEREO indicators
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.
“STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received.
4 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
STEREO
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
TPFM101.30MHz
TrafficProgram
Finished
Traffic information station (frequency)
• (U.S.A. model only)
See “HD Radio™ operation on the TV” (p.64) to operate the radio on the TV.
2
1
3
4
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
MULTI
PHONO
USB NET
TUNER
[ C ][ A ] [ B ]
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
TV VOL
MUTE
MODE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
TV CH
PRESET
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
U
D
I
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-
A
U
X
1
2
3
4
MUL
TI
L
L
PH
O
N
O
US
B
NE
T
[
C
]
[
A
]
[
B
]
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
DIRE
CT
MUTE
TV
SC
EN
E
1
2
3
4
PR
OGR
A
M
V
O
LUME
TV
V
O
L
MUTE
M
O
D
E
T
O
P
MENU
DI
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
O
N
SC
REE
N
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
TUNER
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 67
■ Browse screen
1 Preset station list
Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a
preset station and press ENTER to tune into it.
2 Preset number
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
• (U.K. and Europe models only)
Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by “Auto
Preset”.
Menu Submenu Function
Manual Tuning
FM
(U.K. and Europe models only)
Switches to FM/AM.
AM
Tuning (+/-) Selects a frequency.
Auto (+/-) Selects a radio station automatically.
Memory
Registers the selected station as
presets.
Direct Enters a frequency directly.
Browse
Moves to the browse screen (preset
station list).
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows
the background. Press one of the
menu operation keys to redisplay it.
Menu Submenu Function
Utility
Memory
Registers the current station to the
preset number selected in the list.
Auto Preset
Automatically registers FM radio
stations with strong signals (up to 40
stations).
Clear Preset
Clear the preset station selected in the
list.
Clear All Preset Clear all the preset stations.
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the
list.
1 Page Down
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows
the background. Press one of the
menu operation keys to redisplay it.
3
2
1
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
MULTI
PHONO
USB NET
TUNER
[ C ][ A ] [ B ]
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
TV VOL
MUTE
MODE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
TV CH
PRESET
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
U
D
I
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-
A
U
X
1
2
3
4
MUL
TI
L
L
PH
O
N
O
US
B
NE
T
TUNE
R
[
C
]
[
A
]
[
B
]
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
DIRE
CT
MUTE
TV
SC
EN
E
1
2
3
4
PR
OGR
A
M
V
O
LUME
TV
V
O
L
MUTE
M
O
D
E
T
O
P
MENU
DI
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
ENTER
RETURN
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 68
You can play back iPod music on the unit using a USB cable
supplied with the iPod.
• An iPod may not be detected by the unit or some features may not be compatible,
depending on the model or software version of the iPod.
• To play back iPod videos on the unit, an Apple Composite AV Cable (not supplied)
is required. Connect the USB and composite video plugs of the Apple Composite
AV cable to the USB jack and VIDEO AUX (VIDEO) jack on the front panel. To
select a video, operate the iPod itself in the simple play mode (p.70).
Connecting an iPod
Connect your iPod to the unit with the USB cable supplied with the
iPod.
1
Connect the USB cable to the iPod.
2
Connect the USB cable to the USB jack.
• The iPod charges while it is connected to the unit. If you set the unit to standby
mode while the iPod is charging, the iPod continues to charge up to 4 hours. If
“Network Standby” (p.115) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, it continues to
charge without limit.
• Disconnect the iPod from the USB jack when it is not in use.
Playing back iPod music
Made for.
iPod touch (1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th generation)
iPod nano (2nd, 3rd, 4th 5th and 6th generation)
iPhone 4S, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G, iPhone
iPad (3rd generation), iPad2, iPad
(as of June 2013)
The unit (front)
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
SLEEP
HD
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
Connected
USB
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 69
Playback of iPod content
Follow the procedure below to operate the iPod contents and start
playback.
You can control the iPod with the menu displayed on the TV screen.
1
Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
• If playback is ongoing on your iPod, the playback screen is displayed.
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• To operate the iPod manually to select content or control playback, switch to the
simple play mode (p.70).
■ Browse screen
1 Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.71) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 List name
3 Contents list
Displays the list of iPod content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
4 Item number/total
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu Function
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
Return Returns to the higher-level list.
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
1
5
3
2
4
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
MULTI
PHONO
USB NET
TUNER
[ C ][ A ] [ B ]
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
TV VOL
MUTE
MODE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
TV CH
PRESET
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
U
D
I
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-
A
U
X
1
2
3
4
MUL
TI
L
L
PH
O
N
O
NE
T
TUNE
R
[
C
]
[
A
]
[
B
]
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
DIRE
CT
MUTE
TV
SC
EN
E
1
2
3
4
PR
OGR
A
M
V
O
LUME
TV
V
O
L
MUTE
M
O
D
E
T
O
P
MENU
DI
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
ENTER
RETURN
USB
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 70
■ Playback screen
1 Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.71) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining
time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
• You can also use the external device operation keys on the remote control to
control playback.
■ Operating the iPod itself or remote control
(simple play)
1
Press MODE to switch to the simple play mode.
The TV menu screen turns off and iPod operations are
enabled.
To display the TV menu screen, press MODE again.
2
Operate your iPod itself or the remote control to
start playback.
Menu Submenu Function
Play Control
a Resumes playback from pause.
s Stops playback.
d Stops playback temporarily.
f
Skips forward/backward.
g
h
Searches forward/backward (by holding
down).
j
Browse Moves to the browse screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu
operation keys to redisplay it.
1
3
2
Operational remote control
keys
Function
Cursor keys Select an item.
ENTER Confirms the selection.
RETURN Returns to the previous screen.
External device
operation keys
a
Starts playback or stops playback
temporarily.
d
s Stops playback.
f
Skips forward/backward.
g
h
Searches forward/backward (by holding
down).
j
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
MULTI
PHONO
USB NET
TUNER
[ C ][ A ] [ B ]
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
TV VOL
MUTE
MODE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
TV CH
PRESET
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
U
D
I
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-
A
U
X
1
2
3
4
MUL
TI
L
L
PH
O
N
O
US
B
NE
T
TUNE
R
[
C
]
[
A
]
[
B
]
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
DIRE
CT
MUTE
TV
SC
EN
E
1
2
3
4
PR
OGR
A
M
V
O
LUME
TV
V
O
L
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
DI
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
MODE
ENTER
RETURN
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 71
■ Shuffle/repeat settings
You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings of your iPod.
• During simple play, configure the shuffle/repeat settings directly on your iPod or
press MODE to display the TV menu screen and then follow the procedure below.
1
When “USB” is selected as the input source, press
OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Item Setting Function
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.
Songs (Songs)
Plays back songs in random order.
“x” appears in the TV screen.
Albums
(Albums)
Plays back albums in random order.
“x” appears in the TV screen.
Repeat
(Repeat)
Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.
One (One)
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears in the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs repeatedly.
“v” appears in the TV screen.
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
MULTI
PHONO
USB NET
TUNER
[ C ][ A ] [ B ]
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
TV VOL
MUTE
MODE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
TV CH
PRESET
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
U
D
I
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-
A
U
X
1
2
3
4
MUL
TI
L
L
PH
O
N
O
US
B
NE
T
TUNE
R
[
C
]
[
A
]
[
B
]
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
DIRE
CT
MUTE
TV
SC
EN
E
1
2
3
4
PR
OGR
A
M
V
O
LUME
TV
V
O
L
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
DI
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
O
N
SC
REE
N
MODE
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 72
You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on
the unit. Refer to the instruction manuals for the USB storage
device for more information.
The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT16 or
FAT32 format).
• The unit supports WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC and FLAC
files (1- or 2-channel audio only).
• The unit is compatible with sampling rate of up to 192 kHz for WAV and FLAC
files, and 48 kHz for other files.
• Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer
of the USB storage device.
• Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back.
• The unit does not support a USB hub.
Connecting a USB storage device
1
Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack.
• If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In
this case, “Loading...” appears in the front display.
• Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack.
• Disconnect the USB storage device from the USB jack when it is not in use.
• You cannot connect the PC to the USB jack of the unit.
• Connect a USB memory device directly to the USB jack of the unit. Do not use
extension cables.
Playback of USB storage device contents
Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device
contents and start playback.
You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed
on the TV screen.
1
Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
• If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is
displayed.
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
The unit (front)
USB storage device
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
SLEEP
HD
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
Connected
USB
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
MULTI
PHONO
USB NET
TUNER
[ C ][ A ] [ B ]
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
TV VOL
MUTE
MODE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
TV CH
PRESET
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
U
D
I
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-
A
U
X
1
2
3
4
MUL
TI
L
L
PH
O
N
O
NE
T
TUNE
R
[
C
]
[
A
]
[
B
]
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
DIRE
CT
MUTE
TV
SC
EN
E
1
2
3
4
PR
OGR
A
M
V
O
LUME
TV
V
O
L
MUTE
M
O
D
E
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
DI
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
ENTER
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
USB
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 73
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.
• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden
files) during playback, playback stops automatically.
■ Browse screen
1 Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.74) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 List name
3 Contents list
Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys
(q/w) to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
4 Item number/total
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu Function
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
Return Returns to the higher-level list.
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
1
5
3
2
4
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
MULTI
PHONO
USB NET
TUNER
[ C ][ A ] [ B ]
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
TV VOL
MUTE
MODE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
TV CH
PRESET
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
U
D
I
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-
A
U
X
1
2
3
4
MUL
TI
L
L
PH
O
N
O
US
B
NE
T
TUNE
R
[
C
]
[
A
]
[
B
]
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
DIRE
CT
MUTE
TV
SC
EN
E
1
2
3
4
PR
OGR
A
M
V
O
LUME
TV
V
O
L
MUTE
M
O
D
E
T
O
P
MENU
DI
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
ENTER
RETURN
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 74
■ Playback screen
1 Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.74) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
• You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on
the remote control to control playback.
■ Shuffle/repeat settings
You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for playback of USB
storage device contents.
1
When “USB” is selected as the input source, press
OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Menu Submenu Function
Play Control
a Resumes playback from pause.
s Stops playback.
d Stops playback temporarily.
f
Skips forward/backward.
g
Browse Moves to the browse screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu
operation keys to redisplay it.
1
3
2
Item Setting Function
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.
On (On)
Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order.
“x” appears on the TV screen.
Repeat
(Repeat)
Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.
One (One)
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears on the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs in the current album
(folder) repeatedly.
“v” appears on the TV screen.
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
MULTI
PHONO
USB NET
TUNER
[ C ][ A ] [ B ]
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
TV VOL
MUTE
MODE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
TV CH
PRESET
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
U
D
I
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-
A
U
X
1
2
3
4
MUL
TI
L
L
PH
O
N
O
US
B
NE
T
TUNE
R
[
C
]
[
A
]
[
B
]
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
DIRE
CT
MUTE
TV
SC
EN
E
1
2
3
4
PR
OGR
A
M
V
O
LUME
TV
V
O
L
MUTE
M
O
D
E
T
O
P
MENU
DI
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
O
N
SC
REE
N
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 75
You can play back music files stored on your PC or
DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit.
• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router
(p.37). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address)
are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.123) in the “Information” menu.
• The unit supports playback of WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC
and FLAC files (1- or 2-channel audio only).
• The unit is compatible with sampling rates of up to 192 kHz for WAV and FLAC
files, and 48 kHz for other files.
• To play back FLAC files, you need to install server software that supports sharing
of FLAC files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files.
Media sharing setup
To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible
NAS, first you need to configure the media sharing setting on each
music server.
■ For a PC with Windows Media Player
installed
1
Check that Windows Media Player 11 or later is
installed on your PC.
2
In the media sharing settings, enable media sharing
and allow media to be shared with the device.
■ For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server
software installed
Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and
configure the media sharing settings.
Playback of PC music contents
Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and
start playback.
You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV
screen.
1
Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the
input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
• If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the
playback screen is displayed.
2
Use the cursor keys to select a music server and
press ENTER.
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
MULTI
PHONO
USB NET
TUNER
[ C ][ A ] [ B ]
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
TV VOL
MUTE
MODE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
TV CH
PRESET
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
U
D
I
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-
A
U
X
1
2
3
4
MUL
TI
L
L
PH
O
N
O
US
B
TUNE
R
[
C
]
[
A
]
[
B
]
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
DIRE
CT
MUTE
TV
SC
EN
E
1
2
3
4
PR
OGR
A
M
V
O
LUME
TV
V
O
L
MUTE
M
O
D
E
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
DI
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
ENTER
NET
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 76
3
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.
• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden
files) during playback, playback stops automatically.
■ Browse screen
1 Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.77) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 List name
3 Contents list
Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys (q /w) to select an
item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
4 Item number/total
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu Function
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
Return Returns to the higher-level list.
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
1
5
3
2
4
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
MULTI
PHONO
USB NET
TUNER
[ C ][ A ] [ B ]
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
TV VOL
MUTE
MODE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
TV CH
PRESET
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
U
D
I
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-
A
U
X
1
2
3
4
MUL
TI
L
L
PH
O
N
O
US
B
NE
T
TUNE
R
[
C
]
[
A
]
[
B
]
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
DIRE
CT
MUTE
TV
SC
EN
E
1
2
3
4
PR
OGR
A
M
V
O
LUME
TV
V
O
L
MUTE
M
O
D
E
T
O
P
MENU
DI
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
ENTER
RETURN
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 77
■ Playback screen
1 Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.77) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
• You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on
the remote control to control playback.
• You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control
playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.97).
■ Shuffle/repeat settings
You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for the playback of PC
music content.
1
When “SERVER” is selected as the input source,
press OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Menu Submenu Function
Play Control
a Resumes playback from pause.
s Stops playback.
d Stops playback temporarily.
f
Skips forward/backward.
g
Browse Moves to the browse screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation
keys to redisplay it.
1
3
2
Item Setting Function
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.
On (On)
Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order.
“x” appears on the TV screen.
Repeat
(Repeat)
Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.
One (One)
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears on the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs in the current album
(folder) repeatedly.
“v” appears on the TV screen.
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
MULTI
PHONO
USB NET
TUNER
[ C ][ A ] [ B ]
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
TV VOL
MUTE
MODE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
TV CH
PRESET
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
U
D
I
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-
A
U
X
1
2
3
4
MUL
TI
L
L
PH
O
N
O
US
B
NE
T
TUNE
R
[
C
]
[
A
]
[
B
]
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
DIRE
CT
MUTE
TV
SC
EN
E
1
2
3
4
PR
OGR
A
M
V
O
LUME
TV
V
O
L
MUTE
M
O
D
E
T
O
P
MENU
DI
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
O
N
SC
REE
N
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to Internet radio En 78
You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world.
• To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.37). You can
check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly
assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.123) in the “Information” menu.
• You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations.
• The unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service.
• This service may be discontinued without notice.
1
Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the
input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and
the playback screen is displayed.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
Listening to Internet radio
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
MULTI
PHONO
USB NET
TUNER
[ C ][ A ] [ B ]
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
TV VOL
MUTE
MODE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
TV CH
PRESET
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
U
D
I
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-
A
U
X
1
2
3
4
MUL
TI
L
L
PH
O
N
O
US
B
TUNE
R
[
C
]
[
A
]
[
B
]
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
DIRE
CT
MUTE
TV
SC
EN
E
1
2
3
4
PR
OGR
A
M
V
O
LUME
TV
V
O
L
MUTE
M
O
D
E
T
O
P
MENU
DI
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
ENTER
RETURN
NET
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to Internet radio En 79
■ Browse screen
1 Playback indicator
2 List name
3 Contents list
Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to
select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
4 Item number/total
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
• You can register your favorite Internet radio stations to the “Bookmarks” folder by
selecting “NET RADIO” as the input source on the unit and then accessing the
following website with the web browser on your PC. To use this feature, you need
the unit’s vTuner ID and your e-mail address in order to create your personal
account. You can find the vTunerID (MAC address of the unit) in “Network” (p.123)
in the “Information” menu.
http://yradio.vtuner.com/
■ Playback screen
1 Playback indicator
2 Playback information
Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
• You can also use the external device operation key (s) on the remote control to
stop playback.
• Some information may not be available depending on the station.
Menu Function
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
Return Returns to the higher-level list.
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
1
5
3
2
4
Menu Submenu Function
Play Control s Stops playback.
Browse Moves to the browse screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu
operation keys to redisplay it.
1
3
2
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
MULTI
PHONO
USB NET
TUNER
[ C ][ A ] [ B ]
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
TV VOL
MUTE
MODE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
TV CH
PRESET
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
U
D
I
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-
A
U
X
1
2
3
4
MUL
TI
L
L
PH
O
N
O
US
B
NE
T
TUNE
R
[
C
]
[
A
]
[
B
]
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
DIRE
CT
MUTE
TV
SC
EN
E
1
2
3
4
PR
OGR
A
M
V
O
LUME
TV
V
O
L
MUTE
M
O
D
E
T
O
P
MENU
DI
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
ENTER
RETURN
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) En 80
The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes/iPod music on
the unit via network.
• To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same
router (p.37). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP
address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.123) in the “Information”
menu.
Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents
Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music
contents on the unit.
1
Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or
display the playback screen on the iPod.
If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon
( ) appears.
• If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are
connected to the router properly.
2
On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and
select the unit (network name of the unit) as the
audio output device.
3
Select a song and start playback.
The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and
starts playback.
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay)
AirPlay works with iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch with iOS 4.3.3 or later, Mac
with OS X Mountain Lion, and Mac and PC with iTunes 10.2.2 or later.
(as of June 2013)
PC
iTunes
Router
Playback starts
iPod
Starts playback
on iTunes
or iPod
The unit
iTunes (example) iPod (example)
iTunes (example) iPod (example)
Network name of the unit
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) En 81
• You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by
setting “Network Standby” (p.115) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
• You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on
iTunes/iPod in “Network Name” (p.116) in the “Setup” menu.
• If you select the other input source on the unit during playback, playback on the
iTunes/iPod stops automatically.
• You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod during playback. To disable
volume controls from iTunes/iPod, set “Volume Interlock” (p.96) in the “Input” menu
to “Off”.
■ Playback screen
1 Playback indicator
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining
time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
• You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on
the remote control to control playback.
• To control iTunes playback with the remote control of the unit, you need to
configure the iTu nes preferences to enable iTunes control from remote speakers
in advance.
Caution
• When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be
unexpectedly loud. This could result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the
volume suddenly increases during playback, stop playback on the iTunes/iPod
immediately.
1
3
2
Menu Submenu Function
Play Control
a Resumes playback from pause.
d Stops playback temporarily.
f
Skips forward/backward.
g
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation
keys to redisplay it.
iTunes (example of English version)
Check this box
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
MULTI
PHONO
USB NET
TUNER
[ C ][ A ] [ B ]
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
TV VOL
MUTE
MODE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
TV CH
PRESET
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
U
D
I
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-
A
U
X
1
2
3
4
MUL
TI
L
L
PH
O
N
O
US
B
NE
T
TUNE
R
[
C
]
[
A
]
[
B
]
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
DIRE
CT
MUTE
TV
SC
EN
E
1
2
3
4
PR
OGR
A
M
V
O
LUME
TV
V
O
L
MUTE
M
O
D
E
T
O
P
MENU
DI
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
ENTER
RETURN
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 82
The multi-zone function allows you to play back different input
sources in the room where the unit is installed (main zone) and in
other rooms (Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4).
For example, while you are watching TV in the living room (main
zone), another person can listen to PC music in the study room
(Zone2), and another can listen to radio in the guest room (Zone3)
and play DVD in the kitchen (Zone4).
Multi-zone configuration examples
■ Enjoying music in other rooms
You can enjoy music using speakers placed in other rooms.
Connections
Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.83
■ Enjoying videos/music in other rooms
You can enjoy videos/music using TVs placed in other rooms.
❑ Enjoying videos/music using a TV and speakers
Connections
TV (for analog video playback): p.84
TV (for digital video playback): p.85
Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.83
❑
Enjoying videos/music using only a TV
Connection
TV: p.85
Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone)
• Video/audio signals that can be output to each zone vary depending on how
you connect the device in each zone to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see
“Multi-zone output” (p.149).
• Since there are many possible ways to use the unit in a multi-zone
configuration, we recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized
Yamaha dealer or service center about the multi-zone connections that best
meet your requirements.
Living room (main zone)
Study room
(Zone2 and/or Zone3)
Audio
(ZONE OUT)
Living room (main zone)
Guest room
(Zone2 or Zone3)
Audio
(ZONE OUT)
Video (ZONE
OUT or HDMI)
Living room (main zone)
Kitchen
(Zone2 or Zone4)
Video/audio
(HDMI)
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 83
Preparing the multi zone system
Connect the device that will be used in other rooms to the unit.
■ Connecting an external amplifier and
speakers to play back audio
Connect the external amplifier placed in Zone2 or Zone3 to the unit
with a stereo pin cable and connect speakers to the external
amplifier.
Caution
• Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting an
external amplifier.
L
R
L
R
AUDIO
The unit (rear)
ZONE OUT
(ZONE 2 or ZONE 3) jacks
Zone2 or Zone3
Main zone
External amplifier
Audio input
(analog stereo)
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 84
■ Connecting a video monitor to play back
analog videos
Connect a video monitor to watch analog videos at Zone2 or
Zone3. Depending on the video input jacks available on your video
monitor, choose one of the video connection methods.
• The video conversion between the analog video jacks does not work for
multi-zone video output. To watch videos played back on a video device on the
zone video monitor, you need to connect the video monitor to the unit in the same
way as the video device. For example, if you want to watch videos input from the
DVD player via a component video cable, connect the video monitor to the
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks with a component
video cable.
• On-screen operations are not available for Zone3 when “HDMI OUT2 Assign”
(p.118) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”.
To assign the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks to the video monitor
for Zone2 or Zone3, set “Monitor Out Assign” (p.118) in the “Setup”
menu to “Zone2” or “Zone3”.
YPB PR
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
YPB PR
COMPONENT VIDEO
S VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
S
S
V
V
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
The unit (rear)
ZONE OUT jacks
(any of COMPONENT VIDEO,
VIDEO, S VIDEO)
Zone2 or Zone3
Main zone
Video input
(any of component video,
composite video, S-video)
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 85
■ Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to
play back videos/audio
Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as a TV) to play back
videos/audio at Zone2 or Zone4. If you connect an AV amplifier, you
can enjoy multi-channel playback in another room (Zone4).
• To watch videos played back on a video device at Zone2 or Zone4, you need to
connect the video device to the unit with an HDMI cable (p.32).
• We recommend that you disable HDMI Control on the playback devices connected
to the unit.
• On-screen operations are not available for Zone4.
To assign the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack to Zone2 or Zone4, set
“HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.118) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2” or “Zone4”.
• When the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2, you can
enable/disable the audio output from the HDMI OUT 2 jack by setting “Audio
Output” (p.118) in the “Setup” menu to “On” or “Off” (default).
HDMI
HDMI
OUT
(ZONE OUT)
2
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
The unit (rear)
HDMI OUT 2
(ZONE OUT) jack
Zone4
Main zone
HDMI input
(Example: using a TV)
HDMI input
(Example: using an AV amplifier)
Zone2 or Zone4
• Videos/audio interruptions may happen in another zone when any of the
following operations is performed.
– Tuning on/off a TV connected to the unit via HDMI or switching the TV input
– Enabling/disabling a zone output or selecting its input source
– Changing the sound mode or audio settings (such as “Extended Surround”)
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 86
■ Operating the unit from another room
(remote connection)
You can operate the unit and external devices from Zone2, Zone3
or Zone4 using the supplied remote control if you connect an
infrared signal receiver/emitter to the unit’s REMOTE IN/OUT 1 or
REMOTE IN/OUT 2 jacks.
• To operate external devices with the supplied remote control, you must register a
remote control code for each device before using (p.128).
Remote connections between Yamaha products
An infrared signal transmitter is not required if you are using
Yamaha products that support remote connections, as the unit
does. You can transmit remote control signals by connecting the
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks with monaural mini-jack cables and an
infrared signal receiver.
1
IN OUT
2
IN OUT
REMOTE
The unit (rear)
REMOTE IN/OUT 1–2 jacks
External device
(such as a CD player)
Remote control
Infrared
signal
receiver
Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4
Main zone
Infrared signal
transmitter
IN
OUT
REMOTE
IN
OUT
REMOTE
Remote control
Infrared signal
receiver
Yamaha products
(up to six, including the unit)
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 87
Controlling Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4
1
Press ZONE repeatedly to select a zone.
Each time you press the key, the zone to be operated
switches.
2
Press RECEIVER z.
Each time you press the key, the selected zone is enabled
or disabled.
When zone audio output is enabled, the corresponding
zone indicator lights up in the front display.
• When Zone3 output is enabled, the rear presence right/left channel output is
not available in the main zone.
3
Use the input selection keys to select an input
source.
• Video/audio signals that can be output to each zone vary depending on how
you connect the device in each zone to the unit’s output jacks. For details,
see “Multi-zone output” (p.149).
• You cannot select USB and network sources exclusively for each zone. For
example, if you select “SERVER” for Zone2 when “USB” is selected for the
main zone, the input source for the main zone also switches to “SERVER”.
4
Start playback on the external device or select a
radio station.
Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.
For details on the following operations, see the
corresponding pages.
• Listening to FM/AM radio (p.61)
• Playing back iPod music (p.68)
• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.72)
• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
(p.75)
• Listening to Internet radio (p.78)
• Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay)
(p.80)
• You can also use the web control to control Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4. For
details on the web control function, refer to “Supplement for Web Control” on
the CD-ROM.
• AirPlay is available in Zone2 and Zone3 only when AirPlay playback is
ongoing in the main zone.
RECEIVER
Selected zone (turns off when main zone is selected)
Caution
• To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2, Zone3 or
Zone4.
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
MULTI
PHONO
USB NET
TUNER
[ C ][ A ] [ B ]
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
TV VOL
MUTE
MODE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
TV CH
PRESET
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
2 3
5
1
46
TUN./ CH
ENHANCER
SUR.
DECODE
HDMI OUT
MEMORY
INFO AM
PAR TY
FM
0
10
LEVELENT
SETUPZONE
87
SLEEP
9
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
SC
EN
E
1
2
3
4
PR
OGR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
DI
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
ENTER
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
2
3
5
1
4
6
T
U
N.
/
CH
ENHAN
CE
R
SUR
.
DE
CO
D
E
HDMI
OU
T
M
EM
O
RY
I
NF
O
AM
PA
RT
Y
FM
0
10
LEVE
L
EN
T
S
ET
UP
8
7
S
LE
E
P
9
ZONE
[
C
]
[
A
]
[
B
]
RECEIVER z RECEIVER z
Input selection keys
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 88
■ Other operations for Zone2, Zone3 or
Zone4
The following functions are also available when the zone you want
to operate is enabled.
Adjusting the volume (for Zone2 and Zone3 only)
Press VOLUME or MUTE.
Selecting the input source and settings at once (SCENE)
Press SCENE.
• To register the current settings (input source, volume and tone control) to a scene,
hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front
display. (Only an input source can be registered for Zone4.)
Setting the sleep timer
Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30
min, off).
Adjusting the high-/low-frequency range of sounds
(for Zone2 and Zone3 only)
a Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel to select the zone to be
operated.
b Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”.
c Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.
Setting range
-10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (2.0 dB increments)
Default
0.0 dB
Adjusting the front speaker balance (for Zone2 and Zone3 only)
a Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel to select the zone to be
operated.
b Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Balance”.
c Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.
■ Enjoying the same source in multiple
rooms (party mode)
The party mode allows you to play back in all zones the same
music that is being played back in the main zone. During the party
mode, stereo playback is automatically selected for all zones.
Utilize this function when you want to use main zone music as
background music for a house party.
1
Press PARTY.
Each time you press the key, the party mode is turned on or
off.
When the party mode is turned on, “PARTY” lights up in the
front display.
• You can select the zones to be included in the party mode in “Party Mode
Set” (p.118) in the “Setup” menu.
• Zone4 output is available only when an HDMI input is selected in the main
zone.
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
MULTI
PHONO
USB NET
TUNER
[ C ][ A ] [ B ]
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
TV VOL
MUTE
MODE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
TV CH
PRESET
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
2 3
5
1
46
TUN./ CH
ENHANCER
SUR.
DECODE
HDMI OUT
MEMORY
INFO AM
PAR TY
FM
0
10
LEVELENT
SETUPZONE
87
SLEEP
9
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
A
V
A
UDI
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
MUL
TI
L
L
PH
O
N
O
US
B
N
ET
TUNE
R
[
C
]
[
A
]
[
B
]
PR
OGR
A
M
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
DI
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
ENTER
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
2
3
5
1
4
6
T
U
N.
/
CH
ENHAN
CE
R
SUR
.
DE
CO
D
E
HDMI
OU
T
M
EM
O
RY
I
NF
O
AM
FM
0
10
LEVE
L
EN
T
S
ET
UP
Z
O
NE
8
7
9
SLEEP
PARTY
MUTE
VOLUME
SCENE
PLAYBACK ➤ Viewing the current status En 89
Switching information on the front display
1
Press INFO.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for
the displayed item appears.
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed
item can also be applied separately to each input source group.
* The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no audio
decoder is activated, “Decoder Off” appears.
Viewing the status information on the TV
1
Press DISPLAY.
The following information is displayed on the TV.
2
To close the information display, press DISPLAY.
Viewing the current status
Input source group Item
AV 1–7
V-AUX
AUDIO 1–4
PHONO
DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder
(decoder name*)
TUNER
DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder
(decoder name*)
* (U.S.A. model only)
HD Radio data is also available when the unit is tuned
into an HD Radio station (p.63).
* (U.K. and Europe models only)
Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is
tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.65).
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
SLEEP
HD
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
AudioDecoder
Info
Item name
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
SLEEP
HD
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
ProLogic
AV1
Information
USB
SERVER
AirPlay
Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album
name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio
Decoder (decoder name*)
* During simple playback of iPod:
DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder
(decoder name*)
NET RADIO
Song (song title), Album (album name), Station
(station name), DSP Program (sound mode name),
Audio Decoder (decoder name*)
Input source group Item
Input source/
Party mode
status
Audio format/
Decoder
Compressed Music Enhancer/Hi-Res mode status
CINEMA DSP status
Sound
mode
Volume
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
MULTI
PHONO
USB NET
TUNER
[ C ][ A ] [ B ]
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
TV VOL
MUTE
MODE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
TV CH
PRESET
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
2 3
5
1
46
TUN./ CH
ENHANCER
SUR.
DECODE
HDMI OUT
MEMORY
INFO AM
PAR TY
FM
0
10
LEVELENT
SETUPZONE
87
SLEEP
9
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
A
V
A
UDI
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
MUL
TI
L
L
PH
O
N
O
US
B
N
ET
TUNE
R
[
C
]
[
A
]
[
B
]
SC
EN
E
1
2
3
4
PR
OGR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
ENTER
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
2
3
5
1
4
6
T
U
N.
/
CH
ENHAN
CE
R
SUR
.
DE
CO
D
E
HDMI
OU
T
M
EM
O
RY
AM
PA
RT
Y
FM
0
10
LEVE
L
EN
T
S
ET
UP
Z
O
NE
8
7
S
LE
E
P
9
INFO
DISPLAY
PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 90
You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This
menu is available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily
configure settings during playback.
1
Press OPTION.
Front display
TV screen
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Option menu items
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.
• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
SLEEP
HD
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
ToneControl
Option
Item Function Page
Tone Control
(Tone Control)
Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency
range of sounds.
91
Adaptive DRC
(Adaptive DRC)
Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to
minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume
is adjusted.
91
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode
(CINEMA DSP 3D)
Enables/disables CINEMA DSP HD³. 91
Dialogue Adjust
(Dialog Adjust)
Dialogue Level
(Dialog Lvl)
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. 92
Dialogue Lift
(Dialog Lift)
Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. 92
Extended Surround
(EXTD Surround)
Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources
when surround back speakers are used.
92
Volume Trim
(Volume Trim)
Input Trim
(In.Trim)
Corrects volume differences between input sources. 92
Subwoofer
Trim (SW.Trim)
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. 93
Enhancer
(Enhancer)
Enhancer
(Enhancer)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer. 93
Hi-Res Mode
(HiRes Mode)
Enables/disables the high-resolution mode (for
enhancing the quality of uncompressed digital
audio).
93
Video Mode
(Video Mode)
Enables/disables the video signal processing
settings configured in the “Setup” menu.
93
Video Adjustment
(Video Adjust)
Selects a video adjustment setting from presets. 93
Audio Select
(Audio Select)
Selects the audio input jack to use when more than
one audio connection is made for one input source.
93
Audio Mode
(Audio Mode)
(U.S.A. model only)
Switches between stereo and monaural for FM/AM
radio reception.
94
PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 91
■ Tone Control (Tone Control)
Adjusts the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds.
Choices
Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass)
Setting range
-6.0 dB to Bypass (Bypass) to +6.0 dB, 0.5 dB increments
Default
Bypass (Bypass)
• If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels.
Adjusting with the front panel controls
a Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”.
b Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.
■ Adaptive DRC (Adaptive DRC)
Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted
when the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for listening to
playback at a low volume at night.
Settings
If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide at a
high volume.
■ CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (CINEMA DSP 3D)
Enables/disables CINEMA DSP HD³ (p.56). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA DSP
HD³ functions with the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 11ch Stereo).
Settings
FM Mode
(FM Mode)
(Except for U.S.A. model)
Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio
reception.
94
Hold/Unhold
(Hold/Unhold)
(U.S.A. model only)
Enables/disables the hold function when the unit is
tuned into an HD Radio station.
64
Traffic Program
(TrafficProgram)
(U.K. and Europe models only)
Automatically searches for a traffic information
station.
66
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Configures the shuffle setting for the iPod (p.71),
USB storage device (p.74), or media server (p.77).
—
Repeat
(Repeat)
Configures the repeat setting for the iPod (p.71),
USB storage device (p.74), or media server (p.77).
—
Item Function Page
On (On) Automatically adjusts the dynamic range.
Off (Off) (default) The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted.
On (On) (default) Enables CINEMA DSP HD³.
Off (Off) Disables CINEMA DSP HD³.
Volume: low Volume: high
Input level Input level
On
Off
On
Off
Output level
Output level
PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 92
■ Dialogue Adjust (Dialog Adjust)
Adjusts the volume or perceive height of dialogue sounds.
❑ Dialogue Level (Dialog Lvl)
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. If dialogue sounds cannot be heard clearly, you
can turn up its volume by increasing this setting.
Setting range
0 to 3
Default
0
❑ Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift)
Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. If the dialogue sounds as if it is
coming from below the TV screen, you can raise its perceived height by increasing this
setting.
• This setting is available only when one of the following conditions is met.
– One of the sound programs (except for 2ch Stereo and 11ch Stereo) is selected when front presence
speakers are used.
– Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.56) is working.
(You may hear dialogue sounds from the surround speakers depending on the listening position.)
Setting range
0 to 5 (The bigger the value the higher the position)
Default
0
■ Extended Surround (EXTD Surround)
Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources when surround back speakers
are used.
Settings
• Some early Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS-ES sources do not contain a flag for reproducing surround
back channel. We recommend you set “Extended Surround” to “bPLIIx Movie” or “EX/ES” when playing
back those sources.
■ Volume Trim (Volume Trim)
Fine-adjusts volume difference between input sources or subwoofer volume.
❑ Input Trim (In.Trim)
Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume
differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it.
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Default
0.0 dB
Ideal position
Auto (Auto)
(default)
Automatically selects the most suitable decoder if signals that contain
surround back channel signals are input, and reproduces the signals
in 6.1- or 7.1-channel. If two surround back speakers are connected,
the unit reproduces the 5.1-channel signals in 7.1-channel.
bPLIIx Movie
(bPLIIxMo)
Always reproduces signals in 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro Logic
IIx Movie decoder. This setting is available only when two surround
back speakers are connected.
bPLIIx Music
(bPLIIxMu)
Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro
Logic IIx Music decoder. This setting is available only when one or two
surround back speakers are connected.
EX/ES (EX/ES)
Automatically selects the Dolby EX or DTS-ES decoder, and
reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel.
Off (Off)
Always reproduces signals in their original channels. (Even when
DTS-ES or Dolby Digital Surround EX signal is input, the unit
reproduces the signal in 5.1-channel.)
PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 93
❑ Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim)
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Default
0.0 dB
■ Enhancer (Enhancer)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer and the high-resolution mode.
❑ Enhancer (Enhancer)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.60).
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
• You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer
(p.60).
Settings
Default
TUNER, USB, (network sources): On (On)
Others: Off (Off)
• Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling rate is over 48 kHz.
❑ Hi-Res Mode (HiRes Mode)
Enables/disables the high-resolution mode when “Enhancer” is set to “On”. If this
function is set to “On”, you can enhance the quality of uncompressed digital audio
(such as 2-channel PCM and FLAC) using Compressed Music Enhancer.
Settings
■ Video Mode (Video Mode)
Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video
adjustments) settings configured in “Processing” (p.111) in the “Setup” menu.
Settings
■ Video Adjustment (Video Adjust)
Selects a video adjustment setting from presets you have configured in “Adjustment”
(p.112) in the “Setup” menu.
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
Settings
1 to 6
■ Audio Select (Audio Select)
Selects the audio input jack to use when more than one audio connection is made for
one input source.
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
Settings
Off (Off) Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.
On (On) Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.
Off (Off) Disables the high-resolution mode.
On (On) (default) Enables the high-resolution mode.
Processing
(Processing)
Enables the video signal processing.
Direct (Direct)
(default)
Disables the video signal processing.
Auto (Auto) (default)
Automatically selects the audio input jack in the following priority order.
1. HDMI input
2. Digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL)
3. Analog input (AUDIO [RCA or XLR])
HDMI (HDMI)
Always selects HDMI input. No sounds are produced when no signals
are input through the HDMI jack.
Coax/Opt
(Coax/Opt)
Always selects digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL). No sounds are
produced when no signals are input through the COAXIAL or
OPTICAL jack.
Analog (Analog)
Always selects analog input (AUDIO [RCA or XLR]). No sounds are
produced when no signals are input through the AUDIO (RCA or XLR).
PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 94
■ Audio Mode (Audio Mode)
(U.S.A. model only)
Switches between stereo and monaural for FM/AM radio reception.
• This setting is applied separately to each band (FM/AM).
Settings
• HD Radio programs are not available when the unit is in the monaural reception mode.
■ FM Mode (FM Mode)
(Except for U.S.A. model)
Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception.
Settings
Auto (Auto) (default)
Receives the selected band (FM or AM) in stereo sounds when the
signal reception is good and in monaural sounds when it is not good.
Mono (Mono) Receives the selected band (FM or AM) in monaural sounds.
Stereo (Stereo)
(default)
Receives FM radio in stereo sounds.
Mono (Mono) Receives FM radio in monaural sounds.
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring input sources (Input menu) En 95
CONFIGURATIONS
You can change the input source settings using the TV screen.
1
Press ON SCREEN.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an input source to be configured
and press the cursor key (q).
The input source of the unit also changes.
• You can still switch the input source by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
5
Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Input menu items
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.
Configuring input sources (Input menu)
Item Function Page
Rename/Icon Select Changes the input source name and icon. 96
Decoder Mode Sets the format of digital audio playback to DTS. 96
Volume Interlock
Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via
AirPlay.
96
Video Out Selects a video to be output with the audio input source. 96
DMC Control
Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media
Controller (DMC) to control playback.
97
Balance Input
Attenuator
Selects whether to activate the attenuator for the balance
input to avoid sound distortion.
97
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring input sources (Input menu) En 96
■ Rename/Icon Select
Changes the input source name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.
Input sources
AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4, PHONO, USB, MULTI CH
■ Setup procedure
1
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a template and press the cursor key (w).
• You cannot change the template or icon for “USB” when an iPod is connected.
2
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).
3
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
4
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry.
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
5
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■ Decoder Mode
Sets the format of digital audio playback to “DTS”.
For example, if the unit does not detect DTS audio and outputs noise, set “Decoder
Mode” to “DTS”.
Input sources
AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4 (available only when any audio digital input jack is assigned)
Settings
■ Volume Interlock
Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay.
Input sources
AirPlay
Settings
■ Video Out
Selects a video to be output with the audio input source.
Input sources
TUNER, (network sources), USB, MULTI CH
Settings
Default
USB: V-AUX
Others: Off
Auto (default) Automatically selects an audio format to match the input audio signal.
DTS Selects DTS only. (Other audio signals are not reproduced.)
Off Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod.
Limited (default)
Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod within the limited range
(-80 dB to 0 dB and mute).
Full
Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod in the full range (-80 dB to
+16.5 dB and mute).
Off Does not output video.
AV 1–7, V-AUX Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks.
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) En 97
■ DMC Control
Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control
playback.
Input source
SERVER
Settings
• A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network.
When this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media
Player 12) on the same network.
■ Balance Input Attenuator
Selects whether to activate the attenuator for the balance input (AUDIO 4) so that you
can avoid sound distortion when high-level signals are input.
Activate the attenuator when connecting an audio device which outputs signals of 3 V
(RMS) or higher to the AUDIO 4 (XLR balanced input) jacks (p.34).
Input source
AUDIO 4
Settings
You can change the settings of the SCENE function (p.53) using the TV screen.
1
Press ON SCREEN.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a scene to be configured and
press the cursor key (q).
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
Disable Does not allow DMCs to control playback.
Enable (default) Allows DMCs to control playback.
Bypass (default) Does not activate the attenuator for the balance input.
ATT.( -6d B)
Activates the attenuator for the balance input to reduce the signal
level (-6dB).
Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu)
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) En 98
5
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to change the setting.
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Scene menu items
■ Save
Registers the unit’s current settings (such as input source and sound program) in the
selected scene.
• If you have changed the input assignment for a scene, you also need to change the external device
assigned to the corresponding SCENE key (p.54).
■ Load
Loads the settings registered for the selected scene.
Select “DETAIL” to configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the scene
assignments.
❑ Device Control
Recalls a selected scene and starts its playback on an external device connected to
the unit via HDMI. (SCENE link playback)
Settings
Default
SCENE1 (BD/DVD), SCENE2 (TV): HDMI Control
SCENE3 (NET), SCENE4 (RADIO), SCENE5–12: Off
• To control playback of an HDMI Control-compatible device by SCENE link playback, you need to set “HDMI
Control” in the “Setup” menu to “On” and perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.150).
Item Function Page
Save Registers the current settings in the selected scene. 98
Load
Loads the settings registered for the selected scene. You can
also configure the SCENE link playback setting, select items
to be included as the scene assignments, or view the settings
currently assigned to the selected scene.
98
Rename/Icon Select Changes the scene name and icon. 99
Reset Restores the default settings for the selected scene. 99
Off Disables the SCENE link playback function.
HDMI Control
Enables SCENE link playback using HDMI Control signals. Select this
if an HDMI Control-compatible device (such as a BD/DVD player) is
connected to the unit via HDMI. It also turns on the TV if it supports
HDMI Control.
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) En 99
❑ Detail
Selects items to be included as the scene assignments. You can also view the settings
currently assigned to the selected scene.
To include items as the scene assignments, use the cursor keys to select an item and
press ENTER to check the box (or uncheck the box to exclude).
For example, if you often adjust the volume while watching TV but listen to radio with
low volume at night, exclude “Volume” from the assignments for SCENE2 (TV) and
include “Volume” in the assignments for SCENE4 (RADIO).
Choices
Default
Input, HDMI Output, Mode: selected
Sound, Surround, Video, Volume, Lipsync, Speaker Setup: not selected
■ Rename/Icon Select
Changes the scene name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.
■ Setup procedure
1
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).
2
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
3
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the
entry.
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
5
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■ Reset
Restores the default settings (p.53) for the selected scene.
Input Input (p.52), Audio Select (p.93)
HDMI Output HDMI Output (p.52)
Mode
Sound Program (p.55), Pure Direct Mode (p.110), Enhancer (p.60),
Enhancer Hi-Res Mode (p.93)
Sound Tone Control (p.91), Adaptive DRC (p.91)
Surround
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (p.91), Dialogue Lift (p.92), Dialogue Level
(p.92), Subwoofer Trim (p.93), Extended Surround (p.92)
Video Video Mode (p.111), Video Adjustment (p.93)
Volume Master Volume (p.52)
Lipsync Lipsync (p.109), Delay (p.110)
Speaker Setup Setting Pattern (p.106), PEQ Select (p.108)
Check or uncheck
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) En 100
You can change the settings of the sound programs and surround decoders using the
TV screen.
1
Press ON SCREEN.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Sound Program” and press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a sound program to be
configured and press the cursor key (q).
• You can still switch the sound program by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
5
Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Configuring sound programs/surround decoders
(Sound Program menu)
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) En 101
Sound Program menu items
• Available items and the default settings vary depending on the selected sound program or surround
decoder.
■ Settings for sound programs
Item Function Settings
Decode Type
Selects a surround decoder to be used
in combination with the selected sound
program.
bPro Logic*,
bPLIIx Movie (bPLII
Movie),
bPLIIx Music* (bPLII
Music*),
bPLIIx Game* (bPLII
Game*),
Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music*
(* Available only when
“SURROUND DECODER” is
selected)
DSP Level Adjusts the sound field effect level.
-6 dB to +3 dB (default: 0 dB)
Higher to enhance the sound
field effect, and lower to
reduce it.
Initial Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and presence sound field
generation.
1 ms to 99 ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.
Surround Initial Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and surround sound field
generation.
1 ms to 49 ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.
Surround Back Initial
Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and surround back sound field
generation.
Room Size
Adjusts the broadening effect of the
presence sound field.
0.1 to 2.0
Higher to enhance the
broadening effect, and lower
to reduce it.
Surround Room Size
Adjusts the broadening effect of the
surround sound field.
Surround Back Room
Size
Adjusts the broadening effect of the
surround back sound field.
Liveness
Adjusts the loss of the presence sound
field.
0 to 10
Higher to enhance the
reflectivity, and lower to
reduce it.
Surround Liveness
Adjusts the loss of the surround sound
field.
Surround Back
Liveness
Adjusts the loss of the surround back
sound field.
Reverb Time
Adjust the decay time of the rear
reverberant sound.
1.0 s to 5.0 s
Higher to enrich the
reverberant sound and lower
to have clear sound.
Reverb Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and reverberant sound
generation.
0ms to 250ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.
Reverb Level
Adjusts the volume of the reverberant
sound.
0% to 100%
Higher to strengthen the
reverberant sound, and lower
to weaken it.
Item Function Settings
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) En 102
The following items are available when you select “2ch Stereo” or “11ch Stereo”.
• Available items in “11ch Stereo” vary depending on the speaker system being used.
■ Settings for decoders
The following items are available when you set “Decode Type” of “SURROUND
DECODER” to “bPLIIx Music” (bPLII Music) or “Neo:6 Music”.
Sound program
Item Function Settings
2ch Stereo Direct
Selects whether to
automatically bypass the
DSP circuit when an
analog audio source is
played back.
Auto (default), Off
11ch Stereo
Level Adjusts the entire volume. -5 to +5 (default: 0)
Front / Rear Balance
Adjusts the front and rear
volume balance.
-5 to +5 (default: 0)
Higher to enhance the front
side, and lower to enhance
the rear side.
Left / Right Balance
Adjusts the right and left
volume balance.
-5 to +5 (default: 0)
Higher to enhance the right
side, and lower to enhance
the left side.
Height Balance
Adjust the height volume
balance using the
presence speakers.
0 to 10 (default: 5)
Higher to enhance the
upside, and lower to
enhance the downside. (The
presence speakers do not
produce sounds when
“Height Balance” is set to
“0”.)
Monaural Mix
Enables/disables
monaural sound output.
Off (default), On
Decode Type Item Function Settings
bPLIIx Music
(bPLII Music)
Panorama
Adjusts the broadening
effect of the front sound
field.
Off (default), On
Select “On” to wrap front right/left
channel sounds around the field
and generate a spacious sound
field in combination with the
surround sound field.
Center Width
Adjusts the broadening
effect of the center
sound field.
0 to 7 (default: 3)
Higher to enhance the broadening
effect, and lower to reduce it
(closer to center).
Dimension
Adjusts the difference in
level between the front
and surround sound
fields.
-3 to +3 (default: 0)
Higher to strengthen the front
sound field and lower to strengthen
the surround sound field.
Neo:6 Music Center Image
Adjusts the center
orientation level
(broadening effect) of
the front sound field.
0.0 to 1.0 (default: 0.3)
Higher to strengthen the center
orientation level (less broadening
effect) and lower to weaken (more
broadening effect).
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 103
You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen.
1
Press ON SCREEN.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a menu.
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
5
Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 104
Setup menu items
Menu Item Function Page
Speaker
Auto Setup Automatically optimizes the speaker settings (YPAO). 41
Manual Setup
Setting Pattern Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them. 106
Setting Data Copy Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction. 106
Configuration
Front Selects the size of the front speakers. 106
Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. 106
Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size. 107
Surround Back Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size. 107
Front Presence Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected. 107
Rear Presence Selects whether or not rear presence speakers are connected. 107
Subwoofer 1
Subwoofer 2
Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack and its phase. 107
SWFR Layout Selects a subwoofer layout when 2 subwoofers are used. 108
Extra Bass Sets the speakers to produce the front channel low-frequency components. 108
Distance Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position. 108
Level Adjusts the volume of each speaker. 108
Parametric EQ Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. 108
Test Tone Enables/disables the test tone output. 109
Sound
Lipsync
Delay Enable Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source. 109
Auto/Manual Select Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. 109
Adjustment Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually. 110
Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. 110
Max Volume Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. 110
Initial Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. 110
Pure Direct Mode Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode. 110
Adaptive DSP Level Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level. 110
VPS Selects whether to create Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers. 111
DAC Digital Filter Selects the digital filter type of the audio DAC (digital-to-analog converter). 111
Video
Analog to Analog Conversion Enables/disables the video conversion between the analog video jacks 111
Video Mode Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video adjustments). 111
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 105
HDMI
HDMI Control Enables/disables HDMI Control. You can also configure the relevant settings (such as ARC and TV audio input). 113
Audio Output Selects a device to output audio. 114
Standby Through Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. 114
Network
IP Address Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). 115
Network Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices. 115
MAC Address Filter Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. 115
Network Name Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. 116
Multi Zone
Main Zone Set Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 116
Zone2 Set
Zone3 Set
Vol ume Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output. 117
Max Volume Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness in the second zone. 117
Initial Volume Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 initial volume for when the unit is turned on. 117
Mono Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 or Zone3 output. 117
Zone Scene Rename Changes the scene names (for Zone2 or Zone3) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 117
Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for Zone2 or Zone3) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 117
Zone4 Set
Zone Scene Rename Changes the scene names (for Zone4) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 118
Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for Zone4) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 118
Monitor Out Assign Select the zone for which the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks are used. 118
HDMI OUT2 Assign Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used. 118
Party Mode Set Enables/disables switching to the party mode for each zone. 118
Function
Input Assignment Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input source. 119
Display Set
Dimmer (Front Display) Adjusts the brightness of the front display. 119
Short Message Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated. 119
Wallpaper Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV. 119
Trigger Output1
Trigger Output2
Trigger Mode Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function. 120
Target Zone Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized. 120
DC OUT Power Mode Selects how to supply power through the DC OUT jack. 120
Memory Guard Prevents accidental changes to the settings. 121
ECO Auto Power Standby Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. 121
Language Select an on-screen menu language. 122
Menu Item Function Page
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 106
Speaker (Manual Setup)
Configures the speaker settings manually.
■ Setting Pattern
Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them.
When you configure the following speaker settings, the settings will be memorized in
the selected pattern.
• Measurement results (Auto Setup)
• Configuration
• Distance
• Level
• Parametric EQ
Settings
Pattern1 (default), Pattern2
• The setting pattern currently selected is shown at the top of the “Auto Setup” and “Manual Setup” screens.
• This function is useful when you want to save certain settings according to the varying conditions of your
listening environment. For example, if you want to switch the settings when curtains are open or closed,
you can save the settings suited for each condition and switch between them.
■ Setting Data Copy
Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction.
Choices
■ Configuration
Configures the output characteristics of the speakers.
• When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm
(6-1/4”) or larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”).
❑ Front
Selects the size of the front speakers.
Settings
• “Front” is automatically set to “Large” when both “Subwoofer 1” and “Subwoofer 2” are set to “None”.
❑ Center
Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.
Settings
Pattern1 > 2 Copies the “Pattern1” parameters to “Pattern2”.
Pattern2 > 1 Copies the “Pattern2” parameters to “Pattern1”.
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency
components.
Small (default)
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components
lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz).
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency
components.
Small (default)
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel
low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover
frequency (default: 80 Hz).
None
Select this option when no center speaker is connected.
The front speakers will produce center channel audio.
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 107
❑ Surround
Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes.
Settings
❑ Surround Back
Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their sizes.
Settings
• This setting is not available when “Surround” is set to “None”.
❑ Front Presence
Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected.
Settings
❑ Rear Presence
Selects whether or not rear presence speakers are connected.
Settings
• This setting is not available when “Surround” or “Front Presence” is set to “None”.
❑ Subwoofer 1, Subwoofer 2
Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or
SUBWOOFER 2 jack and its phase.
Settings
• When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase.
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel
frequency components.
Small (default)
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel
low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover
frequency (default: 80 Hz).
None
Select this option when no surround speakers are connected.
The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual
CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program.
Large x1
Select this option when one large speaker is connected.
The surround back speaker will produce all of the surround back
channel frequency components.
Large x2
Select this option when two large speakers are connected.
The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back
channel frequency components.
Small x1
Select this option when one small speaker is connected.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel
low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover
frequency (default: 80 Hz).
Small x2 (default)
Select this option when two small speakers are connected.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel
low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover
frequency (default: 80 Hz).
None
Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected.
The surround speakers will produce surround back channel audio.
Use (default) Select this option when front presence speakers are connected.
None Select this option when no front presence speakers are connected.
Use (default) Select this option when rear presence speakers are connected.
None Select this option when no rear presence speakers are connected.
Use
Normal
(default)
Select this option when a subwoofer is connected to the
SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack (phase not reversed). The
subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and
low-frequency components from other channels.
Reverse
Select this option when a subwoofer is connected to the
SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack (phase reversed). The
subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and
low-frequency components from other channels.
None
Select this option when no subwoofer is connected to the
SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack. The front speakers will
produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency
components from other channels when both “Subwoofer 1” and
“Subwoofer 2” are set to “None”.
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 108
❑ SWFR Layout
Selects a subwoofer layout when 2 subwoofers are used.
Settings
• This setting is not available when “Subwoofer 1” or “Subwoofer 2” is set to “None”.
❑ Extra Bass
Sets the speakers to produce the front channel low-frequency components.
Settings
• This setting is not available when both “Subwoofer 1” and “Subwoofer 2” are set to “None”, or when “Front”
is set to “Small”.
■ Distance
Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the
speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance
from “Meter” or “Feet”.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,
Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Rear Presence L, Rear Presence R, Subwoofer 1,
Subwoofer 2
Setting range
0.30 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 80.0 ft), 0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments
Default
3.00 m (10.0 ft)
■ Level
Adjusts the volume of each speaker.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,
Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Rear Presence L, Rear Presence R, Subwoofer 1,
Subwoofer 2
Setting range
-10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Default
0.0 dB
Adjusting while viewing the front display
a Press LEVEL.
b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a speaker.
c Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the volume of the selected speaker.
■ Parametric EQ
Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.
Settings
• “YPAO:Flat”, “YPAO:Front”, and “YPAO:Natural” are available only when the measurement results of “Auto
Setup” have already been saved (p.41). Press ENTER again to view the measurement results.
■ Manual equalizer adjustment
1
Set “Parametric EQ” to “Manual” and press ENTER.
2
Press ENTER again to enter the edit screen.
3
Use the cursor keys to select a speaker and press ENTER.
Left + Right
Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed on the left and right
sides of the room.
Front + Rear
Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed on the front and rear
sides of the room.
Monaural x2
(default)
Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed freely.
Off (default)
Depending on the size of the front speakers, either the subwoofer or
front speakers produce the front channel low-frequency components.
On
Both the front speakers and subwoofer produce the front channel
low-frequency components.
Manual
Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually.
For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”.
YPAO:Flat Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics.
YPAO:Front
Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics as
the front speakers.
YPAO:Natural Adjusts all speakers to achieve a natural sound.
Through Does not use the equalizer.
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 109
• To restore the default settings for all speakers, select “PEQ Data Clear” and then “OK”.
• To copy the parametric equalizer values acquired with “Auto Setup” (p.41) to the “Manual” fields for
fine adjustment, select “PEQ Data Copy” and then an equalizer type.
4
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a center frequency from the 7 preset bands
(4 for subwoofer) and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
Setting range
Gain: -20.0 dB to +6.0 dB
5
To fine-adjust the center frequency or Q factor (bandwidth), press ENTER
repeatedly to select an item.
Frequency: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the center frequency of the selected
band and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
Q: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the Q factor (bandwidth) of the selected band and
the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
Setting range
Center frequency: 31.3 Hz to 16.0 kHz (31.3 Hz to 250.0 Hz for subwoofer)
Q factor: 0.500 to 10.080
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■ Test Tone
Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker
balance or equalizer while confirming its effect.
Settings
Sound
Configures the audio output settings.
■ Lipsync
Adjusts the delay between video and audio by holding up the audio output.
❑ Delay Enable
Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source.
Choices
AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4
Settings
❑ Auto/Manual Select
Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.
Setting range
• Even if “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, the automatic adjustment does not work depending on the TV
connected to the unit. In this case, adjust the delay manually in “Adjustment”.
Off (default) Does not output test tones.
On
Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance
or equalizer.
Disable Disable the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.
Enable (default) Enables the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.
Auto (default)
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when
a TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the
unit via HDMI.
If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in
“Adjustment”.
Manual
Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video
and audio output manually.
Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 110
❑ Adjustment
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Auto/Manual
Select” is set to “Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when
“Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”.
Setting range
0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments)
Default
0 ms
• When “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, “Offset” shows the difference between automatic adjustment
and fine adjustment.
■ Dynamic Range
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and
DTS signals) playback.
Settings
■ Max Volume
Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.
Setting range
-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB
Default
+16.5 dB
■ Initial Volume
Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on.
Settings
■ Pure Direct Mode
Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode (p.60).
Settings
■ Adaptive DSP Level
Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level.
Settings
Maximum (default) Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.
Standard Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use.
Minimum/Auto
Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low
volumes.
When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is
automatically adjusted based on the input signal information.
Off (default)
Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered
standby mode.
On
Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80.0 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5
dB increments).
(Specify a volume level which is lower than the “Max Volume” setting.)
Auto (default)
Automatically outputs video signals when any videos are input from
the selected input source or an input source that can be operated with
the on-screen display is selected. When no video signals are input,
the wall paper is displayed.
Video Off Does not output video signals including the wall paper.
Off Does not adjust the effect level automatically.
On (default)
Adjusts the effect level automatically according to the YPAO
measurement results and the volume level.
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 111
■ VPS
Selects whether to create Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and
surround speakers. When VPS is enabled, the unit creates front VPS when no front
presence speakers are connected, and creates rear VPS when front presence
speakers are connected but no rear presence speakers (p.56).
Settings
• Depending on the installation height of the surround speakers, VPS may not be effective. In this case, set
“VPS” to “Off”.
■ DAC Digital Filter
Selects the digital filter type of the audio DAC (digital-to-analog converter) to have
favorite sounds.
Settings
Video
Configures the video output settings.
■ Analog to Analog Conversion
Enables/disables the video conversion (p.148) between the analog video jacks
(COMPONENT VIDEO, S VIDEO and VIDEO).
Settings
• This function works only when “Monitor Out Assign” (p.118) is set to “Main” (default) and “HDMI OUT2
Assign” (p.118) is set to “Main” (default) or “Zone4”.
• The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably.
• Only 480i/576i-resolution video signals can be output from the S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks (p.148).
■ Video Mode
Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video
adjustments).
Settings
• When “Video Mode” is set to “Direct”, the unit transmits video signals with the least circuitry in order to
reduce video output delay.
Off Disables Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS).
On (default) Enables Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS).
Sharp Roll-off Type
Removes out-of-band noises by the filter with steep attenuation
characteristics.
It has a tendency to produce clear sounds.
Slow Roll-off Type
Removes out-of-band noises by the filter with gentle attenuation
characteristics.
It has a tendency to produce soft sounds.
Short Latency Type
(default)
Reduces the audio delay caused by the DAC internal digital filter.
It has a tendency to produce responsive and rhythmical sounds.
Off Disables the video conversion between the analog video jacks.
On (default)
Enables the video conversion between the analog video jacks.
Converted video signals are output from the MONITOR OUT jacks
only.
Direct (default) Disables the video signal processing.
Processing
Enables the video signal processing.
Configure the settings in “Resolution”, “Aspect” and “Adjustment”.
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 112
❑ Resolution
Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to
“Processing”.
Settings
• If you need to select a resolution that is not supported by your TV, set “MONITOR CHECK” (p.126) in the
“ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “SKIP” and try again. (Note that the output video may not be displayed on
your TV normally.)
❑ Aspect
Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to
“Processing”.
Settings
• This setting functions only when 480i/576i or 480p/576p signals are converted into 720p, 1080i, 1080p, or
2160p (4K) signals.
❑ Adjustment
Configures the video adjustments when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”. You can
register the video adjustments as presets (up to 6).
■ Setup procedure
1
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset number and press ENTER.
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting and press ENTER.
4
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Detail Enhancement
Adjusts the enhancement effect of video details.
Setting range
0 to 50
Default
0
Edge Enhancement
Adjusts the enhancement effect of video edges.
Setting range
0 to 50
Default
0
Brightness
Adjusts the video brightness.
Setting range
-100 to +100
Default
0
Through Does not convert the resolution.
Auto (default) Selects a resolution automatically in accordance with TV resolution.
480p/576p, 720p,
1080i, 1080p, 4K
Output video signals with a selected resolution.
(Only the resolutions supported by your TV are selectable.)
Through (default) Does not convert the aspect ratio.
16:9 Normal
Outputs 4:3 video signals to a 16:9 TV with black bands on either side
of the screen.
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 113
Contrast
Adjusts the video contrast.
Setting range
-100 to +100
Default
0
Saturation
Adjusts the video saturation.
Setting range
-100 to +100
Default
0
HDMI
Configures the HDMI settings.
■ HDMI Control
Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.150).
Settings
• To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.150) after connecting HDMI
Control-compatible devices.
❑ TV Audio Input
Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI
Control” is set to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio when
the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner.
Settings
AUDIO 1–3
Default
AUDIO 1
• When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for connecting
an external device because the input will be used for TV audio input.
Off (default) Disables HDMI Control.
On
Enables HDMI Control.
Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “ARC” and “Standby
Sync”.
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 114
❑ ARC
Enables/disables ARC (p.26) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Settings
• You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers connected
to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the unit, set “ARC” to
“Off” and use the TV’s speakers.
❑ Standby Sync
Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit
when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Settings
■ Audio Output
Selects a device to output audio.
• The “Amp” and “HDMI OUT1” settings are available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.
• The “HDMI OUT2” setting is available only when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.118) is set to “Main”.
❑ Amp
Enables/disables the audio output from the speakers and headphones connected to
the unit.
Settings
❑ HDMI OUT1, HDMI OUT2
Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack or
HDMI OUT 2 jack.
Settings
• The HDMI OUT 1–2 jacks output 2-channel audio signals when the unit is turned on.
■ Standby Through
Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the
unit is in standby mode. If this function is set to “On”, you can use the input selection
keys (AV 1–7 and V-AUX) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in standby
mode (the standby indicator on the unit blinks).
Settings
• This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.
Off Disables ARC.
On (default) Enables ARC.
Off Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.
On Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.
Auto (default)
Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the
unit is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals.
Off Disables the audio output from the speakers and headphones.
On (default) Enables the audio output from the speakers and headphones.
Off (default) Disables the audio output from the TV.
On Enables the audio output from the TV.
Off (default) Does not output videos/audio to the TV.
On
Outputs videos/audio to the TV.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 115
Network
Configures the network settings.
■ IP Address
Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).
❑ DHCP
Select whether to use a DHCP server.
Settings
■ Manual network settings
1
Set “DHCP” to “Off”.
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type and press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to
select a value.
4
To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
5
To configure another network parameter, repeat steps 2 to 4.
6
To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
7
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■ Network Standby
Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network
standby).
Settings
■ MAC Address Filter
Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.
❑ Filter
Enables/disables the MAC address filter.
Settings
❑ MAC Address 1–10
Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be permitted
access to the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”.
■ Procedure
1
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MAC Address 1–5” or “MAC Address 6–10”
and press ENTER.
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an MAC address number and press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to
select a value.
4
To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
5
To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Off
Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters
manually. For details, see “Manual network settings”.
On (default)
Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network
parameters (such as IP address).
IP Address Specifies an IP address.
Subnet Mask Specifies a subnet mask.
Default Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default gateway.
DNS Server (P) Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server.
DNS Server (S) Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server.
Off (default) Disables the network standby function.
On
Enables the network standby function.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
Off (default) Disables the MAC address filter.
On
Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1–10”, specify the
MAC addresses of the network devices that will be permitted access
to the unit.
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 116
■ Network Name
Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network
devices.
■ Procedure
1
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
2
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the
entry.
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
4
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Multi Zone
Configures the multi zone settings.
■ Main Zone Set
Configures the main zone setting.
❑ Zone Rename
Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen.
■ Procedure
1
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
2
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry.
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
4
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 117
■ Zone2 Set, Zone3 Set
Configures the Zone2 or Zone3 settings.
❑ Volume
Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
If you have connected an external amplifier with volume control to the unit, disable the
volume adjustment for the corresponding zone.
Settings
❑ Max Volume
Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.
Setting range
-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB
Default
+16.5 dB
• This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.
❑ Initial Volume
Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.
Settings
• This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.
❑ Mono
Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
Settings
❑ Zone Scene Rename
Changes the scene names (for Zone2 or Zone3) displayed on the front display or TV
screen.
■ Procedure
1
Use the cursor keys to select a scene to be renamed and press ENTER.
2
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
3
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the
entry.
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
5
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
❑ Zone Rename
Changes the zone name (for Zone2 or Zone3) displayed on the front display or TV
screen.
You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main Zone
Set” (p.116).
Fixed Disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
Variable (default) Enables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
Off (default)
Sets the level at the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby
mode.
On
Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80.0 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB
increments).
(Specify a volume level which is lower than the “Max Volume” setting.)
Off (default) Produces stereo sounds in Zone2 or Zone3.
On Produces monaural sounds in Zone2 or Zone3.
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 118
■ Zone4 Set
Configures the Zone4 settings.
❑ Zone Scene Rename
Changes the scene names (for Zone4) displayed on the front display or TV screen.
You can change the scene names in the same manner as “Zone Scene Rename” in
“Zone2 Set, Zone3 Set” (p.117).
❑ Zone Rename
Changes the zone name (for Zone4) displayed on the front display or TV screen.
You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main Zone
Set” (p.116).
■ Monitor Out Assign
Select the zone for which the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO,
S VIDEO and VIDEO) jacks are used.
Settings
Main (default), Zone2, Zone3
• To watch videos played back on a video device on the zone video monitor, you need to connect the video
monitor to the unit in the same way as the video device. For example, if you want to watch videos input from
the DVD player via a component video cable, connect the video monitor to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
with a component video cable.
■ HDMI OUT2 Assign
Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used.
Settings
Main (default), Zone2, Zone4
• For details on video/audio signals that can be output to each zone, see “Multi-zone output” (p.149).
❑ Audio Output
Enables/disables the audio output from the HDMI OUT 2 jack when “HDMI OUT2
Assign” is set to “Zone2”.
■ Party Mode Set
Enables/disables switching to the party mode (p.88) for each zone.
Choice
Target: Zone2, Target: Zone3, Target: Zone4
Settings
On Enables the audio output.
Off (default) Disables the audio output (video output only).
Disable Disables switching to the party mode.
Enable (default)
Enables switching to the party mode. You can turn on/off the party
mode by pressing PARTY on the remote control.
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 119
Function
Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use.
■ Input Assignment
Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input
source.
■ Procedure
Example: assigning the OPTICAL (e) jack to the input source “AV 2”
1
Use the cursor keys to select the cell at the intersection of “AV 2” and “Optical”,
and press ENTER.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “e” and press ENTER.
3
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
• You cannot assign both COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to the same input source.
■ Display Set
Configures the settings related to the front display and TV screen display.
❑ Dimmer (Front Display)
Adjusts the brightness of the front display.
Setting range
-4 to 0 (higher to brighten)
Default
0
❑ Short Message
Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated
(such as input selection and volume adjustment).
Settings
❑ Wallpaper
Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV.
Settings
On (default) Displays short messages on the TV screen.
Off Does not display short messages on the TV screen.
Picture 1 (default),
Picture 2, Picture 3
Displays the selected image on the TV screen when there is no video
signal.
Gray
Displays a gray background on the TV screen when there is no video
signal.
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 120
■ Trigger Output1, Trigger Output2
Sets the TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks to function in sync with the power status of each zone
or input switching.
❑ Trigger Mode
Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function.
Settings
Source
Specifies the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input, switching
when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”.
Choices
AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4, PHONO, TUNER, (network sources), USB, MULTI CH
Settings
Manual
Switches the output level for electronic signal transmission manually when “Trigger
Mode” is set to “Manual”. This setting can also be used to confirm proper function of
the external device connected via the TRIGGER OUT jack.
Choices
❑ Target Zone
Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized.
Settings
■ DC OUT
Configures the DC OUT jack setting.
❑ Power Mode
Selects how to supply power to the Yamaha AV accessory connected to the DC OUT
jack.
Settings
Power (default)
The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the power status of the
zone specified with “Target Zone”.
Source
The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the input switching in
the zone specified with “Target Zone”.
An electronic signal is transmitted according to the setting made in
“Source”.
Manual
Select this to manually switch the output level for electronic signal
transmission with “Manual”.
Low
Stops the electronic signal transmission when you switch to the input
source specified in this option.
High (default)
Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the input source
specified in this option.
Low Stops the electronic signal transmission.
High (default) Transmits the electronic signal.
Main
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the power status of the main zone.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone.
Zone2
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the power status of Zone2.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the input switching in Zone2.
Zone3
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with power status of Zone3.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with input switching in Zone3.
Zone4
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with power status of Zone4.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with input switching in Zone4.
All (default)
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the power status of any zone.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the input switching in any zone.
Continuous (default)
Supplies power through the DC OUT jack continuously regardless of
the power state (on/standby) of the unit.
Main Zone Power
Sync.
Supplies power through the DC OUT jack only when the main zone is
turned on.
(This setting may not work properly on some accessories.)
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 121
■ Memory Guard
Prevents accidental changes to the settings.
Settings
• When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen.
ECO
Configures the auto-standby setting.
■ Auto Power Standby
Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. If you do not operate the unit for
the specified time, the unit will automatically go into standby mode.
Settings
Default
U.K. and Europe models: 8 hours
Other models: Off
• Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerStdby” appears and then countdown starts in the
front display.
Off (default) Does not protect the settings.
On Protects the settings until “Off” is selected.
Icon
Off Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically.
2 hours, 4 hours,
8 hours, 12 hours
Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for
the specified time. For example, when “2 hours” is selected, the unit
will switch to standby mode if you do not operate it for 2 hours.
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) En 122
Language
Select an on-screen menu language.
Settings
• The information on the front display is provided in English only.
You can view information about the unit using the TV screen.
1
Press ON SCREEN.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Information” and press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an information type.
4
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
English (default) English
Japanese
French
German
Spanish
Russian
Italian
Chinese
Français
Deutsch
Español
Italiano
Viewing information about the unit
(Information menu)
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) En 123
Types of information
■ Audio Signal
Displays information about the current audio signal.
• Even when the unit is set to output bitstream signals directly, the signal may be converted depending on the
specifications and settings of the playback device.
■ Video Signal
Displays information about the current video signal.
■ HDMI Monitor
Displays information about the TVs connected to the HDMI OUT jacks.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to switch between “OUT1” and “OUT2”.
■ Network
Displays the network information on the unit.
■ System
Displays the system information on the unit.
• If the unit detects a newer firmware over the network, “!” (exclamation mark) appears at the upper right of
the “Information” and “System” icons, and the corresponding message will be displayed in this screen. You
can update the unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in this screen and following the procedure in “Updating
the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.136).
■ Multi Zone
Displays information about Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4.
Input
Format Audio format of the input signal
Channel
The number of source channels in the input signal
(front/surround/LFE)
For example, “5.1 (3/2/0.1)” means 5.1ch in total
(3 front channels, 2 surround channels, and LFE)
Sampling The number of samples per second of the input digital signal
Bitrate The amount of data per second of the input bitstream signal
Dialogue The dialogue normalization level of the input bitstream signal
Output The channels (PRE OUT jacks) from which signals are output
HDMI Signal Presence or absence of HDMI signal input/output
HDMI Resolution Resolutions of input signal (analog or HDMI) and output signal (HDMI)
Analog Resolution
Resolutions of input signal (analog) and signal output at the MONITOR OUT
jacks (analog)
Interface TV interface
Video Resolution Resolutions supported by the TV
IP Address IP address
Subnet Mask Subnet mask
Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway
DNS Server (P) The IP address of the primary DNS server
DNS Server (S) The IP address of the secondary DNS server
MAC Address MAC address
Network Name Network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.116)
Status The connection status of the NETWORK jack
Remote ID The unit’s remote control ID setting (p.125)
TV Format The unit’s video signal type (p.125)
Tuner Freq. Step
(Asia model only)
The FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit (p.125)
System ID System ID number
Firmware Version The version of firmware installed on the unit
Input The input source selected for Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4
Volume The volume for Zone2 or Zone3
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 124
Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display.
1
Set the unit to standby mode.
2
While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE
z
.
3
Press PROGRAM to select an item.
4
Press STRAIGHT to select a setting.
5
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on
again.
The new settings take effect.
ADVANCED SETUP menu items
Turning on/off the remote control sensor
(REMOTE SENSOR)
Turn on/off the remote control sensor on the main unit. While the remote control sensor
is turned off, you cannot control the unit from the remote control.
Settings
Configuring the system settings
(ADVANCED SETUP menu)
MAIN ZONE z STRAIGHT
PROGRAM
Item Function Page
REMOTE SENSOR Turns on/off of the remote control sensor on the main unit. 124
REMOTE CON AMP Selects the unit’s remote control ID. 125
TUNER FRQ STEP
(Asia model only)
Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting.
125
TV FORMAT Switches the video signal type. 125
MONITOR CHECK Removes the limitation on HDMI video output. 126
RECOV./BACKUP
Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings
from the backup.
126
INITIALIZE Restores the default settings. 126
FIRM UPDATE Updates the firmware. 127
VERSION Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. 127
ON (default) Turns on the remote control sensor.
OFF Turns off the remote control sensor.
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
STEREO
ENHANCER
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
SPIMP.-
ON
REMOTESENSOR
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 125
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE CON AMP)
Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default:
ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a
unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver.
Settings
ID1 (default), ID2
■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control
Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds. Otherwise, the setting will be
automatically canceled.
1
Press SETUP.
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “PRESET” and press ENTER.
3
Press RECEIVER z and press ENTER.
4
Use the numeric keys or cursor keys to enter “5019” (ID1) or “5020” (ID2).
5
Press ENTER to confirm the setting.
Once the remote control ID is registered successfully, “OK” appears in the display
window.
If “ERROR” appears, registration failed. Repeat from step 3.
6
To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.
• The registered remote control codes (p.128) are not cleared even if you change the remote control ID.
Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting
(TUNER FRQ STEP)
(Asia model only)
Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or
region.
Settings
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)
Switch the video signal type of the unit so that it matches to the format of your TV.
Settings
NTSC, PAL
Default
U.S.A., Canada, Taiwan and Korea models: NTSC
Other models: PAL
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
STEREO
ENHANCER
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
SPIMP.-
ID1
REMOTECONAMP
PRESET
5020
FM100/AM10
Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz
steps and AM by 10-kHz steps.
FM50/AM9 (default)
Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps
and AM by 9-kHz steps.
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
3
ZONE
2
STEREO
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
FM50/AM9
TUNERFRQSTEP
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
STEREO
ENHANCER
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
SPIMP.-
NTSC
TVFORMAT
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 126
Removing the limitation on HDMI video output
(MONITOR CHECK)
The unit automatically detects resolutions supported by a TV connected to the HDMI
OUT jack.
Disable the monitor check function if you want to specify a resolution in “Resolution”
(p.112) when the unit cannot detect the TV’s resolution or when you want to specify a
different resolution than the detected resolution.
Settings
• Reset to “YES” if the unit becomes inoperable because video from the unit cannot be displayed on the TV
after “MONITOR CHECK” has been set to “SKIP”.
Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP)
Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings from the backup.
■ Backup/recovery procedure
1
Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “BACKUP” or “RECOVERY” and press INFO
to start the process.
Choices
Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE)
Restores the default settings for the unit.
Choices
YES (default)
Enables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a
resolution supported by the TV only.)
SKIP
Disables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a
specified resolution regardless of compatibility with the TV.)
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
STEREO
ENHANCER
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
SPIMP.-
YES
MONITORCHECK
BACKUP Creates backup of the settings of the unit in the internal memory.
RECOVERY
Recovers the settings of the unit from the backup (available only when
backup has been created).
Note
• Do not turn off the unit during the recovery process. Otherwise, the settings may not be restored
correctly.
• The backup does not contain user information (such as user accounts and passwords).
VIDEO Restores the default settings for video configurations.
ALL Restores the default settings for the unit.
CANCEL Does not perform an initialization.
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
STEREO
ENHANCER
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
SPIMP.-
BACKUP
RECOV./BACKUP
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
STEREO
ENHANCER
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
SPIMP.-
CANCEL
INITIALIZE
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 127
Updating the firmware (FIRM UPDATE)
New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be
released as needed. Updates can be downloaded from the Yamaha website. If the unit
is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For
details, refer to the information supplied with updates.
■ Firmware update procedure
Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure
you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware.
1
Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to
start firmware update.
Choices
• If the unit detects newer firmware over the network, the corresponding message will be displayed after
ON SCREEN is pressed. In this case, you can also update the unit’s firmware by following the procedure in
“Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.136).
Checking the firmware version (VERSION)
Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.
• You can also check the firmware version in “System” (p.123) in the “Information” menu.
• It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed.
USB Update the firmware using a USB memory device.
NETWORK Update the firmware via the network.
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
STEREO
ENHANCER
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
SPIMP.-
USB
FIRMUPDATE
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
STEREO
ENHANCER
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
SPIMP.-
x.xx
VERSION
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 128
You can use the unit’s remote control to operate external devices
(such as BD/DVD players) if you have registered the remote control
code of the external device. You can also use the macro function to
sequentially operate multiple functions at once.
1
Press SETUP.
• If no operation is performed within 30 seconds, the remote control
automatically exits from the setup menu.
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and
press ENTER.
• You cannot control an external device that does not have a remote control sensor.
Registering remote control codes
■
Registering the remote control code for a TV
You can use the unit’s remote control to operate a TV if you have
registered its remote control code.
• You can also register your TV’s remote control code to the unit’s input selection
keys (p.129). This would allow you to use the cursor keys or numeric keys to
operate the TV (this function may not be available on some TV models).
1
Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM
to find your TV’s remote control code.
• If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list.
If that does not work, try the other codes.
2
Press SETUP.
Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 2.
3
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “PRESET” and
press ENTER.
4
Press TV z and press ENTER.
Controlling external devices with the remote control
Item Function Page
LEARN
Assigns a function to each key by learning the code
from other remote controls.
130
PRESET
Registers the remote control code for external
devices.
128
RENAME
Edits the device names or scene names displayed
on the remote control’s display window.
131
MACRO
Programs macro operations (sequence of control
commands).
132
CLEAR Clears the remote control configurations. 134
ERASE Erases a function assigned to each key by learning. 135
EX-IR
Extended IR code mode. This feature is for the
authorized custom installers only.
—
SETUP
PRESET
Item name
PRESET
----
“----” (empty) or code currently registered
2 3
5
1
46
TUN./ CH
ENHANCER
SUR.
DECODE
HDMI OUT
MEMORY
INFO AM
PAR TY
FM
0
10
LEVELENT
SETUPZONE
87
SLEEP
9
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
MULTI
PHONO
USB NET
TUNER
[ C ][ A ] [ B ]
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
TV VOL
MUTE
MODE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
TV CH
PRESET
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
2
3
5
1
4
6
T
U
N.
/
CH
ENHAN
CE
R
SUR
.
D
E
CO
D
E
HDMI
OU
T
MEM
O
RY
INF
O
AM
PA
RT
Y
FM
0
10
LEVE
L
EN
T
Z
O
NE
8
7
S
LE
E
P
9
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
A
V
A
UDI
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
MUL
TI
L
L
PH
O
N
O
US
B
NE
T
TUNE
R
[
C
]
[
A
]
[
B
]
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
MO
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INPU
T
PUR
E
D
IRE
CT
MUTE
TV
SC
EN
E
1
2
3
4
PR
OGR
A
M
V
O
LUME
TV
V
O
L
MUTE
M
O
D
E
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
DI
S
P
L
AY
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
SETUP
TV z
ENTER
Cursor keys
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 129
5
Use the numeric keys or cursor keys to enter the
4-digit remote control code and press ENTER.
Once the remote control code is successfully registered,
“OK” appears in the display window.
If “ERROR” appears, registration has failed. Repeat from
Step 3.
6
To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.
❑ TV operations
Once you have registered the remote control code for your TV, you
can control it using the TV operation keys, regardless of the input
source selected on the unit.
■ Registering the remote control codes for
playback devices
You can use the unit’s remote control to operate playback devices if
you have registered their remote control codes. You can also use
the input selection keys to change the playback devices that are
controlled by the remote control, because their remote control
codes are assigned to the input selection keys.
• Under the unit’s default settings, the amplifier code (Yamaha: 5098) is set for all
the input selection keys. With this setting, you can control HDMI
Control-compatible devices connected to the unit with the remote control. (This
function may not work depending on the specification of the external device.)
• If you have registered the remote control code for an external device to the [A], [B]
or [C] key, you can operate the device with the remote control without switching
the input source after pressing the key.
1
Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM
to find the remote control code for your playback
device.
• If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list. If
that does not work, try the other codes.
2
Press SETUP.
Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 2.
3
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “PRESET” and
press ENTER.
4
Press a corresponding input selection key and
press ENTER.
For example, press AV1 to set the remote control code for
the playback device connected to the AV1 jack.
5
Use the numeric keys or cursor keys to enter the
4-digit remote control and press ENTER.
Once the remote control code is successfully registered,
“OK” appears in the display window.
If “ERROR” appears, registration has failed. Repeat from
Step 3.
TV operation keys
INPUT Switches the video inputs of the TV.
MUTE Mutes the audio output of the TV.
TV VOL Adjust the volume of the TV.
TV CH Switch the channels of the TV.
TV z Turns on/off the TV.
PRESET
5098
Code currently registered
2 3
5
1
4 6
TUN./ CH
ENHANCER
SUR.
DECODE
HDMI OUT
MEMORY
INFO AM
PAR TY
FM
0
10
LEVELENT
SETUPZONE
87
SLEEP
9
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
MULTI
PHONO
USB NET
TUNER
[ C ][ A ] [ B ]
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
TV VOL
MUTE
MODE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
TV CH
PRESET
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
T
U
N.
/
CH
ENHAN
CE
R
SUR
.
D
E
CO
D
E
HDMI
OU
T
MEM
O
RY
INF
O
AM
PA
RT
Y
FM
LEVE
L
Z
O
NE
S
LE
E
P
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
MO
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
H
T
PUR
E
D
IRE
CT
SC
EN
E
1
2
3
4
PR
OGR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
M
O
D
E
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
DI
S
P
L
AY
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
PRE
S
E
T
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
SETUP
ENTER
Input selection keys
TV operation keys
Numeric keys
Cursor keys
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 130
6
To set another remote control code, repeat Steps 4
and 5.
7
To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.
• For details on how to register a remote control code to a SCENE key, refer to
“Configuring scene assignments” (p.54).
❑ Playback device operations
Once you have registered the remote control code for your
playback device, you can control it using the following keys after
selecting the input source or scene.
• By pressing SOURCE/RECEIVER, you can switch the devices (the unit or
external device) that are operated by the menu operation keys, DISPLAY and
numeric keys. You can operate the unit when SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in
orange, and an external device when SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in green. For
example, if you register the remote control code of your external device on
TUNER, you can operate the unit’s built-in FM/AM radio when
SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in orange, and the external device when
SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in green.
• These keys work only if the corresponding function is available on your playback
device and if the device can be operated with an infrared remote control.
Programming from other remote controls
(learning)
The remote control of the unit can receive remote control signals
from other infrared remote controls and learn the remote control
operation. If you cannot find a remote control code for your
playback device or if any key on the remote control does not work
after you register the remote control code, use the learning function
to assign a function to each key.
1
Press SETUP.
Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 1.
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “LEARN” and
press ENTER.
3
Press one of the following keys depending on the
type of your device.
For playback device: press the input selection key
(corresponding to the input jacks where the device is
connected).
For TV: press TV z.
SOURCE z Turns on/off the playback device.
Menu operation
keys
Cursor keys Select an item.
ENTER Confirms a selected item.
RETURN Returns to the previous screen.
DISPLAY Switches information on the display.
MODE Switches between modes.
External device
operation keys
TOP MENU Displays the top menu.
POP-UP/MENU Displays the pop-up menu.
s Stops playback.
d Stops playback temporarily.
a
Starts playback of the selected
song/video.
h
Searches forward/backward (by
holding down).
j
f
Skips forward/backward.
g
Numeric keys Enter numerical values.
TV operation keys Control the TV (p.129).
LEARN
2 3
5
1
4 6
TUN./ CH
ENHANCER
SUR.
DECODE
HDMI OUT
MEMORY
INFO AM
PAR TY
FM
0
10
LEVELENT
SETUPZONE
87
SLEEP
9
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
MULTI
PHONO
USB NET
TUNER
[ C ][ A ] [ B ]
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
TV VOL
MUTE
MODE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
TV CH
PRESET
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
T
U
N.
/
CH
ENHAN
CE
R
SUR
.
D
E
CO
D
E
HDMI
OU
T
MEM
O
RY
INF
O
AM
PA
RT
Y
FM
LEVE
L
Z
O
N
E
S
LE
E
P
A
V
A
UDI
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
MUL
TI
L
L
PH
O
N
O
US
B
NE
T
TUNE
R
[
C
]
[
A
]
[
B
]
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
MO
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
H
T
PUR
E
D
IRE
CT
SC
EN
E
1
2
3
4
PR
OGR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
PRE
S
E
T
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
SETUP
TV z
MODE
DISPLAY
ENTER
SOURCE/RECEIVER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
TV operation keys
Numeric keys
External device
operation keys
External device
operation keys
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 131
4
Press ENTER.
5
Aim the infrared transmitters of the remote controls
at each other.
6
Perform the following steps (a and b) within
10 seconds.
a On the unit, press one of the following keys to which you want to
assign a function.
For playback device: SOURCE z, menu operations keys,
DISPLAY, MODE, external device operation keys, numeric keys
For TV: TV operation keys
b On the external device, press the key from which the operation is
learned until “OK” appears in the display window.
If “NG” appears, learning has failed. Repeat from Step 4.
7
Repeat Steps 3 to 6 until all desired operations are
learned.
8
To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.
• This remote control can learn approximately 200 functions (may be
decreased depending on the signals). If “FULL” appears in the display
window, clear unnecessary assignments to free some memory space for the
new functions.
Editing device names
You can edit the device names or scene names displayed on the
remote control’s display window.
1
Press SETUP.
Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 1.
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “RENAME” and
press ENTER.
3
Press one of the following keys to select a device or
a scene.
For playback device: press the input selection key
(corresponding to the input jacks where the device is connected).
For TV: press TV z.
For AV receiver (the unit): press RECEIVER z.
For scene: press one of the SCENE keys.
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-AU X
1 2 3 4
MULTI
PHONO
USB NET
TUNER
[ C ][ A ] [ B ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
Remote control of external device
5 to 10 cm (2 to 4”) apart
Note
• If you press RECEIVER z in Step 3, you can assign functions of an external
receiver to the menu operation keys, external device operation keys or
numeric keys. However, it makes these keys to control the unit impossible. If
you need to restore the remote control code for the unit, perform the following
steps.
a Press SETUP.
b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “CLEAR” and press ENTER.
c Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “LEARN” and press ENTER.
d Press RECEIVER z.
e Hold down ENTER until “OK” appears on the window display.
f To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.
RENAME
2 3
5
1
4 6
TUN./ CH
ENHANCER
SUR.
DECODE
HDMI OUT
MEMORY
INFO AM
PAR TY
FM
0
10
LEVELENT
SETUPZONE
87
SLEEP
9
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
MULTI
PHONO
USB NET
TUNER
[ C ][ A ] [ B ]
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
TV VOL
MUTE
MODE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
TV CH
PRESET
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
T
U
N.
/
CH
ENHAN
CE
R
SUR
.
D
E
CO
D
E
HDMI
OU
T
MEM
O
RY
INF
O
AM
PA
RT
Y
FM
LEVE
L
Z
O
NE
S
LE
E
P
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
MO
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
H
T
PUR
E
D
IRE
CT
PR
OGR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
PRE
S
E
T
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
SETUP
TV z
MODE
DISPLAY
ENTER
SCENE
RECEIVER z
Input selection keys
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
TV operation keys
Numeric keys
External device
operation keys
External device
operation keys
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 132
• To edit scene names of each zone, press one of the SCENE keys and press
ZONE to select a zone.
4
Press ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys to rename.
To locate the position, use the cursor keys (e/r).
To select a character (A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, space,
symbols), use the cursor keys (q/w).
6
Press ENTER to register the new name.
Once the new name is successfully registered, “OK”
appears in the display window.
7
To edit another device name (or scene name), repeat
Steps 3 to 6.
8
To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.
Operating multiple functions at once
(macro)
The macro function allows you to sequentially operate multiple
functions at once.
For example, when you want to listen to a CD, you can turn on the
CD player, select the corresponding input source on the unit and
start playback on the CD player sequentially with a single key
operation.
■ Enabling the macro operations
1
Press SETUP.
Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 1.
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MACRO” and
press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “ON” and press
ENTER.
4
To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.
• To disable the macro operations, select “OFF” in Step 3.
BD/DVD
MACRO
ON
RECEIVER
“MACRO” lights up (when macro operations are enabled)
RECEIVER
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
MULTI
PHONO
USB NET
TUNER
[ C ][ A ] [ B ]
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
TV VOL
MUTE
MODE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
TV CH
PRESET
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
2 3
5
1
46
TUN./ CH
ENHANCER
SUR.
DECODE
HDMI OUT
MEMORY
INFO AM
PAR TY
FM
0
10
LEVELENT
SETUPZONE
87
SLEEP
9
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
A
V
A
UDI
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
MUL
TI
L
L
PH
O
N
O
US
B
N
ET
TUNE
R
[
C
]
[
A
]
[
B
]
PR
OGR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
DI
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
2
3
5
1
4
6
T
U
N.
/
CH
ENHAN
CE
R
SUR
.
DE
CO
D
E
HDMI
OU
T
M
EM
O
RY
I
NF
O
AM
PA
RT
Y
FM
0
10
LEVE
L
EN
T
8
7
S
LE
E
P
9
SETUP
ZONE
ENTER
SCENE
Cursor keys
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 133
By default, the following macro operations are available after
pressing a macro operation key when the macro operations are
enabled.
■ Programming macro operations
You can program up to 10 remote control commands for each
macro operation key. If you press the corresponding macro
operation key, the multiple operations will be carried out
sequentially according to the programmed remote control
commands.
• Before programming macro operations, you need to register the remote control
codes (p.128) or assign a function to each key using the learning function (p.130).
• We do not recommend including continuous operations (such as volume
adjustment) in macro operations.
1
Press SETUP.
Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 1.
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MACRO” and
press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “EDIT” and
press ENTER.
4
Press the macro operation key (RECEIVER z or
input selection key) to which macro operations are
assigned and press ENTER.
“MACRO 1” appears in the display window.
5
Press the keys for functions (up to 10) you want to
include in the macro operations in sequence.
To switch the devices (the unit or external device) to control,
press SOURCE/RECEIVER.
(Example)
Programming for aturning on the unit, bselecting “AV1” as
the input source, cturning on the DVD player assigned to
“AV1” and dturning on the TV
a (MACRO 1) Press RECEIVER z.
b (MACRO 2) Press AV1.
c (MACRO 3) Press SOURCE/RECEIVER repeatedly to select
“AV1” and press SOURCE z.
d (MACRO 4) Press SOURCE/RECEIVER repeatedly to select
“TV” and press TV z.
6
To confirm the setting, hold down ENTER until “OK”
appears on the window display.
If you have programmed 10 functions, “FULL” appears and
the setting is confirmed automatically.
7
To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.
Macro operation key
Macro operations
1st command 2nd commend
RECEIVER z Turns on the unit. (unregistered)
Input selection keys Turns on the unit.
Selects the
corresponding input
source. (unregistered
for the [A], [B] and [C]
keys)
MACRO
EDIT
MACRO1
2 3
5
1
46
TUN./ CH
ENHANCER
SUR.
DECODE
HDMI OUT
MEMORY
INFO AM
PAR TY
FM
0
10
LEVELENT
SETUPZONE
87
SLEEP
9
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
MULTI
PHONO
USB NET
TUNER
[ C ][ A ] [ B ]
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
TV VOL
MUTE
MODE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
TV CH
PRESET
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
2
3
5
1
4
6
T
U
N.
/
CH
E
NHAN
CE
R
SUR
.
D
E
CO
D
E
HDMI
OU
T
MEM
O
RY
I
NF
O
AM
PA
RT
Y
FM
0
10
LEVE
L
EN
T
Z
O
NE
8
7
S
LE
E
P
9
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
MO
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INPU
T
PUR
E
D
IRE
CT
MUTE
TV
SC
EN
E
1
2
3
4
PR
OGR
A
M
V
O
LUME
TV
V
O
L
MUTE
M
O
D
E
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
DI
S
P
L
AY
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
SETUP
TV z
ENTER
RECEIVER z
SOURCE/RECEIVER
Input selection keys
Cursor keys
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 134
Resetting the remote control configurations
■ Clearing the remote control configurations
You can clear remote control configurations by selecting a type of
settings or clear all the remote control configurations.
1
Press SETUP.
Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 1.
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “CLEAR” and
press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select the settings to
be cleared and press ENTER.
“ALL” appears in the display window.
To apply the selection to all the corresponding keys,
proceed to Step 5.
To apply the selection to a specific key, proceed to Step 4.
• When “RESET” is selected, all remote control configurations will be cleared.
You cannot select a specific key. Proceed to step 5.
4
Press a key to which the selected process is
applied.
When “LEARN” or “PRESET” is selected: press the
input selection key or TV
z.
When “RENAME” is selected: press the input selection
key, RECEIVER z, TV z or SCENE.
When “MACRO” is selected: press the macro operation
key (input selection key or RECEIVER z).
5
Hold down ENTER until “OK” appears on the
window display.
If “NG” or “ERROR” appears, clearing has failed. Repeat
from Step 2.
6
To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.
LEARN
Clears the functions learned from other remote
controls.
PRESET Restores the default remote control code settings.
RENAME Restores the default device name settings.
MACRO Clears the macro operation settings.
RESET
Clears all remote control configurations and
restores default settings.
CLEAR
PRESET
ALL
2 3
5
1
46
TUN./ CH
ENHANCER
SUR.
DECODE
HDMI OUT
MEMORY
INFO AM
PAR TY
FM
0
10
LEVELENT
SETUPZONE
87
SLEEP
9
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
MULTI
PHONO
USB NET
TUNER
[ C ][ A ] [ B ]
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
TV VOL
MUTE
MODE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
TV CH
PRESET
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
2
3
5
1
4
6
T
U
N.
/
CH
ENHAN
CE
R
SUR
.
D
E
CO
D
E
HDMI
OU
T
MEM
O
RY
INF
O
AM
PA
RT
Y
FM
0
10
LEVE
L
EN
T
Z
O
NE
8
7
S
LE
E
P
9
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
MO
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INPU
T
PUR
E
D
IRE
CT
MUTE
TV
PR
OGR
A
M
V
O
LUME
TV
V
O
L
MUTE
M
O
D
E
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
DI
S
P
L
AY
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
SETUP
TV z
ENTER
SCENE
RECEIVER z
Input selection keys
Cursor keys
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 135
■ Erasing a function assigned to each key by
learning
You can erase a function assigned to each key by learning and
restore the default key assignments.
1
Press SETUP.
Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 1.
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “ERASE” and
press ENTER.
3
Press one of the following keys to select the device
for which key assignments will be cleared.
For playback device: press the input selection key.
For TV: press TV z.
4
Press ENTER.
5
Hold down the key to be reset until “OK” appears on
the window display.
If “NG” or “ERROR” appears, clearing has failed. Repeat
from Step 2.
6
Repeat Steps 3 to 5 until all desired key
assignments are erased.
7
To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.
ERASE
2 3
5
1
46
TUN./ CH
ENHANCER
SUR.
DECODE
HDMI OUT
MEMORY
INFO AM
PAR TY
FM
0
10
LEVELENT
SETUPZONE
87
SLEEP
9
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
MULTI
PHONO
USB NET
TUNER
[ C ][ A ] [ B ]
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
TV VOL
MUTE
MODE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
TV CH
PRESET
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
2
3
5
1
4
6
T
U
N.
/
CH
E
NHAN
CE
R
SUR
.
D
E
CO
D
E
HDMI
OU
T
MEM
O
RY
I
NF
O
AM
PA
RT
Y
FM
0
10
LEVE
L
EN
T
Z
O
NE
8
7
S
LE
E
P
9
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
MO
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INPU
T
PUR
E
D
IRE
CT
MUTE
TV
SC
EN
E
1
2
3
4
PR
OGR
A
M
V
O
LUME
TV
V
O
L
MUTE
M
O
D
E
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
DI
S
P
L
AY
PO
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
SETUP
TV z
ENTER
Cursor keys
Input selection keys
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Updating the unit’s firmware via the network En 136
New firmware that provides additional features or product
improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected
to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and
update it.
• You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the
“ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.127).
A firmware update is available if the following message is displayed
after ON SCREEN is pressed.
1
Read the on-screen description.
2
To start the firmware update, use the cursor keys to
select “START” and press ENTER.
The on-screen display turns off.
3
If “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!”
appears on the front display, press MAIN ZONE z
on the front panel.
The firmware update is complete.
• If you want to update the firmware later, select “CLOSE” in Step 2. “!” (exclamation
mark) appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and a
message will be displayed in the “System” screen (p.123). You can update the
unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in the “System” screen.
Updating the unit’s firmware via the network
Note
• Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during
firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more
(depending on your Internet connection speed).
• If the Internet connection speed is slow or if the unit is connected to the
wireless network via a wireless network adapter, network update may not be
possible depending on the condition of the wireless connection. In this case,
try the firmware update later or use the USB memory device (p.127).
Information
icon
Message
System Icon
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
MULTI
PHONO
USB NET
TUNER
[ C ][ A ] [ B ]
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
TV VOL
MUTE
MODE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
TV CH
PRESET
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
U
D
I
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-
A
U
X
1
2
3
4
MUL
TI
L
L
PH
O
N
O
US
B
NE
T
TUNE
R
[
C
]
[
A
]
[
B
]
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
DIRE
CT
MUTE
TV
SC
EN
E
1
2
3
4
PR
OGR
A
M
V
O
LUME
TV
V
O
L
MUTE
M
O
D
E
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
DI
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
ENTER
Cursor keys
APPENDIX ➤ Frequently asked questions En 137
APPENDIX
The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound
balance...
If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use “Auto Setup” to
optimize the speaker settings again (p.41). If you want to adjust the speaker settings
manually, use “Manual Setup” in the “Setup” menu (p.106).
Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the
volume control...
If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the
volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or
speakers. We recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum
volume level for the unit in advance (p.110). You can also set the maximum volume for
Zone2 or Zone3 (p.117).
I am occasionally startled by a sudden loud sound when turning
on the unit...
By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically
applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the
volume to be applied when the receiver is turned on (p.110). You can also set the initial
volume for Zone2 or Zone3 (p.117).
We are bothered by volume differences when switching
between input sources…
You can correct volume differences between input sources by utilizing “Input Trim” in
the “Option” menu (p.92).
I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at
all...
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.150). After
connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit,
enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This
setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your
system. For information on how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback
devices, refer to the instruction manuals for each device.
I want to turn off the on-screen messages displayed during
operations...
By default, short messages are displayed on the TV screen when the unit is operated
(such as input selection and volume adjustment). If the short messages bother you
when you are watching movies or sports, configure “Short Message” (p.119) in the
“Setup” menu to turn off the short messages.
I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings...
You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by
utilizing “Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.121).
The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another
Yamaha product as well as the unit...
When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another
Yamaha product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens,
register different remote control IDs for the devices that you want to control with each
remote control (p.125).
I want to enjoy videos/audio played back on the video device
even when the unit is in standby mode...
If you have connected a video device to the unit with HDMI, you can output
videos/audio played back on the video device to the TV even when the unit is in
standby mode. To use this function, set “Standby Through” (p.114) in the “Setup” menu
to “On”. You can also switch the input source using the remote control of the unit when
this function is enabled.
Frequently asked questions
APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 138
Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly.
If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit and power amplifier, disconnect the power cable, and contact the
nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
First, check the following:
a The power cables of the unit, power amplifier, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC
wall outlets securely.
b The unit, power amplifier, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on.
c The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device.
Power, system and remote control
Troubleshooting
Problem Cause Remedy
The power does not turn on.
The protection circuitry has been activated three times
consecutively. When the unit is in this condition, the standby
indicator on the unit blinks if you try to turn on the power.
As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your
nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair.
The power does not turn off.
The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric
shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop
in the power supply voltage.
Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to
initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable
from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.)
The unit enters standby mode automatically.
The sleep timer worked. Turn on the unit and start playback again.
The auto-standby function kicked in because the unit was not used
for the specified time.
To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Standby” in the “Setup”
menu to “Off” (p.121).
The unit is not reacting.
The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric
shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop
in the power supply voltage.
Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to
initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable
from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.)
The unit cannot be controlled using the remote
control.
The unit is out of the operating range. Use the remote control within the operating range (p.5).
The batteries are weak. Replace with new batteries.
The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or
strong lighting.
Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit.
The remote control is set to control external devices.
Press SOURCE/RECEIVER to set the remote control to control the unit (the key
lights up in orange).
The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.
Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.125).
APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 139
Audio
External devices cannot be controlled using the
remote control.
The remote control is set to control the unit.
Press SOURCE/RECEIVER to set the remote control to control external devices
(the key lights up in green).
The corresponding remote control code is not set properly.
Set the remote control code again (p.128). Even if the remote control code is
registered properly, some products may not respond to the remote control.
The MHL-compatible mobile device cannot be
controlled using the remote control.
A remote control code for another playback device is assigned to
V-AUX.
Reset the remote control code registered to V-AUX (p.134).
The mobile device or its application is not externally controllable. Directly operate the mobile device itself.
The remote control does not learn new functions.
The batteries of the remote control of the unit and/or the external
device are weak.
Replace with new batteries.
The distance between the two remote controls is not appropriate. Place the remote controls at a proper distance (p.130).
The signal coding or modulation of the other remote control is not
compatible with the remote control.
Learning is impossible in this case.
Memory capacity is full.
Clear unnecessary assignments to free some memory space for new functions
(p.135).
Problem Cause Remedy
Problem Cause Remedy
No sound.
Another input source is selected. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input.
Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio
format of the input signal, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.123).
The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
The volume cannot be increased.
The maximum volume is set. Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.110).
A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit.
No sound is coming from a specific speaker.
The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel. To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.123).
The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the
speaker.
To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.109).
Audio output of the speaker is disabled.
Perform “Auto Setup” (p.41) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change
the speaker settings (p.106).
The volume of the speaker is set too low.
Perform “Auto Setup” (p.41) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the
speaker volume (p.108).
The speaker cable connecting the power amplifier and the speaker
is defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable.
The speaker is malfunctioning.
To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the power
amplifier may be malfunctioning.
No sound is coming from the surround back
speaker.
The extended surround is disabled.
Use “Extended Surround” in the “Option” menu to select a decoder to be used
(p.92).
APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 140
No sound is coming from the subwoofer.
The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency
signals.
To check it, set “Extra Bass” in the “Setup” menu to “On”, in order to output the
front channel low-frequency components from the subwoofer (p.108).
Subwoofer output is disabled.
Perform “Auto Setup” (p.41) or set “Subwoofer 1” or “Subwoofer 2” in the “Setup”
menu to “Use” (p.107).
The volume of the subwoofer is too low. Adjust the volume on the subwoofer.
The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function. Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level.
No sound from the playback device (connected to
the unit with HDMI).
The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection).
Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
The unit is set not to output audio input through HDMI jacks from
the SPEAKERS terminals.
In “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu, set “Amp” to “On” (p.114).
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds
the limit.
Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is
used).
The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers.
Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the
speakers connected to the unit.
A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with
an HDMI cable.
Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection (p.26).
(If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable)
The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection.
Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack
(p.113).
(If you are trying to use ARC)
ARC is disabled on the unit or TV.
Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.114). Also, enable ARC on the TV.
No sound from the Zone2 TV (connected to the
unit with HDMI).
The audio output from the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is
disabled.
Set “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.118).
Only the front speakers work on multichannel
audio.
The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as
PCM) only.
To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.123). If necessary,
change the digital audio output setting on the playback device.
Noise/hum is heard.
The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device. Move the unit further away from the device.
The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
The sound is distorted.
The volume of the unit is too high. Turn down the volume.
The input signal level is too high when AUDIO 4 (XLR) is selected
as the input source.
Adjust the output signal level on the playback device or use “Balance Input
Attenuator” in the “Input” menu (p.97).
A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks.
The sound is interrupted.
If the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2 or
Zone4, HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone
operations due to internal circuitry switching.
For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back
videos/audio” (p.85).
Problem Cause Remedy
APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 141
Video
Problem Cause Remedy
No video.
Another input source is selected on the unit. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV. Set “MONITOR CHECK” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “YES” (p.126).
The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is
defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
No video from the playback device (connected to
the unit with HDMI).
The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit.
To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Video
Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.123). For information about video signals
supported by the unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.151).
The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection).
Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over
the limit.
Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV. Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
The video is interrupted.
(If you are using 2 TVs in the main zone)
Another TV is turned off when “HDMI OUT 1+2” is selected.
Select “HDMI OUT 1” or “HDMI OUT 2” to output the signals only to the TV you
are using (p.52).
(If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2 or Zone4)
HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone
operations due to internal circuitry switching.
For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back
videos/audio” (p.85).
APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 142
FM/AM radio
Problem Cause Remedy
FM radio reception is weak or noisy.
There is multi-path interference. Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
(U.S.A. model only)
Set “Audio Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio
reception (p.94).
(Except for U.S.A. model)
Set “FM Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio
reception (p.94).
Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element
antenna.
AM radio reception is weak or noisy.
The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors,
thermostats, or other electrical equipment.
It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor
AM antenna.
Radio stations cannot be selected automatically.
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
Select the station manually (p.61).
Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element
antenna.
The AM radio signal is weak.
Adjust the AM antenna orientation.
Select the station manually (p.61).
Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with
the supplied AM antenna.
AM radio stations cannot be registered as
presets.
Auto Preset has been used.
Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations and HD Radio station (U.S.A.
model only) only. Register AM radio stations manually (p.62).
The unit does not receive HD Radio signals.
(U.S.A. model only)
The unit is in the monaural reception mode. Set “Audio Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Auto” (p.94).
APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 143
USB and network
Problem Cause Remedy
The unit does not detect the USB device.
The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely. Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again.
The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32. Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format.
Folders and files in the USB device cannot be
viewed.
The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption. Use a USB device without an encryption function.
The files in the USB device cannot be played back
continuously.
Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.
If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files)
during playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files
in the playback folder.
The network feature does not function.
The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained
properly.
Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup”
menu to “On” on the unit (p.115). If you want to configure the network parameters
manually, check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other
network devices in your network (p.115).
The unit does not detect the PC.
The media sharing setting is not correct.
Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music
contents are shared (p.75).
Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access
of the unit to your PC.
Check the settings of security software installed on your PC.
The unit and PC are not in the same network.
Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the
unit and the PC to the same network.
The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.
In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or
specify the MAC address of your PC to allow it to access to the unit (p.115).
The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played
back.
The files are not supported by the unit or the media server.
Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For
information about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music
stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.75).
The files in the PC cannot be played back
continuously.
Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.
If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files)
during playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files
in the playback folder.
The Internet radio cannot be played.
The selected Internet radio station is currently not available.
There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have
been stopped. Try the station later or select another station.
The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting
silence.
Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try
the station later or select another station.
Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your
network devices (such as the router).
Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be
played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station.
The port number varies depending on the radio station.
The application for smartphone/tablet “AV
CONTROLLER” does not detect the unit.
The unit and smartphone/tablet are not in the same network.
Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the
unit and smartphone/tablet to the same network.
The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.
In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or
specify the MAC address of your smartphone/tablet to allow it to access to the
unit (p.115).
Firmware update via the network is failed. It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network. Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device (p.127).
APPENDIX ➤ Error indications on the front display En 144
Error indications on the front display
Message Cause Remedy
Access denied Access to the PC is denied.
Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared
(p.75).
Access error
The unit cannot access the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
The unit cannot access the iPod. Turn off the iPod and turn it on again.
The connected iPod is not supported by the unit. Use an iPod supported by the unit (p.68).
There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit.
Make sure your router and modem are turned on.
Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.37).
Internal Error An internal error has occurred. Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
MHL Overloaded
An overcurrent is flowing through the MHL-compatible mobile
device.
Turn off the unit and check the connection between the unit and mobile device.
No content There are no playable files in the selected folder. Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit.
No device
The unit cannot detect the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
The unit cannot detect the iPod. Turn off the iPod and then turn it on again.
Please wait The unit is preparing for connecting to the network.
Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn
it on again.
RemID Mismatch
The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.
Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.125).
Remote Off
The unit cannot be operated from remote control because the
remote control sensor on the main unit is turned off.
Use the controls on the front panel. To use the remote control, set “REMOTE SENSOR” in the
“ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “ON” (p.124).
Unable to play
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the USB device for
some reasons.
Check the song data. If it cannot be played on another device, the song data may be defective.
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPod for some
reason.
Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPod itself, the song data or storage area may be
defective.
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some
reason.
Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the
formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.75). If
the unit supports the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with
heavy traffic.
USB Overloaded An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
Version error Firmware update is failed. Update the firmware again.
APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 145
Audio information
■ Audio decoding format
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports
5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.
Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with Dolby
Digital Surround EX. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound.
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports
7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems
that support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II enables 5-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are three modes available:
“Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Dolby Pro Logic IIx enables 7-channel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. There are three
modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for
game sources (for 2-channel sources only).
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a
high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to
eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This
technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This
format remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital
Surround. This technology is used for music DVDs, etc.
DTS Digital Surround
DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports
5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.
DTS-ES
DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This
decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a
surround back sound is recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a
discrete surround back channel is recorded.
DTS Express
DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher
compression rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is
developed for audio streaming services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports
7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the
existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on
BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home
theater experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to
eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This
technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS Neo:6
DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music
mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete
full-bandwidth matrix channels of surround sound.
DSD (Direct Stream Digital)
DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super
Audio CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz. The highest
frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This technology
offers better audio quality than that used for CDs.
FLAC
FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio
formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality.
MP3
One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this
compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data
quantity by about 1/10 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.
MPEG-4 AAC
An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming
services on Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality
than MP3.
PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)
PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This
technology is the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called
Linear PCM for audio on a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray discs).
Glossary
APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 146
Sampling frequency/Quantization bit
Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal
is digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”.
• Sampling frequency
Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate.
When the sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider.
• Quantization bit
The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a
numeric value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more
accurate.
WAV
Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by
converting audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other
compression methods.
WMA (Windows Media Audio)
One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic
technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of
compressing data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.
■ Others
LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel
This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This
channel is added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio
effects. This channel is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio.
Lip sync
Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an
increase in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag
between audio and video output.
HDMI and video information
Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and
the Pb and Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because
each of these signals is independent.
Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined
and transmitted with a single cable.
Deep Color
Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available
colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems
process the color using 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology
allows HDTVs and other displays to increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate
on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors.
HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video
signal transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable
without any loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a
secure audio/video interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at
“
http://www.hdmi.org/”.
MHL
MHL (Mobile High-definition Link) is the interface standard for high-speed digital video signal transmission
that is developed for mobile devices. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals
from mobile devices (such as smartphones) using a single cable with any loss. As with HDMI, MHL
complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection).
S-video signal
With the S-video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the C
signal for the chrominance through the S-video cable. This technology achieves more accurate color
reproduction than the composite video signal system.
x.v.Color
“x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than
sRGB and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with
the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid,
natural images.
APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 147
Yamaha technologies
CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor)
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is
best experienced in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions
(such as room size, wall material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are
differences in the sound that you hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP,
Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own
home.
CINEMA DSP 3D
The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA
DSP 3D mode achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the
accurate and intensive 3D sound fields in a listening room.
CINEMA DSP HD³
The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA
DSP HD³ feature achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the
accurate and intensive stereoscopic sound fields in a listening room.
Compressed Music Enhancer
The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music
formats (such as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound
system.
SILENT CINEMA
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for
headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound
programs can be enjoyed on headphones.
Virtual CINEMA DSP
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with
front left and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic
sound field in a listening room.
Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS)
Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field without
presence speakers. Even if the presence speakers are not connected, the unit creates the 3D sound field in
your room.
APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 148
Video signal flow
Video signals input from a video device to the unit are
output to a TV as shown below.
m (solid line) is always available. , (dotted line)
is available only when “Analog to Analog Conversion”
(p.111) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On” (default).
■ Video conversion table
• You can select the resolution and the aspect ratio applied to HDMI-output video processing in “Video Mode” (p.111) in the “Setup” menu.
• The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably.
HDMI HDMI
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI
S VIDEO
VIDEO VIDEO VIDEOVIDEO
S VIDEO S VIDEO S VIDEO
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI out COMPONENT VIDEO out
SVIDEO
out
VIDEO
out
Resolution
480i/
576i
480p/
576p
720p 1080i 1080p 4K
480i/
576i
480p/
576p
720p 1080i 1080p
480i/
576i
480i/
576i
HDMI in
480i/576i mmmmmm
480p/576p mmmmm
720p mmmm
1080i mmmm
1080p/
50, 60 Hz
mmmm
1080p/24 Hz
mm
4K m
COMPONENT
VIDEO
in
480i/576i mmmmmmm ,,
480p/576p mmmmm m
720p mmmm m
1080i mmmm m
1080p m
S VIDEO in
480i/576i mmmmmm, m,
VIDEO in 480i/576i mmmmmm, ,m
Video device The unit TV
HDMI outHDMI in
COMPONENT
VIDEO in
COMPONENT
VIDEO out
VIDEO outVIDEO in
S VIDEO outS VIDEO in
APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 149
Multi-zone output
■ Audio output
m: Available
*1 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.118) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” (Audio Output: On)
*2 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.118) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone4”
*3 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input
source selected in the main zone is selected)
*4 HDMI audio pass-through (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input source selected in the
main zone is selected)
*5 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input
■ Video output
m: Available
*6 Available when “Monitor Out Assign” (p.118) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” or “Zone3”
*7 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.118) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” or “Zone4”
*8 Not available in Zone3 when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.118) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”
Out
In
ZONE OUT jacks
HDMI OUT 2
(ZONE OUT) jack
Zone2 Zone3 Zone2 (*1) Zone4 (*2)
Digital audio (HDMI) m (*3) m (*3) m (*4)
Digital audio
(COAXIAL/OPTICAL)
m (*5) m (*5)
Analog audio
(AUDIO)
mmm
USB (including iPod) mmm
Network sources mmm
TUNER mmm
Out
In
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks (*6)
HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT)
jack (*7)
COMPONENT
VIDEO
S VIDEO VIDEO
Zone2/3 Zone2/3 Zone2/3 Zone2 Zone4
HDMI video mm
Component video m
S-video m
Composite video m
On-screen display
(browse/playback)
m (*8) m (*8) m (*8) m
APPENDIX ➤ Information on HDMI En 150
HDMI Control
HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that
supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as
power and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback
devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with
an HDMI cable.
For details on connections, see “Connecting a TV” (p.26) and “Connecting video
devices (such as BD/DVD players)” (p.32).
Operations available from the TV’s remote control
• Standby synchronization
• Volume control including mute
• Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner
• Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device
• Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker)
(Example)
Operations available from the unit’s remote control
• Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene
selection (p.53)
• Switching the TV input to display the on-screen menu (when ON SCREEN is pressed)
• Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) without registering
remote control codes (p.129)
(Example)
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after
connecting the TV and playback devices.
• This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system.
1
Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.
2
Enable HDMI Control on the unit, TV, and playback devices (such as
HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players).
To enable HDMI Control on the unit, set “HDMI Control” (p.113) in the “Setup”
menu to “On” and configure the related items (“TV Audio Input”, “ARC”, and
“Standby Sync”).
3
Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and
playback devices.
4
Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.
5
Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
6
Check the followings.
On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected.
If not, select the input source manually.
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.
Information on HDMI
HDMI Control
Turn off the TV
The unit turns off
(standby)
HDMI Control
Playback device
also turns off
HDMI Control
Press SCENE (BD/DVD)
Turns on and displays
video from the playback
device
HDMI Control
Playback starts
APPENDIX ➤ Information on HDMI En 151
7
Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning
off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.
• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 3 and plugging in the TV again in
Step 4. It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices
exceeds the limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use.
• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on
the TV.
• We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works
more effectively.
HDMI signal compatibility
Audio signals
Video signals
The unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions:
• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be output, depending
on the type of the DVD player.
• The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to the instruction
manual for each device.
• To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device
outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device).
For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback device.
Audio signal type Audio signal format Compatible media (example)
2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio
Multichannel Linear PCM 8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
DVD-Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc),
HD DVD
DSD 2 to 5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD
Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video
Bitstream
(High definition audio)
Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,
DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD
High Resolution Audio, DTS
Express
BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD
• VGA • 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
• 480i/60 Hz • 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
• 576i/50 Hz • 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
• 480p/60 Hz • 4K/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
• 576p/50 Hz
APPENDIX ➤ Reference diagram (rear panel) En 152
• The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections.
Reference diagram (rear panel)
(U.S.A. model)
APPENDIX ➤ Trademarks En 153
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic, Surround EX and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872;
7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS-HD, the
Symbol, & DTS-HD and the Symbol together are registered trademarks & DTS-HD Master Audio is a
trademark of DTS, Inc.
Product includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
“Made for iPod,” “Made for iPhone,” and “Made for iPad” mean that an electronic accessory has been
designed to connect specifically to iPod, iPhone, or iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the
developer to meet Apple performance standards.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards.
Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone, or iPad may affect wireless performance.
AirPlay, iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod nano, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S.
and other countries.
MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.
This receiver supports network connections.
HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents.
HD Radio™ and the HD, HD Radio, and “Arc” logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.
HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of
HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries.
MHL and the MHL logo are a trademark, registered trademark or service mark of MHL, LLC in the United
States and/or other countries.
x.v.Color™
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
DLNA™ and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of Digital Living Network
Alliance. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.
Windows™
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media Player are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Android™
Android is a trademark of Google Inc.
Rovi™
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Rovi
Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by
Rovi Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
Trademarks
APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 154
Input jacks
• Analog Audio
Audio (Unbalance) x 9 (AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–3, PHONO, V-AUX)
Audio (Balance) x 1 (AUDIO 4) (1:GHD, 2:HOT, 3:COLD)
MULTI CH INPUT x 1 (8 ch)
(FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,
SURROUND BACK L/R, SUBWOOFER)
• Digital Audio (Supported frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz)
Optical x 4 (AV 3–4, AUDIO 1, V-AUX)
Coaxial x 3 (AV 1–2, AUDIO 2)
•Video
Composite x 5 (AV 1–4, V-AUX)
S-video x 4 (AV 1–4)
Component x 4 (AV 1–4)
• HDMI Input
HDMI x 8 (AV 1–7, V-AUX*)
* V-AUX: MHL input compatible
•Others
USB x 1 (USB2.0)
NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T)
Output jacks
• Analog Audio
- Pre Out (Unbalance) x 11 (FRONT L/R, CENTER,
SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R, F.PRESENCE L/R,
R.PRESENCE L/R)
- Pre Out (Balance) x 11 (FRONT L/R, CENTER,
SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R, F.PRESENCE L/R,
R.PRESENCE L/R) (1:GND, 2: HOT, 3: COLD)
- Subwoofer Out x 2
(SUBWOOFER 1–2, Stereo/Front&Rear/Monox2)
- Audio x 1 (AV OUT)
- ZONE OUT x 2 (ZONE2/ZONE3)
• Digital Audio
Optical x 1 (AV OUT)
•Video
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
- Composite x 1
-S-video x 1
- Component x 1
AV OUT
- Composite x 1
-S-video x 1
• HDMI Output
HDMI OUT x 2 (HDMI OUT 1–2
*5
)
*5 barter to ZONE OUT (ZONE2/ZONE4)
Other jacks
• YPAO MIC x 1
• REMOTE IN x 2
• REMOTE OUT x 2
• TRIGGER OUT x 2
• RS-232C x 1
• DC OUT x 1
HDMI
• HDMI features: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lip Sync, ARC
(Audio Return Channel), 3D, Ultra HD (4K)
• Video Format (Repeater Mode)
-VGA
- 480i/60 Hz
- 576i/50 Hz
- 480p/60 Hz
- 576p/50 Hz
- 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
- 4K/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
• Audio Format
-Dolby TrueHD
- Dolby Digital Plus
- Dolby Digital
- DTS-HD Master Audio
- DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
- DTS Express
-DTS
- DSD 2-ch to 6-ch
- PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit)
• Content Protection: HDCP compatible
• Link Function: CEC supported
MHL
• Video Format (Repeater Mode)
-VGA
- 480i/60 Hz
- 576i/50 Hz
- 480p/60 Hz
- 576p/50 Hz
- 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080p/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
• Audio Format
- PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit)
• Current Supply Capacity: 1.0 A
TUNER
• Analog Tuner
[U.K. and Europe models]
FM/AM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER)
[Other models]
FM/AM x 1 (TUNER)
• HD Radio tuner [U.S.A. model] x 1 (TUNER)
Specifications
APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 155
USB
• Capable of iPod, Mass Storage Class USB Memory
• Current Supply Capacity: 2.1 A
Network
• PC Client Function
• Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5
• AirPlay supported
• Internet Radio
Compatible Decoding Formats
• Decoding Format
- Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus
- Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX
- DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,
DTS Express
- DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1
- DTS Digital Surround
• Post Decoding Format
- Dolby Pro Logic
- Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie,
Dolby Pro Logic II Game
- Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie,
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game
- DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema
Audio Section
• Rated Output Level/Impedance
(RCA Unbalance Preout)
Front L/R..............................................................1.0 V/470
Center..................................................................1.0 V/470
Surround L/R .......................................................1.0 V/470
Surround Back L/R ..............................................1.0 V/470
Front Presence L/R..............................................1.0 V/470
Rear Presence L/R ..............................................1.0 V/470
Subwoofer 1–2 ....................................................1.0 V/470
Zone2/Zone3 .......................................................1.0 V/470
(XLR Balance Preout)
Front L/R..............................................................2.0 V/470
Center..................................................................2.0 V/470
Surround L/R .......................................................2.0 V/470
Surround Back L/R ..............................................2.0 V/470
Front Presence L/R..............................................2.0 V/470
Rear Presence L/R ..............................................2.0 V/470
• Maximum Output Level (0.06%THD)
(RCA Unbalance Preout)
Front L/R ......................................................... 4.25 V or more
Center............................................................. 4.25 V or more
Surround L/R .................................................. 4.25 V or more
Surround Back L/R ......................................... 4.25 V or more
Front Presence L/R......................................... 4.25 V or more
Rear Presence L/R ......................................... 4.25 V or more
Subwoofer 1–2 ................................................. 6.8 V or more
Zone2/Zone3 .................................................. 4.25 V or more
(XLR Balance Preout)
Front L/R ........................................................... 8.5 V or more
Center............................................................... 8.5 V or more
Surround L/R .................................................... 8.5 V or more
Surround Back L/R ........................................... 8.5 V or more
Front Presence L/R........................................... 8.5 V or more
Rear Presence L/R ........................................... 8.5 V or more
• Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance
PHONO ............................................................... 3.5 mV/47 k
RCA Unbalance (Audio 2 etc.) .......................... 200 mV/47 k
XLR Balance (Audio 4)
Attenuator Off..................................................... 200 mV/47 k
Attenuator On..................................................... 400 mV/47 k
• Maximum Input Signal
PHONO ..............................................................60 mV or more
RCA Unbalance (Audio 2 etc.) ............................2.4 V or more
XLR Balance (Audio 4)
Attenuator Off.......................................................2.4 V or more
Attenuator On.......................................................4.8 V or more
• Output Level / Output Impedance
AV OUT ............................................................. 200 mV/1.2 k
HEADPHONE OUT............................................. 150 mV/100
• Frequency Response
AUDIO 2 etc. (10 Hz to 100 kHz)................................+0/-3 dB
• RIAA Equalization Deviation
PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) ......................................... 0±0.5 dB
• Total Harmonic Distortion
PHONO to AV OUT ............................................. 0.02% or less
MULTI CH INPUT to Preout (Pure Direct).......... 0.008% or less
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
PHONO to AV OUT (Input Shorted 5 mV)
[U.S.A., Canada, China and Taiwan models] .... 86 dB or more
[Other models]................................................... 81 dB or more
AUDIO 2 etc. to Preout (Balance/Unbalance)
(Pure Direct, Input Shorted 1 k, Analog Input)
......................................................................... 112 dB or more
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Preout (RCA Unbalance) .................................... 1.5 µV or less
Preout (XLR Balance)............................................. 3 µV or less
• Channel Separation
PHONO (Input Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz) ...60 dB/55 dB or more
AUDIO 2 etc. (Input 1 k Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)
.................................................................86 dB/68 dB or more
APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 156
• Maximum Gain (Volume: Maximum)
Main Zone Preout ............................................................14 dB
Zone2/Zone3 Preout ........................................................14 dB
• Volume Control
Main Zone.................MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)
Zone2/Zone3 ............MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)
• Tone Control Characteristics
Main Zone
Bass Boost/Cut.........................±6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step)
Bass Turnover............................................................. 350 Hz
Treble Boost/Cut ..................... ±6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step)
Treble Turnover .......................................................... 3.5 kHz
Zone2/Zone3
Bass Boost/Cut.............................±10 dB/50 Hz (2 dB Step)
Bass Turnover............................................................. 350 Hz
Treble Boost/Cut ...........................±10 dB/50 Hz (2 dB Step)
Treble Turnover .......................................................... 3.5 kHz
• Filter Characteristics
(fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back: Small)
..................................................................................12 dB/oct.
L.P.F. (Subwoofer).....................................................24 dB/oct.
Video Section
• Video Signal Type
[U.S.A., Canada, Taiwan and Korea models].................. NTSC
[Other models].................................................................... PAL
• Video Signal Type (Video Conversion) .....................NTSC/PAL
• Video Signal Level
Composite ............................................................. 1 Vp-p/75
S-video
Y.......................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75
C (NTSC) [U.S.A., Canada, Taiwan and Korea models]
..................................................................... 0.286 Vp-p/75
C (PAL) [Other models] ................................... 0.3 Vp-p/75
Component
Y.......................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75
Pb/Pr ................................................................ 0.7 Vp-p/75
• Video Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off)
.......................................................................1.5 Vp-p or more
• Signal to Noise Ratio (Video Conversion Off).....60 dB or more
• Monitor Out Frequency Response (Video Conversion Off)
Component (MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT)
........................................................... 5 Hz to 100 MHz, ±3 dB
FM Section
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............. 87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz
[Asia model] .................. 87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz
[Other models] ................................ 87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz
• 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.)
Mono .................................................................3 µV (20.8 dBf)
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono/Stereo [except U.S.A. model] .....................72 dB/70 dB
HD [U.S.A. model]........................................................... 80 dB
• Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz)
Mono/Stereo [except U.S.A. model] ....................... 0.3%/0.5%
HD [U.S.A. model]...........................................................0.03%
• Antenna Input................................................75 unbalanced
AM section
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .................. 530 kHz to 1710 kHz
[Asia model] ............................ 530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz
[Other models] ........................................ 531 kHz to 1611 kHz
General
• Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ..........................AC 120 V, 60 Hz
[Taiwan model] ................................AC 110 to 120 V, 50/60 Hz
[China model]..................................................AC 220 V, 50 Hz
[Korea model] .................................................AC 220 V, 60 Hz
[Australia model] .............................................AC 240 V, 50 Hz
[U.K. and Europe models] ..............................AC 230 V, 50 Hz
[Asia model] ....................................AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
• Power Consumption ..........................................................80 W
• Standby Power Consumption
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off ........... 0.3 W (Typical)
HDMI Control On, Standby Through On ........... 5.0 W (Typical)
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through On (AV 1, No Signals)
.......................................................................... 4.2 W (Typical)
Network Standby On......................................... 2.2 W (Typical)
• Dimensions (W x H x D)
......................435 x 192 x 448 mm (17-1/8” x 7-1/2” x 17-5/8”)
* Including legs and protrusions
• Weight ...........................................................13.6 kg (30.0 lbs)
* Specifications are subject to change without notice.
APPENDIX ➤ Index En 157
Symbols
Exclamation mark (!) 136
Lock icon (o) 121
Numerics
11.2-channel system 19
11ch Stereo (sound program) 58
16:9 Normal (Aspect, Setup menu) 112
2.1-channel system 21
2ch Stereo (sound program) 58
3.1-channel system 21
5.1-channel system 20
, 21
7.1-channel system 20
9.2-channel system 19
, 20
A
Access denied (error indication) 144
Access error (error indication) 144
Action Game (sound program) 57
Adaptive DRC (Option menu) 91
Adaptive DSP Level (Sound, Setup menu) 110
Adjustment (Lipsync, Setup menu) 110
Adjustment (Video Mode, Setup menu) 112
ADVANCED SETUP menu 124
Adventure (sound program) 57
AirPlay 80
Album (HD Radio™) 63
AM antenna connection 36
AM radio listening 61
Amp (Audio Output, Setup menu) 114
Analog to Analog Conversion
(Video, Setup menu) 111
Angle (YPAO measurement result) 48
Angle measurement (YPAO) 44
, 47
ARC (Audio Return Channel) 26
ARC (HDMI Control, Setup menu) 114
Arena (sound program) 58
Artist/Song (HD Radio™) 63
Aspect (Video Mode, Setup menu) 112
Audio Decoder (front display information) 89
Audio device connection 34
Audio file format (PC/NAS) 75
Audio file format (USB storage device) 72
AUDIO jack 22
Audio Mode (Option menu) 94
Audio Output (HDMI OUT2 Assign, Setup menu) 118
Audio Output (HDMI, Setup menu) 114
Audio program selection (HD Radio™) 63
Audio Return Channel (ARC) 26
Audio Select (Option menu) 93
Audio Signal (Information menu) 123
Auto Power Standby (ECO, Setup menu) 121
Auto Preset (FM radio) 67
Auto Preset (HD Radio™) 65
Auto Setup (Speaker, Setup menu) 41
Auto/Manual Select (Lipsync, Setup menu) 109
Automatic speaker setting optimization 41
Automatic station preset (FM radio) 67
Automatic station preset (HD Radio™) 65
AutoPowerStdby (ECO, Setup menu) 121
AV OUT jack 13
B
Backup/recovery of the settings 126
Balance Input Attenuator (Input menu) 97
Balanced connection (power amplifier) 24
Basic playback operation 52
Basic speaker configuration 19
Bass (Tone Control, Option menu) 91
Bitrate (Audio Signal, Information menu) 123
Bitstream 151
Brightness (Video Mode, Setup menu) 112
C
CAT-5 cable 37
Category (HD Radio™) 63
Cellar Club (sound program) 58
Center (Speaker, Setup menu) 106
Center Image (Sound Program menu) 102
Center Width (Sound Program menu) 102
Chamber (sound program) 58
Channel (Audio Signal, Information menu) 123
Channel indicator (front display) 12
Check Sur. (YPAO error message) 50
Church in Freiburg (sound program) 58
Church in Royaumont (sound program) 58
Church in Tokyo (sound program) 58
CINEMA DSP 3D (Option menu) 91
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (Option menu) 91
CINEMA DSP HD³ 56
CLASSICAL (sound program subcategory) 58
Clear Preset (FM/AM radio) 67
Clear Preset (HD Radio™) 65
Clearing (remote control) 134
Clock Time (Radio Data System) 65
COAXIAL jack 22
Component video cable 22
Component video connection (video device) 32
COMPONENT VIDEO jack 22
Composite video connection (video device) 33
Compressed Music Enhancer 60
Configuration (Speaker, Setup menu) 106
Contrast (Video Mode, Setup menu) 113
Crossover frequency setting (subwoofer) 41
D
DAC Digital Filter (Sound, Setup menu) 111
DC OUT (Function, Setup menu) 120
DC OUT jack 13
Decode Type (Sound Program menu) 101
Decoder Mode (Input menu) 96
Decoder Off (front display information) 89
Default Gateway (IP Address, Setup menu) 115
Default Gateway (Network, Information menu) 123
Index
APPENDIX ➤ Index En 158
Default setting restoration 126
Delay Enable (Lipsync, Setup menu) 109
Detail (Load, Scene menu) 99
Detail Enhancement (Video Mode, Setup menu) 112
Device Control (Load, Scene menu) 98
DHCP (IP Address, Setup menu) 115
Dialog Adjust (Option menu) 92
Dialog Lift (Dialog Adjust, Option menu) 92
Dialog Lvl (Dialog Adjust, Option menu) 92
Dialogue (Audio Signal, Information menu) 123
Dialogue Adjust (Option menu) 92
Dialogue Level (Dialogue Adjust, Option menu) 92
Dialogue Lift (Dialogue Adjust, Option menu) 92
Dialogue normalization level 123
Digital coaxial cable 22
Digital Media Controller (DMC) 97
Digital optical cable 22
Dimension (Sound Program menu) 102
Dimmer (Front Display) (Display Set, Setup menu) 119
Direct (Sound Program menu) 102
Direct Stream Digital (DSD) 145
Disco (sound program) 57
DISPLAY key 15
Display Set (Function, Setup menu) 119
Display window (remote control) 15
Distance (Speaker, Setup menu) 108
Distance (YPAO measurement result) 48
DLNA 75
DMC (Digital Media Controller) 97
DMC Control (Input menu) 97
DNS Server (IP Address, Setup menu) 115
DNS Server (Network, Information menu) 123
Dolby Digital EX (Extended Surround) 92
Dolby Pro Logic (surround decoder) 59
Dolby Pro Logic II Game (surround decoder) 59
Dolby Pro Logic II Movie (surround decoder) 59
Dolby Pro Logic II Music (surround decoder) 59
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game (surround decoder) 59
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie (Extended Surround) 92
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie (surround decoder) 59
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music (Extended Surround) 92
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music (surround decoder) 59
Drama (sound program) 57
DSD (Direct Stream Digital) 145
DSP Level (Sound Program menu) 101
DSP Program (front display information) 89
DTS Neo:6 Cinema (surround decoder) 59
DTS Neo:6 Music (surround decoder) 59
DTS-ES (Extended Surround) 92
Dynamic Range (Sound, Setup menu) 110
E
ECO (Setup menu) 121
Edge Enhancement (Video Mode, Setup menu) 112
Enhancer (Option menu) 93
ENHANCER (sound mode) 60
ENTERTAINMENT (sound program subcategory) 57
Erasing (remote control) 135
Error indication (front display) 144
EX/ES (Extended Surround, Option menu) 92
EXTD Surround (Option menu) 92
Extended Surround (Option menu) 92
External device control (remote control) 128
External device operation key (remote control) 15
Extra Bass (Speaker, Setup menu) 108
F
Filter (MAC Address Filter, Setup menu) 115
FIRM UPDATE (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 127
Firmware update 127
Firmware update (network) 127
, 136
Firmware update (USB) 127
Firmware Version (System, Information menu) 123
Firmware version check 127
FM antenna connection 36
FM Mode (Option menu) 94
FM radio listening 61
FM/AM radio tuning 61
Format (Audio Signal, Information menu) 123
Frequency (FM/AM radio) 61
Frequency step setting 61
, 125
Front (Speaker, Setup menu) 106
Front / Rear Balance (Sound Program menu) 102
Front display (part names and functions) 12
Front display brightness 119
Front display information 89
Front panel (part names and functions) 10
Front panel door (front panel) 10
Front panel jack connection 35
Front Presence (Speaker, Setup menu) 107
Function (Setup menu) 119
G
GND terminal 34
Ground lead 34
H
Hall in Amsterdam (sound program) 58
Hall in Frankfurt (sound program) 58
Hall in Munich A (sound program) 58
Hall in Munich B (sound program) 58
Hall in Stuttgart (sound program) 58
Hall in USA A (sound program) 58
Hall in USA B (sound program) 58
Hall in Vienna (sound program) 58
HD Radio™ information 63
HD Radio™ tuning 63
HDMI (Setup menu) 113
HDMI cable 22
HDMI connection (video device) 32
HDMI Control (HDMI, Setup menu) 113
HDMI jack 22
HDMI Monitor (Information menu) 123
HDMI OUT1 (Audio Output, Setup menu) 114
HDMI OUT2 (Audio Output, Setup menu) 114
HDMI OUT2 Assign (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 118
HDMI output selection 52
HDMI signal compatibility 151
Headphones 56
Height Balance (Sound Program menu) 102
High definition audio 151
High speed HDMI cable 22
APPENDIX ➤ Index En 159
Hi-Res Mode (Enhancer, Option menu) 93
Hold/Unhold (HD Radio™, Option menu) 64
I
In.Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 92
Indicator (part names and functions) 12
INFO key 11
, 16
Information display (front display) 12
Information menu 122
Information switching (front display) 89
Initial Delay (Sound Program menu) 101
Initial Volume (Sound, Setup menu) 110
Initial Volume (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 117
Initial Volume (Zone3 Set, Setup menu) 117
INITIALIZE (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 126
Input (Audio Signal, Information menu) 123
Input Assignment (Function, Setup menu) 119
Input jack assignment 119
Input menu 95
Input selection key (remote control) 15
Input Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 92
Internal Error (error indication) 144
Internal Error (YPAO error message) 50
Internet radio listening 78
IP Address (Network, Information menu) 123
IP Address (Network, Setup menu) 115
iPod charge 68
iPod connection 68
iPod content playback 69
iPod content playback (AirPlay) 80
iTunes content playback (AirPlay) 80
L
Language (Setup menu) 122
Learning (remote control) 130
Left / Right Balance (Sound Program menu) 102
Level (Sound Program menu) 102
Level (Speaker, Setup menu) 108
Level (YPAO measurement result) 48
Level Error (YPAO warning message) 51
LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 146
LIGHT key 15
Lipsync 146
Lipsync (Sound, Setup menu) 109
LIVE/CLUB (sound program subcategory) 58
Liveness (Sound Program menu) 101
Load (Scene menu) 98
Low Frequency Effects (LFE) 146
M
MAC Address (MAC Address Filter, Setup menu) 115
MAC Address (Network, Information menu) 123
MAC Address Filter (Network, Setup menu) 115
Macro (remote control) 132
Main Zone Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 116
Manual Setup (Speaker, Setup menu) 106
Manual speaker configuration 106
Manual station preset (FM/AM radio) 62
Max Volume (Sound, Setup menu) 110
Max Volume (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 117
Max Volume (Zone3 Set, Setup menu) 117
Measurement result (YPAO) 48
Media sharing setup 75
Memory Guard (Function, Setup menu) 121
Menu language selection 40
Menu operation key (front panel) 11
Menu operation key (remote control) 15
MHL cable 22
MHL connection 35
MHL jack 22
MHL Overloaded (error indication) 144
MHL-compatible mobile device 35
Microphone base 44
, 47
MODE key 15
Monaural Mix (Sound Program menu) 102
Monaural reception (FM radio) 61
Monaural reception (FM/AM radio) 61
Monitor check 126
MONITOR CHECK (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 126
Monitor Out Assign (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 118
Mono (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 117
Mono (Zone3 Set, Setup menu) 117
Mono Movie (sound program) 57
MOVIE (sound program category) 57
MOVIE THEATER (sound program subcategory) 57
MULTI CH INPUT jack 14
Multi measurement (YPAO) 46
Multi Zone (Information menu) 123
Multi Zone (Setup menu) 116
Multi-channel analog connection 38
Multiple room playback 82
Multi-zone 82
Multi-zone output 149
MUSIC (sound program category) 58
Music Video (sound program) 57
MUTE key 15
Muting 52
N
NAS (Network Attached Storage) 37
NAS connection 37
NAS content playback 75
Network (Information menu) 123
Network (Setup menu) 115
Network Attached Storage (NAS) 37
Network cable 37
Network connection 37
Network information 123
Network Name (Network, Information menu) 123
Network Name (Network, Setup menu) 116
Network Standby (Network, Setup menu) 115
No content (error indication) 144
No device (error indication) 144
No F.PRNS SP (YPAO error message) 50
No Front SP (YPAO error message) 50
No MIC (YPAO error message) 50
No R.PRNS SP (YPAO error message) 50
No Signal (YPAO error message) 50
No Sur. SP (YPAO error message) 50
Noisy (YPAO error message) 50
Normal (Wiring, YPAO measurement result) 48
APPENDIX ➤ Index En 160
NTSC (TV FORMAT, ADVANCED SETUP menu) 125
Numeric key (remote control) 16
O
ON SCREEN key 15
OPTICAL jack 22
OPTION key 15
Option menu 90
Out of Phase (YPAO warning message) 51
Output (Audio Signal, Information menu) 123
Over Distance (YPAO warning message) 51
P
PAL (TV FORMAT, ADVANCED SETUP menu) 125
Panorama (Sound Program menu) 102
Parametric EQ (Speaker, Setup menu) 108
PARTY key 16
Party mode 88
Party Mode Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 118
Pavilion (sound program) 57
PC connection 37
PC content playback 75
PHONES jack 11
PHONO jack 13
Playback device connection 32
Playback device operation (remote control) 130
Please wait (error indication) 144
Power amplifier connection 24
Power cable connection 39
Power management 121
Power Mode (DC OUT, Setup menu) 120
PRE OUT (RCA) jack 14
PRE OUT (XLR) jack 14
Preset station selection (FM/AM radio) 62
Program Service (Radio Data System) 65
Program Type (Radio Data System) 65
Pure Direct 60
PURE DIRECT (sound mode) 60
Pure Direct Mode (Sound, Setup menu) 110
Q
Q factor 109
R
Radio Data System (FM radio) 65
Radio Data System information 65
Radio Data System tuning 65
Radio Text (Radio Data System) 65
Rear panel (part names and functions) 13
Rear Presence (Speaker, Setup menu) 107
Recital/Opera (sound program) 57
Recording device connection 38
RECOV./BACKUP (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 126
RemID Mismatch (error indication) 144
REMOTE CON AMP (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 125
Remote connection 86
Remote control (part names and functions) 15
Remote control code registration
(playback device) 129
Remote control code registration (TV) 128
Remote Control Code Search 128
, 129
Remote control ID setting 125
Remote control ID setting (remote control) 125
Remote control sensor 10
Remote control sensor setting 124
Remote control signal transmitter (remote control) 15
Remote ID (System, Information menu) 123
REMOTE IN jack 13
Remote Off (error indication) 144
REMOTE OUT jack 13
REMOTE SENSOR (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 124
Rename (device name on the remote control) 131
Rename (input name) 96
Rename (network name) 116
Rename (scene name) 99
Rename/Icon Select (Input menu) 96
Rename/Icon Select (Scene menu) 99
Repeat (iPod, Option menu) 71
Repeat (PC/NAS, Option menu) 77
Repeat (USB storage device, Option menu) 74
Reset (remote control) 134
Reset (Scene menu) 99
Resolution (Video Mode, Setup menu) 112
Reverb Delay (Sound Program menu) 101
Reverb Level (Sound Program menu) 101
Reverb Time (Sound Program menu) 101
Reverse (Wiring, YPAO measurement result) 48
Roleplaying Game (sound program) 57
Room Size (Sound Program menu) 101
Router connection 37
S
S VIDEO jack 22
Sampling (Audio Signal, Information menu) 123
Saturation (Video Mode, Setup menu) 113
Save (Scene menu) 98
SBR → SBL (YPAO error message) 50
Scene configuration 54
SCENE function 53
SCENE link playback 54
Scene menu 97
Sci-Fi (sound program) 57
Setting Data Copy (Speaker, Setup menu) 106
Setting Pattern (Speaker, Setup menu) 106
Setup menu 103
Short Message (Display Set, Setup menu) 119
Shuffle (iPod, Option menu) 71
Shuffle (PC/NAS. Option menu) 77
Shuffle (USB storage device, Option menu) 74
Signal information 123
SILENT CINEMA 56
Simple play (iPod) 70
Single measurement (YPAO) 44
Size (YPAO measurement result) 48
SLEEP key 16
Sleep timer 16
Sleep timer (Zone2/Zone3/Zone4) 88
Sound (Setup menu) 109
Sound field effect 56
Sound mode selection 55
APPENDIX ➤ Index En 161
Sound program 57, 58
Sound Program menu 100
Speaker (Setup menu) 106
Speaker placement 18
Spectacle (sound program) 57
Sports (sound program) 57
Standard (sound program) 57
Standby indicator (front panel) 10
Standby Sync (HDMI Control, Setup menu) 114
Standby Through (HDMI, Setup menu) 114
Station Info (HD Radio™) 63
Station preset (FM/AM radio) 62
Status (Network, Information menu) 123
STEREO (sound program subcategory) 58
Stereo pin cable (RCA unbalanced cable) 22
Stereo reception (FM radio) 61
Stereo reception (FM/AM radio) 61
STP network cable 37
STRAIGHT (sound mode) 59
Straight decode 59
Subnet Mask (IP Address, Setup menu) 115
Subnet Mask (Network, Information menu) 123
Subwoofer 1 (Speaker, Setup menu) 107
Subwoofer 2 (Speaker, Setup menu) 107
Subwoofer connection 25
Subwoofer Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 93
SUR.DECODE (sound mode) 59
Surround (Speaker, Setup menu) 107
Surround Back (Speaker, Setup menu) 107
Surround Back Initial Delay
(Sound Program menu) 101
Surround Back Liveness (Sound Program menu) 101
Surround Back Room Size
(Sound Program menu) 101
Surround decoder 59
Surround Initial Delay (Sound Program menu) 101
Surround Liveness (Sound Program menu) 101
Surround Room Size (Sound Program menu) 101
S-video cable 22
S-video connection (video device) 33
SW.Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 93
SWFR Layout (Speaker, Setup menu) 108
System (Information menu) 123
System ID (System, Information menu) 123
T
Target Zone (Trigger Output, Setup menu) 120
Test Tone (Speaker, Setup menu) 109
The Bottom Line (sound program) 58
The Roxy Theatre (sound program) 58
Tone Control (Option menu) 91
TONE/BALANCE key 11
TP (Traffic Program) 66
Traffic information (Radio Data System) 66
Traffic Program (FM radio, Option menu) 66
Treble (Tone Control, Option menu) 91
Trigger function 39
Trigger Mode (Trigger Output, Setup menu) 120
TRIGGER OUT jack 13
Trigger Output1 (Function, Setup menu) 120
Trigger Output2 (Function, Setup menu) 120
Tuner Freq. Step (System, Information menu) 123
TUNER FRQ STEP (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 125
Turntable connection 34
TV Audio Input (HDMI Control, Setup menu) 113
TV connection 26
TV connection (ARC-compatible TV) 26
TV connection (HDMI Control-compatible TV) 28
TV connection (TV with HDMI input jacks) 29
TV connection (TV without HDMI input jacks) 30
TV FORMAT (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 125
TV Format (System, Information menu) 123
TV operation (remote control) 129
TV operation key (remote control) 15
U
Ultra HD (4K) 151
Unable to play (error indication) 144
Unbalanced connection (power amplifier) 25
USB jack 11
USB mass storage class device 72
USB Overloaded (error indication) 144
USB storage device connection 72
USB storage device content playback 72
User Cancel (YPAO error message) 50
V
VERSION (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 127
Version error (error indication) 144
Video (Setup menu) 111
Video Adjust (Option menu) 93
Video Adjustment (Option menu) 93
VIDEO AUX jack 11
Video device connection 32
VIDEO jack 22
Video Mode (Option menu) 93
Video Mode (Video, Setup menu) 111
Video Out (Input menu) 96
Video pin cable 22
Video Signal (Information menu) 123
Video signal flow 148
Video signal type setting 125
Village Gate (sound program) 58
Village Vanguard (sound program) 58
Virtual CINEMA DSP 56
Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) 56
Volume (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 117
Volume (Zone3 Set, Setup menu) 117
Volume Interlock (Input menu) 96
Volume Trim (Option menu) 92
VPS (Sound, Setup menu) 111
VPS (Virtual Presence Speaker) 56
W
Wallpaper (Display Set, Setup menu) 119
Warehouse Loft (sound program) 58
Wiring (YPAO measurement result) 48
X
XLR balanced cable 23
XLR jack 23
APPENDIX ➤ Index En 162
Y
Yamaha Parametric room
Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) 41
YPAO
(Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer) 41
YPAO error message 50
YPAO MIC jack 11
YPAO microphone 41
YPAO warning message 51
Z
Zone Rename (Main Zone Set, Setup menu) 116
Zone Rename (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 117
Zone Rename (Zone3 Set, Setup menu) 117
Zone Rename (Zone4 Set, Setup menu) 118
Zone Scene Rename (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 117
Zone Scene Rename (Zone3 Set, Setup menu) 117
Zone Scene Rename (Zone4 Set, Setup menu) 118
Zone2 Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 117
Zone3 Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 117
Zone4 Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 118
© 2013 Yamaha Corporation YF484A0/EN
Transcripción de documentos
AV Pre-Amplifier Owner’s Manual Read the supplied booklet “Safety Brochure” before using the unit. English CONTENTS Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 FEATURES 6 What you can do with the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 8 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 9 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) . . . . . . . . . 41 Measuring at one listening position (single measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Part names and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Checking the measurement results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Front display (indicators) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 PREPARATIONS 17 PLAYBACK 52 Basic playback procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 General setup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Selecting an HDMI output jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 1 Placing speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Basic speaker configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Input/output jacks and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Configuring scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Selecting setting items to be included as scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 2 Connecting the power amplifier and subwoofers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Connecting a power amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Connecting subwoofers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Selecting the sound mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP HD3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Enjoying unprocessed playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 3 Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 4 Connecting playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Listening to FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Setting the frequency steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Connecting to the jacks on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Selecting a frequency for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Registering favorite radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 6 Connecting to a network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Radio Data System tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 7 Connecting other devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Operating the radio on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 HD Radio™ tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Connecting recording devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Playing back iPod music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Connecting a device with analog multi-channel output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Playback of iPod content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 En 2 Playing back music stored on a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Connecting a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Multi Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 Playback of USB storage device contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 Media sharing setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Playback of PC music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) . . . . . . . . . 122 Listening to Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Types of information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) . . . . . . 124 ADVANCED SETUP menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 Turning on/off the remote control sensor (REMOTE SENSOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) . . . . . . . . . 82 Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE CON AMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 Multi-zone configuration examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TUNER FRQ STEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 Preparing the multi zone system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 Controlling Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MONITOR CHECK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126 Viewing the current status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126 Switching information on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126 Viewing the status information on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Updating the firmware (FIRM UPDATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127 Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Controlling external devices with the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Option menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Registering remote control codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 Checking the firmware version (VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127 Programming from other remote controls (learning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 CONFIGURATIONS 95 Configuring input sources (Input menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Input menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Scene menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Editing device names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Operating multiple functions at once (macro) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 Resetting the remote control configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 Updating the unit’s firmware via the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 APPENDIX 137 Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Sound Program menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Configuring various functions (Setup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Power, system and remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 Setup menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Speaker (Manual Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141 FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 USB and network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 En 3 Error indications on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Audio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 HDMI and video information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Yamaha technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Video signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Multi-zone output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Information on HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 HDMI signal compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Reference diagram (rear panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 En 4 Accessories Operating range of the remote control Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product. • Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the operating range shown below. Remote control Batteries (x4) Within 6 m (20 ft) 30° AAA, LR03, UM-4 AM antenna 30° Insert the batteries the right way round. FM antenna *One of the above is supplied depending on the region of purchase. YPAO microphone Microphone base *Using for angle measurement during YPAO. CD-ROM (Owner’s Manual) Setup Guide Power cable • The illustrations of the main unit used in this manual are of the U.S.A. model, unless otherwise specified. *The supplied power cable varies depending on the region of purchase. Safety Brochure • Some features are not available in certain regions. • Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice. • This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control. • This manual describes all the “iPod”, “iPhone” and “iPad” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to “iPod”, “iPhone” and “iPad”, unless otherwise specified. • indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations. • indicates supplementary explanations for better use. Accessories En 5 FEATURES What you can do with the unit Wide variety of supported content • iPod/iPhone/iPad . p.68 • USB . p.72 • Media server (PC/NAS) . p.75 • Internet radio . p.78 • AirPlay . p.80 Supports 2- to 11-channel pre-out and up to 2 subwoofer connections. Allows you to enjoy favorite acoustic spaces in various styles. • Automatically optimizing the speaker . p.41 settings to suit your room (YPAO) • Reproducing stereo or multichannel . p.56 sounds with the sound fields like actual movie theaters and concert halls (CINEMA DSP) • Enjoying compressed music with . p.60 enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) Control Network contents Speakers iPod/iPhone/iPad Audio Audio (via power amplifier) USB device HDMI Control 3D and Ultra HD (4K) signals supported Audio HDMI Control Audio/Video Audio/Video TV BD/DVD player Control AV receiver (the unit) Audio/Video (via HDMI/MHL) Smartphone/Tablet Sequential operation of a TV, AV receiver, and BD/DVD player (HDMI Control) Change the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) . p.53 TV remote control . p.150 FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit En 6 Full of useful functions! Useful tips ❑ Connecting various devices (p.32) ❑ Listening to FM/AM radio (p.61) A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks on the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players), audio devices (such as CD players), game consoles, camcorders, and other devices. The unit is equipped with a built-in FM/AM tuner. You can register up to 40 favorite radio stations as presets. BD/DVD player Set-top box Game console Camcorder ❑ Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (p.60) ❑ Playing back TV audio in surround sound with a single HDMI cable connection (Audio Return Channel: ARC) (p.26) When using an ARC-compatible TV, you only need one HDMI cable to enable video output to the TV, audio input from the TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control signals. HDMI Control TV audio Video from external device ❑ Easy operation and wireless music playback from iPhone or Android device By using the application for smartphone/tablet “AV CONTROLLER”, you can control the unit from an iPhone, iPad, iPod touch or Android devices. Visit the Yamaha website for details. Use “Audio Select” in the “Option” menu to specify the type of an audio input jack to be used for the corresponding input source (p.93). When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays back the selected source with the least circuitry, which lets you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality. Video and audio are not synchronized... ❑ Easy operation with a TV screen I want to hear audio from the TV speakers... You can navigate through different types of content (such as iPod, USB, and network), view information, or easily configure the settings using the on-screen menu. TV I want to connect a playback device using HDMI for video and non-HDMI for audio... ❑ Controlling other Yamaha products in conjunction with operating the unit (p.39) The trigger function enables you to control other Yamaha products (such as power amplifiers and subwoofers) in conjunction with operating the unit. Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay between video and audio output (p.109). Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to select the output destination of signals input into the unit (p.114). Your TV speakers may be selected as an output destination. I want to change the on-screen menu language... Use “Language” in the “Setup” menu to select a language from English, Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese (p.40). I want to update the firmware... You can select the digital filter type of the audio DAC (digital-to-analog converter) to have favorite sounds. Use “FIRM UPDATE” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to update the unit’s firmware (p.127). If the unit is connected to the Internet, a message will be displayed on the TV when a firmware update is available (p.136). ❑ Operating external devices with the supplied remote control (p.128) Many other settings are available that let you to customize the unit. For details, see the following pages. You can operate external devices with the supplied remote control by registering the remote control codes of the external devices (such as a TV and BD/DVD players). • Input settings (p.95) ❑ DAC Digital Filter (p.111) ❑ Backlight illumination remote control The backlight illumination allows you to easily operate the remote control even in a dark home theater room. • SCENE settings (p.98) • Sound program and surround decoder settings (p.101) • Various function settings (p.104) • Information view (such as audio signal and video signal) (p.123) • System settings (p.124) FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit En 7 CINEMA DSP The excitement of a concert hall and the powerful sense of being inside a movie - we all want to enjoy these experiences in our own living room. Yamaha has pursued the fulfillment of these desires for more than 20 years, and this fulfillment has now taken shape as the Yamaha AV receivers. What is a sound field? CINEMA DSP HD3 We perceive sound from a voice or an instrument not only as the sounds that are heard directly but also as the “reflected” or “reverberant” sound that has been reflected by the walls or ceiling of the building. The character of the reflected and reverberant sound is affected by the shape, size, and material of the building, and all of these sounds taken together are what give us the auditory sensation of being in that specific place. Yamaha has accumulated a massive amount of acoustical data by analyzing the actual sound fields of concert halls and performance spaces around the world. “CINEMA DSP” allows this data to be applied to create sound fields. This unit contains a wide variety of sound programs using CINEMA DSP. Conceptual diagram of a concert hall's sound field Conceptual diagram of a sound field created by the unit “CINEMA DSP HD³” is Yamaha's flagship 3D sound field playback technology that takes full advantage of the massive amount of acoustic reflection data included in the sound field data. With support for rear presence speaker output, it delivers more than twice as much capability for generating acoustic reflections as conventional CINEMA DSP 3D, in addition to high-frequency playback capability, delivering an utterly natural and powerful spatial sound field. Capability for reproducing reflections (when the sound program “Hall in Munich” is selected) Level This unique acoustical character of a specific space is what we call the “sound field”. By selecting a sound program that is appropriate to the content of the playback source such as movies, music, or games, you can maximize the acoustical effectiveness of that specific content. (For example, a sound program designed for movies can give you the sensation of actually being in that scene.) In addition, the “CINEMA DSP 3D” function uses 3-dimensional sound field data that includes the axis of height, generating an even more realistic sound field with a spatial sense. CINEMA DSP HD³ CINEMA DSP 3D Time Optimizing speaker settings for the environment (YPAO) The included YPAO microphone can be used to analyze the environment so that this information can be used to automatically adjust various settings for the speakers and the sound field. This allows the distinctive character of the content you are hearing to be maximized, and optimizes the effectiveness of Yamaha's sound field generating technology for your specific listening environment. YPAO-R.S.C. In rooms that have not been designed or constructed with acoustics in mind, reflections from the walls or ceiling can cause problems such as a blurred low-frequency range or a smearing of the acoustical image. “YPAO-R.S.C.” is technology that reduces only the unwanted reflections that can be difficult to avoid in a typical home. This corrects the tonal changes and inconsistencies in the sound field that can occur due to speaker placement, thus creating a listening environment comparable to that of a room specifically designed for acoustic perfection. Level Compensation Time Angle measurement The direction (angle) of the front speakers, surround speakers, and presence speakers as seen from the listening position is measured, and compensation is applied to the sound field in Microphone base order to maximize the effectiveness of the CINEMA DSP sound field. FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit En 8 Unrivaled audio and video quality Expandable to meet diverse needs High-resolution music enhancer The best expandability in Yamaha Multi-zone function Hi-bit high-sampling extension up to 96 kHz / 24-bit can be applied to lossless 44.1/48 kHz content such as from a CD (2-channel PCM) or a FLAC file for further heightening of the musicality in the original content (p.93) By connecting a power amplifier, you can enjoy the highest peak of CINEMA DSP - an 11.2-channel 3-dimensional sound field. The multi-zone function (p.82) allows you to play back different input sources in the room where the unit is installed (main zone) and in other rooms (such as Zone2). Power amplifier Loudness Before processing (The following shows examples of use.) Enjoying music using speakers in another room Playback bandwidth of a 44.1/48 kHz signal (such as a CD) While enjoying multi-channel playback in your living room, you can listen to music through the speakers of a different room. Frequency After processing Study room (such as Zone2) Loudness Playback bandwidth of a 88.2/96 kHz signal Living room (main zone) Enjoying videos using a TV in another room (HDMI connection) Frequency High-quality video processing From low-quality digital video to BD (Blu-ray disc) images, any content can be played back as a high-quality image (p.111). • Flexible connectivity (ready for balanced and unbalanced connections) While enjoying multi-channel playback in your living room, you can enjoy videos and music being input via HDMI on a TV in a different room. • High-quality audio transmission (XLR balanced pre-out) • XLR balanced input jacks for connecting a high-end CD player • Motion adaptive and edge adaptive deinterlacing • Multi-cadence (including 3-2 pull-down) detection Kitchen (such as Zone4) • Up to 6 presets that can be applied separately to each input source You can also apply fine touches such as detail enhancement and edge enhancement. Living room (main zone) FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit En 9 Part names and functions Front panel 1 2 6 1 MAIN ZONE z key Turns on/off (standby) the unit. 2 Standby indicator Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the following conditions. • HDMI Control is enabled (p.113) • Standby Through is enabled (p.114) • Network Standby is enabled (p.115) • An iPod is being charged (p.68) 3 7 7 Front panel door For protecting controls and jacks (p.11). 8 VOLUME knob Adjusts the volume. 4 5 8 Opening the front panel door • To use controls or jacks behind the front panel door, gently press the bottom of the door to open it. Keep the door closed when not using controls or jacks behind the front panel door. (Be careful not to trap your fingers.) 3 Front display Displays information (p.12). 4 Remote control sensor Receives remote control signals (p.5). 5 PURE DIRECT key Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.60). 6 INPUT knob Selects an input source. FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 10 ■ Inside of the front panel door 9 0 M 9 ON SCREEN key Displays the on-screen menu on the TV. 0 Menu operations keys Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter. ENTER Confirms a selected item. RETURN Returns to the previous screen. A OPTION key Displays the option menu (p.90). B DISPLAY key Displays status information on the TV (p.89). C TONE/BALANCE key Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range of output sounds (p.91). Adjusts the right/left channel volume balance for Zone2 or Zone3 (p.88). D STRAIGHT key Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.59). E PROGRAM keys Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.55). F SCENE keys Select the registered input source, sound program, and various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in standby mode (p.53). AB C N DE F O GH IJ ZONE CONTROL L P G MULTI ZONE keys ZONE 2–4 K Enables/disables the audio output to each zone (p.87). Changes the zone that is controlled by the keys and knobs on the front panel (p.87). P VIDEO AUX jacks For connecting a device, such as a camcorder and a game console (p.35, 36) or a smartphone (p.35). H INFO key Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.89). I MEMORY key Registers FM/AM radio stations as preset stations (p.62). J FM and AM keys Switch between FM and AM (p.61). K PRESET keys Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.62). L TUNING keys Select the radio frequency (p.61). M USB jack For connecting a USB storage device (p.72) or an iPod (p.68). N YPAO MIC jack For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.41). O PHONES jack For connecting headphones. FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 11 Front display (indicators) 1 2 3 5 4 HD STEREO TUNED PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 9 0 6 PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR A B Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output. IN Lights up when HDMI signals are being input. OUT1/OUT2 Indicates the HDMI OUT jacks currently outputting an HDMI signal. 2 STEREO Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal. TUNED Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station signal. HD (U.S.A. model only) Lights up when the unit is receiving an HD Radio station signal. 3 ZONE indicators Lights up when Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 is enabled (p.87). 4 PARTY Lights up when the unit is in the party mode. (p.88) 8 MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC 3 1 HDMI 7 B 5 Information display Displays the current status (such as input name and sound mode name). You can switch the information by pressing INFO (p.89). 6 MUTE Blinks when audio is muted. 7 Volume indicator Indicates the current volume. 8 ADAPTIVE DRC Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.91) is working. 9 ENHANCER Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.60) is working. 0 CINEMA DSP indicator (U.S.A. model) C C Channel indicators Indicate channels (PRE OUT jacks) from which signals are output. A Front (L) S Front (R) D Center F Surround (L) G Surround (R) H Surround back (L) J Surround back (R) K Surround back Z Front/rear presence (L) X Front/rear presence (R) C Subwoofer (1) V Subwoofer (2) “CINEMA DSP HD” lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.56) is working. “CINEMA DSP !” lights up when CINEMA DSP HD³ is activated. A SLEEP Lights up when the sleep timer is on. B Cursor indicators Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational. FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 12 Rear panel 1 2 3 456 7 89 0 A B C D (U.S.A. model) DC OUT 5V 0.5A NETWORK 1 AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 (1 BD/DVD) AV 2 AV 3 RS-232C AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7 (1 BD/DVD) (ZONE OUT) MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT AV OUT AV 1 2 ARC PHONO HDMI HDMI OUT ( 3 NET ) Y PB COMPONENT VIDEO PR Y AV 3 PB C TRIGGER OUT PR AV 1 A Y GND MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT PB PR 1 REMOTE IN OUT (SINGLE) (FRONT) 1 2 IN OUT AV 2 2 B D AV 4 AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 (2 TV) L MULTI CH INPUT AUDIO 3 CENTER 12V ZONE OUT PRE OUT 0.1A 1 L R 2 R 1 COAXIAL 2 COAXIAL 3 OPTICAL 4 OPTICAL 5 OPTICAL FRONT 6 COAXIAL SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER ZONE 2 ZONE 3 FRONT SURROUND SURROUND BACK (REAR) SUBWOOFER CENTER FRONT PRESENCE REAR PRESENCE ANTENNA HD Radio AC IN (4 RADIO) 75Ω FM PRE OUT AUDIO 4 R AM L R REAR PRESENCE R FRONT PRESENCE R SURROUND BACK R SURROUND R FRONT CENTER L FRONT L SURROUND L SURROUND BACK L FRONT PRESENCE L REAR PRESENCE * The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections. 1 PHONO jacks For connecting to a turntable (p.34). 2 DC OUT jack For connecting to an optional accessory. 3 NETWORK jack For connecting to a network (p.37). 4 AV 1–4 jacks For connecting to video/audio playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.32). 5 AV OUT jacks For outputting video/audio to a recording device (such as a VCR) (p.38). 6 MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT (composite video/S-video) jacks 7 HDMI OUT 1 jack For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting video/audio signals (p.26). When using ARC, TV audio signal can also be input through the HDMI OUT 1 jack. 8 HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting video/audio signals (p.31), or for connecting to an HDMI-compatible device used in Zone2 or Zone4 (p.85). 9 COMPONENT VIDEO (AV 1–4) jacks For connecting to video playback devices that support component video and inputting video signals (p.32). 0 HDMI (AV 1–7) jacks For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.32). A MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT (component video) jacks For connecting to a TV that supports component video and outputting video signals (p.30) or for connecting to a zone video monitor used in Zone2 or Zone3 (p.84). B REMOTE IN/OUT 1–2 jacks For connecting to an infrared signal receiver/emitter that allows you to operate the unit and other devices from another room (p.86). C TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks For connecting to devices that support the trigger function (p.39). D RS-232C terminal This is a control expansion terminal for custom installation. Consult your dealer for details. For connecting to a TV that supports composite video or S-video and outputting video signals (p.30) or for connecting to a zone video monitor used in Zone2 or Zone3 (p.84). FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 13 (U.S.A. model) DC OUT 5V 0.5A NETWORK 1 AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 (1 BD/DVD) AV 2 AV 3 RS-232C AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7 (1 BD/DVD) (ZONE OUT) MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT AV OUT AV 1 2 ARC PHONO HDMI HDMI OUT ( 3 NET ) Y PB COMPONENT VIDEO PR Y AV 3 PB C TRIGGER OUT PR AV 1 A Y GND MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT PB PR 1 REMOTE IN OUT (SINGLE) (FRONT) 1 2 IN OUT AV 2 2 B D AV 4 AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 (2 TV) L MULTI CH INPUT AUDIO 3 CENTER 12V ZONE OUT PRE OUT 0.1A 1 L R 2 R 1 COAXIAL 2 COAXIAL 3 OPTICAL 4 OPTICAL 5 OPTICAL FRONT 6 COAXIAL SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER ZONE 2 ZONE 3 FRONT SURROUND SURROUND BACK (REAR) SUBWOOFER FRONT PRESENCE CENTER REAR PRESENCE ANTENNA HD Radio AC IN (4 RADIO) 75Ω FM PRE OUT AUDIO 4 R AM L R REAR PRESENCE R FRONT PRESENCE R SURROUND BACK R SURROUND R FRONT CENTER L FRONT L SURROUND L SURROUND BACK L FRONT PRESENCE L REAR PRESENCE * The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections. E E AUDIO 1–3 jacks For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting audio signals (p.34). F AUDIO 4 (XLR) jacks For connecting to an audio playback device and inputting audio signals (p.34). G ANTENNA jacks F G H I J H MULTI CH INPUT jacks For connecting to a device that supports multi-channel output and inputting audio signals (p.38). I ZONE OUT jacks For connecting to an external amplifier used in Zone2 or Zone3 and outputting audio (p.83). K L J PRE OUT (RCA) jacks For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (p.25) or to a power amplifier (p.25). K PRE OUT (XLR) jacks For connecting to a power amplifier (p.24). L AC IN jack For connecting the supplied power cable (p.39). For connecting to FM and AM antennas (p.36). FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 14 Remote control 1 Remote control signal transmitter 1 Transmits infrared signals. 2 2 SOURCE z key SOURCE RECEIVER Turns on/off an external device. SOURCE/RECEIVER key 3 Changes the device (the unit or external device) that is operated with the remote control (p.130). You can operate the unit when this key lights up in orange, and an external device when this key lights up in green. AV 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] 1 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE 3 Display window Displays remote control information. 4 Input selection keys 4 VOLUME C D TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN 9 E F ENTER RETURN : Turns on/off (standby) the unit. SCENE 7 8 RECEIVER z key AUDIO DISPLAY G 5 SCENE keys MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT B TV VOL MUTE Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter. ENTER Confirms a selected item. RETURN Returns to the previous screen. 0 MODE key Switches the iPod operation modes (p.70). (U.S.A. model only) Selects an HD Radio audio program (p.63). A PRESET keys Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.62). B TV operation keys Let you select TV input and volume, and perform other TV operations (p.129). C VOLUME keys Adjust the volume. D MUTE key Mutes the audio output. E OPTION key Displays the option menu (p.90). F LIGHT key Turns on the backlight of the remote control keys for about 10 seconds. G DISPLAY key Displays status information on the TV (p.89). H Sound mode keys Select a sound mode (p.55). Select the registered input source, sound program, and various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in standby mode (p.53). 7 A Select an input source for playback. AV 1–7 AV 1–7 jacks V-AUX VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel) AUDIO 1–4 AUDIO 1–4 jacks PHONO PHONO jacks MULTI MULTI CH INPUT jacks USB USB jack (on the front panel) NET NETWORK jack (press repeatedly to select a desired network source) TUNER FM/AM radio [A], [B], [C] Change the external device to operate with the remote control without switching the input source. 9 Menu operation keys TV CH H 6 PROGRAM keys Select a sound program (p.55). 7 External device operation keys Let you play back and perform other operations for external devices (p.130). 8 ON SCREEN key Displays the on-screen menu on the TV. FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 15 ■ Inside of the remote control cover I Sound mode keys Select a sound mode (p.55). SOURCE RECEIVER J INFO key Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.89). K Numeric keys AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] Let you enter numerical values, such as radio frequencies. L ZONE key Changes the zone that is controlled by the remote control (p.87). AUDIO M PARTY key Turns on/off the party mode (p.88). N HDMI OUT key SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM 4 Selects HDMI OUT jacks to be used for video/audio output (p.52). O Radio keys VOLUME MUTE TOP MENU Operate the FM/AM radio (p.61). MEMORY Registers FM/AM radio stations as presets. FM Switches to FM radio. AM Switches to AM radio. TUN./CH Select the radio frequency. POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN P SLEEP key ENTER RETURN I J DISPLAY SUR. MODE DECODE ENHANCER PARTY HDMI OUT INFO MEMORY FM AM 1 2 CLASSICAL LIVE 3 CLUB ENTERTAIN 5 MOVIE 6 STEREO STRAIGHT K 4 PURE SLEEP DIRECT TV 7 INPUT 10 MUTE L M N Q LEVEL key O R SETUP key Adjusts the volume of each speaker (p.108). Switches the remote control to the setup mode (p.128). TUN./ CH PRESET 8 9 TV VOL TV CH 0 ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP Switches the unit to standby mode automatically after a specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off). P Q R • To operate external devices with the remote control, register a remote control code for each device before using (p.128). FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 16 PREPARATIONS General setup procedure 1 Placing speakers (p.18) 2 Connecting the power amplifier and subwoofers (p.24) Select the speaker layout and connect the speakers to the power amplifier. For details on speaker connections, refer to the instruction manual for the power amplifier. Connecting the power amplifier and subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit. 3 Connecting a TV (p.26) Connect a TV to the unit. 4 Connecting playback devices (p.32) Connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players) and audio devices (such as CD players) to the unit. 5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas (p.36) Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit. 6 Connecting to a network (p.37) Connect the unit to a network. 7 Connecting other devices (p.38) Connect external devices such as recording devices. 8 Connecting the power cable (p.39) After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable. 9 Selecting an on-screen menu language (p.40) Select the desired on-screen menu language. 10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) (p.41) Optimize the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room (YPAO). This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit! PREPARATIONS ➤ General setup procedure En 17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 Placing speakers The unit has 11.2-channel pre-amplifiers. You can connect 2- to 11-channel speakers (via a power amplifier) and up to 2 subwoofers to create the favorite acoustic space in your room. You can also apply multi-zone configurations to enhance your system (p.82). Ideal speaker layout Functions of each speaker Speaker type Abbr. Function Front (L) 1 Front (R) 2 Center 3 Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogues and vocals). Surround (L) 4 Surround (R) 5 Produce surround right/left channel sounds. Surround speakers also produce surround back channel sounds when no surround back speakers are connected. Surround back (L) 6 Surround back (R) 7 Front presence (L) E Front presence (R) R Rear presence (L) T Rear presence (R) Y Subwoofer 9 E R 0.5 to 1 m (1.6 to 3.3 ft) 0.5 to 1 m (1.6 to 3.3 ft) Produce front right/left channel sounds (stereo sounds). 1.8 m (5.9 ft) 1 9 2 3 1.8 m (5.9 ft) 9 Produce surround back right/left channel sounds. Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds. In combination with CINEMA DSP HD³ (p.56), the presence speakers create a natural 3-dimensional sound field in your room. 4 5 10°~30° Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces bass parts of other channels. This channel is counted as “0.1”. You can connect 2 subwoofers to the unit and place them on the right/left (or front/rear) sides of the room. 10°~30° T • Use “Ideal speaker layout” (diagram on the right) as reference. You do not need to exactly adjust the speaker layout to this diagram since the YPAO function of the unit will automatically optimize the speaker settings (such as distances) to suit the speaker layout. 6 • When using only one surround back speaker, place it straight behind the listening position (middle of “SBL” and “SBR” in the diagram). • The unit creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce 3-dimensional sound fields even when no front presence speakers are connected. However, we recommend using front presence speakers in order to experience the full effect of the sound fields (and rear presence speakers for further spatial sounds). Y 1.8 m (5.9 ft) 7 0.3 m (1 ft) or more 1.8 m (5.9 ft) • The unit creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce natural 3-dimensional sound fields when front presence speakers are connected but no rear presence speakers. PREPARATIONS ➤ Placing speakers En 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Basic speaker configuration ■ Placing speakers in your room Depending on the number of speakers, place the speakers and subwoofer in your room. This section describes the representative speaker layout examples. ❑ 11.2-channel system ❑ 9.2-channel system (using rear presence speakers) E R 1 9 2 3 R 1 9 4 9 5 T Y 6 E 4 T 2 3 9 5 Y 7 This speaker system brings out the full performance of the unit and allows you to enjoy a highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field with any contents. This speaker system uses the front and rear presence speakers to produce a highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field, and is suited for enjoying 5.1-channel contents. • When Zone3 output is enabled (p.87), the rear presence right/left channel output is not available in the main zone. • When Zone3 output is enabled (p.87), the rear presence right/left channel output is not available in the main zone. PREPARATIONS ➤ Placing speakers En 19 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ❑ 9.2-channel system (using surround back speakers) E ❑ 7.1-channel system (using surround back speakers) R 1 9 2 3 9 4 5 6 7 This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back speakers. This speaker system creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back speakers. • This speaker system creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field. ❑ 7.1-channel system (using front presence speakers) This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field, and is suited for enjoying 5.1-channel contents. ❑ 5.1-channel system This speaker system creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and is suited for enjoying 5.1-channel contents. • This speaker system creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field. PREPARATIONS ➤ Placing speakers En 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ❑ Front 5.1-channel system This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field, and creates the virtual surround speakers using the front speakers to allow you to enjoy multi-channel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA DSP). ❑ 2.1-channel system Even when no surround speakers are connected, the unit creates the virtual surround speakers using the front speakers to allow you to enjoy multi-channel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA DSP). • Add the center speaker to configure a 3.1-channel system. PREPARATIONS ➤ Placing speakers En 21 Input/output jacks and cables ■ Video/audio jacks ■ Video jacks ■ Audio jacks ❑ HDMI jacks ❑ COMPONENT VIDEO jacks ❑ OPTICAL jacks Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single jack. Use an HDMI cable. Transmit video signals separated into three components: luminance (Y), chrominance blue (PB), and chrominance red (PR). Use a component video cable with three plugs. Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical cable. Remove the tip protector (if available) before using the cable. AV 1 HDMI cable Digital optical cable EN PON COM Component video cable AV 1 A • Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using a cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality degradation. ❑ COAXIAL jacks ❑ S VIDEO jack • The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return Channel (ARC), and 3D and Ultra HD (4K) video transmission features. Transmits S-video signals that include luminance (Y) and chrominance (C) components. Use an S-video cable. Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial cable. Digital coaxial cable • Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or Ultra HD (4K) videos. S-video cable ❑ HDMI/MHL jack ❑ AUDIO jacks Transmits digital video and digital sound. Use an MHL cable. Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin cable or an audio pin cable (RCA unbalanced cable). MHL cable ❑ VIDEO jacks Stereo pin cable Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable. AV 1 Video pin cable • The VIDEO AUX jack on the front panel of the unit supports both HDMI and MHL connections. Use a cable that matches the jack on your MHL-compatible mobile device. When connecting an HDMI-compatible playback device to the VIDEO AUX jack, use an HDMI cable. For details on an MHL connection, see “MHL connection” (p.35). PREPARATIONS ➤ Input/output jacks and cables En 22 ❑ XLR jacks Transmit analog audio signals. Use an XLR balanced cable. XLR input jacks Match the pins and insert the “male” connector of the XLR balanced cable until you hear a click. XLR balanced cable (male) IO AUD 4 R About the XLR jacks • The pin assignments for the XLR jacks of the unit are shown below. Before connecting an XLR balanced cable, refer to the instruction manual of your device and verify that its XLR jacks are compatible with the pin assignments. XLR input jacks 2. HOT 1. GND 3. COLD XLR output jacks 1. GND 2. HOT 3. COLD • When disconnecting the cable from the unit, hold down the PUSH button on the unit and then pull the connector out. XLR output jacks Match the pins and insert the “female” connector of the XLR balanced cable until you hear a click. XLR balanced cable (female) UT EO PR TER N CE • When disconnecting the cable from the unit, hold down the lever of the connector and then pull it out. PREPARATIONS ➤ Input/output jacks and cables En 23 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2 Connecting the power amplifier and subwoofers Connecting a power amplifier Connect the input jacks of your power amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks of the unit so that the audio source selected on the unit can be output to the power amplifier for playback. Select a balanced (XLR) or an unbalanced (RCA) connection for each channel depending on the input jacks available on your power amplifier. ■ Balanced connection Depending on the speaker system you want to use, connect the corresponding PRE OUT (XLR) jacks of the unit to the amplifier with XLR balanced cables. • Before connecting XLR balanced cables, refer to the instruction manual of your power amplifier and verify that its XLR jacks are compatible with the pin assignments of the unit (p.23). • We recommend using a power amplifier with volume control bypass (or without volume control circuit). • The XLR jacks and RCA jacks for each channel output the same signals. The unit (rear) Caution • To prevent the generation of loud noises or abnormal sounds, make sure you remove the power cable of the unit and turn off the power amplifier before making connections. PRE OUT (XLR) jacks Power amplifier Speaker connections XLR (Female connector) XLR (Male connector) Main input (XLR) PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting the power amplifier and subwoofers En 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ■ Unbalanced connection Connecting subwoofers Depending on the speaker system you want to use, connect the corresponding PRE OUT (RCA) jacks of the unit to the amplifier with audio pin cables (RCA unbalanced cables). Connect the subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the SUBWOOFER PREOUT 1–2 jacks of the unit with audio pin cables (RCA unbalanced cables). The unit (rear) • We recommend using a power amplifier with volume control bypass (or without volume control circuit). The unit (rear) Power amplifier Main input (RCA) PRE OUT (RCA) jacks 9 9 Speaker connections • Only unbalanced connections are available for subwoofers. • You can connect 2 subwoofers to the unit and place them on the right/left (or front/rear) sides of the room. When using 2 subwoofers, configure the “SWFR Layout” setting (p.108) in the “Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting the power amplifier and subwoofers En 25 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 3 Connecting a TV Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV. You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit. ■ Connection Method 1 (HDMI Control/ARC-compatible TV) Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable. The connection method varies depending on the functions and video input jacks available on your TV. Refer to the instruction manual of the TV and choose a connection method. Does your TV support Audio Return Channel (ARC)? Yes • The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “HDMI” parameters (p.113) in the “Setup” menu. • HDMI Control is available only on the HDMI OUT 1 jack. ■ Connection Method 1 (p.26) • Use an HDMI cable that supports ARC. HDMI OUT 1 jack No HDMI OUT The unit (rear) Does your TV support HDMI Control? Yes 1 2 ARC (ZONE OUT) HDMI ■ Connection Method 2 (p.28) HDMI input (ARC-compatible) HDMI No ARC HDMI Does your TV have an HDMI input jack? Yes ■ Connection Method 3 (p.29) No ■ Connection Method 4 (p.30) TV About HDMI Control HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s power and volume with the TV’s remote control. You can also control playback devices (such as an HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD player) connected to the unit with an HDMI cable. For details, see “HDMI Control” (p.150). • By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, any video input to the unit can be output to the TV, regardless of the method used to connect the video device to the unit. For details, see “Video signal flow” (p.148). • You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.31). About Audio Return Channel (ARC) ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways under HDMI Control. If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control and ARC to the unit with a single HDMI cable, you can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 26 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ❑ Necessary settings To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the following settings. 3 Configure the settings for HDMI Control. For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV. a Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD player). 1 After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback devices) and the power cable to the unit, turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices. b Turn off the TV’s main power and then turn off the unit and playback devices. 2 Configure the settings of the unit. c Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV’s main power. d Switch the TV input to display video from the unit. a Check that ARC is enabled on the TV. b Switch the TV input to display video from the unit. c Press ON SCREEN. ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not, select the input source manually. On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed. OPTION ON SCREEN e Check the following. DISPLAY d Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. f Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control. This completes the necessary settings. If you select a TV program with the TV remote control, the input source of the unit will be automatically switched to “AUDIO 1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit. If you cannot hear the TV’s audio, check that “ARC” (p.114) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”. • If HDMI Control does not work properly, try turning off and on (or unplugging and then plugging in again) the devices. It may solve the problem. • If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on the TV. • If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.114) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use an audio cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable) to input TV audio to the unit (p.28). e Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”. • “AUDIO 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1 jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use the SCENE function (p.53), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV). f Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER. g Use the cursor keys to select “On”. h Press ON SCREEN. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 27 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ■ Connection Method 2 (HDMI Control-compatible TV) ❑ Necessary settings Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and an audio cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable). To use HDMI Control, you need to configure the following settings. • The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “HDMI” parameters (p.113) in the “Setup” menu. For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV. 1 After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback devices) and power cable of the unit, turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices. 2 Configure the settings of the unit. • HDMI Control is available only on the HDMI OUT 1 jack. HDMI OUT 1 jack a Switch the TV input to display video from the unit. HDMI OUT The unit (rear) 1 2 ARC (ZONE OUT) b Press ON SCREEN. HDMI HDMI input OPTION ON SCREEN ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER HDMI ENTER HDMI RETURN DISPLAY AUDIO AUDIO 1 (2 TV) c Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. L L L R R R TV 5 OPTICAL OPTICAL O AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks O Audio output (digital optical or analog stereo) d Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”. • By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, any video input to the unit can be output to the TV, regardless of the method used to connect the video device to the unit. For details, see “Video signal flow” (p.148). • You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.31). e Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER. f Use the cursor keys to select “On”. g Press ON SCREEN. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 28 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 3 Configure the settings for HDMI Control. a Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as a HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD player). ■ Connection Method 3 (TV with HDMI input jacks) Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and an audio cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable). HDMI OUT 1 jack b Turn off the TV’s main power and then turn off the unit and playback devices. c Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV. d Switch the TV input to display video from the unit. HDMI OUT The unit (rear) 1 2 ARC (ZONE OUT) HDMI e Check the following. HDMI input On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not, select the input source manually. HDMI HDMI On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed. f Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control. (2 TV) L L L R R R This completes the necessary settings. If you select a TV program with the TV remote control, the input source of the unit will be automatically switched to “AUDIO 1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit. AUDIO AUDIO 1 TV 5 OPTICAL OPTICAL O • If HDMI Control does not work properly, try turning off and on (or unplugging and then plugging in again) the devices. It may solve the problem. • If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on the TV. • “AUDIO 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1 jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use the SCENE function (p.53), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV). AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks O Audio output (digital optical or analog stereo) If you select “AUDIO 1” as the input source by pressing AUDIO 1 or SCENE(TV) on the remote control, the TV audio will be played back on the unit. • By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, any video input to the unit can be output to the TV, regardless of the method used to connect the video device to the unit. For details, see “Video signal flow” (p.148). • If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1 jacks, connect the TV to one of the AUDIO 2–3 jacks. To use the SCENE function (p.53), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV). • You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.31). PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 29 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ■ Connection Method 4 (TV without HDMI input jacks) ❑ S VIDEO connection (with an S-video cable) Depending on the video input jacks available on your TV, choose one of the following connections. If you select “AUDIO 1” as the input source by pressing AUDIO 1 or SCENE(TV) on the remote control, the TV audio will be played back on the unit. MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT MONITOR OUT (S VIDEO) jack The unit (rear) S Video input (S-video) S VIDEO • If you connect your TV to the unit with a cable other than HDMI, video input to the unit via HDMI cannot be output to the TV. Also, analog videos that can be output to the TV differ according to the “Analog to Analog Conversion” setting in the “Setup” menu. For details, see “Video signal flow” (p.148). S AUDIO AUDIO 1 (2 TV) • If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1 jacks, connect the TV to one of the AUDIO 2–3 jacks. To use the SCENE function (p.53), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV). L L L R R R ❑ COMPONENT VIDEO connection (with a component video cable) TV 5 OPTICAL MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks The unit (rear) Y MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT PB PR OPTICAL O AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks PR PB O Audio output (digital optical or analog stereo) Y Video input (component video) ❑ VIDEO (composite video) connection (with a video pin cable) MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT COMPONENT VIDEO PR Y PB MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack V PR The unit (rear) PB Y Video input (S-video) AUDIO AUDIO 1 (2 TV) VIDEO L L L R R V R AUDIO AUDIO 1 (2 TV) TV 5 OPTICAL L L L R R OPTICAL O R O TV 5 OPTICAL AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks Audio output (digital optical or analog stereo) OPTICAL O AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks O Audio output (digital optical or analog stereo) PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 30 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ■ Connecting another TV or a projector The unit has two HDMI output jacks. If you connect another TV or a projector to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can switch the TV (or projector) to be used for watching videos with the remote control (p.52). HDMI OUT 2 jack HDMI OUT The unit (rear) 1 2 ARC TV (ZONE OUT) HDMI HDMI HDMI input HDMI TV (already connected) Projector • HDMI Control is not available on the HDMI OUT 2 jack. • If you set “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.118) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2” or “Zone4”, you can connect a video monitor for Zone2 or Zone4 to the HDMI OUT 2 jack and enjoy videos and audio using the video monitor (p.85). PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 4 Connecting playback devices The unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks including HDMI input jacks to allow you to connect different types of playback devices. For information on how to connect an iPod or a USB storage device, see the following pages. • Connecting an iPod (p.68) ■ Component video connection Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable (digital coaxial, digital optical or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device. • Connecting a USB storage device (p.72) Output jacks on video device Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game consoles to the unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video device, choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI connection if the video device has an HDMI output jack. • Videos input to the unit via HDMI cannot be output to a TV connected to the unit with a cable other than HDMI. • The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment” setting (p.119) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COMPONENT VIDEO (A , B , C , D ), COAXIAL (a, b, f) and OPTICAL (c, d, e) jacks to another input source. Input jacks on the unit Video Audio Component video Digital coaxial AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL) Digital optical AV 3–4 (COMPONENT VIDEO + OPTICAL) Analog stereo AV 1–4 (COMPONENT VIDEO + AUDIO) AV 1–4 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks The unit (rear) Y PB PR PR PB Y Video output (component video) • If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit will be determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.93) in the “Option” menu. ■ HDMI connection PR Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable. Y The unit (rear) Y PB PR PB HDMI (AV 1–7) jacks C C O O COAXIAL L HDMI output L L R R Video device OPTICAL HDMI HDMI R HDMI Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL), AV 3–4 (OPTICAL), AV 1–4 (AUDIO) jacks Video device Audio output (any of digital coaxial, digital optical, analog stereo) If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4 on the remote control, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–7 on the remote control, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 32 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ■ S-video connection ■ Composite video connection Connect a video device to the unit with an S-video cable and an audio cable (digital coaxial, digital optical or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device. Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital coaxial, digital optical, or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device. Output jacks on video device Output jacks on video device Input jacks on the unit Video Audio S-video Input jacks on the unit Video Digital coaxial AV 1–2 (S VIDEO + COAXIAL) Digital optical AV 3–4 (S VIDEO + OPTICAL) Analog stereo AV 1–4 (S VIDEO + AUDIO) The unit (rear) Audio Composite video Digital coaxial AV 1–2 (VIDEO + COAXIAL) Digital optical AV 3–4 (VIDEO + OPTICAL) Analog stereo AV 1–4 (VIDEO + AUDIO) The unit (rear) AV 1–4 (VIDEO) jacks AV 1–4 (S VIDEO) jacks Video output (S-video) S Video output (composite video) V VIDEO S V S VIDEO C C C COAXIAL O L COAXIAL Video device O O L C OPTICAL L L L L R R Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL), AV 3–4 (OPTICAL), AV 1–4 (AUDIO) jacks R Audio output (any of digital coaxial, digital optical, analog stereo) If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4 on the remote control, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. OPTICAL R R R Video device O Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL), AV 3–4 (OPTICAL), AV 1–4 (AUDIO) jacks Audio output (any of digital coaxial, digital optical, analog stereo) If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4 on the remote control, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 33 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) PHONO PHONO jacks Audio output (PHONO) Connect audio devices such as CD players, MD players, and a turntable to the unit. Depending on the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the following connections. Ground lead GND The unit (rear) GND PHONO L L • The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment” setting (p.119) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COAXIAL (a, b, f) and OPTICAL (c, d, e) jacks to another input source. L L R R R R Turntable • Before connecting XLR balanced cables, refer to the instruction manual of your audio device and verify that its XLR jacks are compatible with the pin assignments of the unit (p.23). • If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit will be determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.93) in the “Option” menu. Audio output jacks on audio device Digital coaxial C C O O COAXIAL L Audio input jacks on the unit AV 1–2 (COAXIAL) AUDIO 2 (COAXIAL) Analog stereo (RCA) AV 1–4 (AUDIO [RCA]) AUDIO 1–3 (AUDIO [RCA]) Analog stereo (XLR) AUDIO 4 (AUDIO [XLR]) Turntable (PHONO) PHONO R R OPTICAL XLR (Female connector) XLR AV 3–4 (OPTICAL) AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL) L R XLR Digital optical L Audio device XLR (Male connector) Any of AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4 (COAXIAL, OPTICAL, AUDIO [RCA], AUDIO [XLR]) jacks Audio output (any of digital coaxial, digital optical, analog stereo) If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4 or PHONO on the remote control, the audio played back on the audio device will be output from the unit. When connecting a turntable • The PHONO jack of the unit is compatible with an MM cartridge. To connect a turntable with a low-output MC cartridge, use a boosting transformer. • Connecting the turntable to the GND terminal of the unit may reduce noise in the signal. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 34 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Connecting to the jacks on the front panel Use the VIDEO AUX jack to temporarily connect a playback device to the unit. Use the USB jack to connect an iPod or a USB storage device. For details, see “Connecting an iPod” (p.68) or “Connecting a USB storage device” (p.72). ❑ MHL connection Connect an MHL-compatible mobile device (such as smartphones) to the unit with an MHL cable. You can enjoy full HD videos and multichannel audio sources stored on the mobile device. The VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack of the unit enables you to input videos and audio directly from the mobile device to the unit. Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on the unit. • When “USB” is selected as the input source, video signals input to the VIDEO AUX jacks are output to the TV by default. You can change the video out setting in “Video Out” (p.96) in the “Input” menu. MHL ❑ HDMI connection The unit (front) Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the unit with an HDMI cable. MHL output MHL HDMI Mobile device The unit (front) If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played back on the mobile device will be output from the unit. • To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT jack of the unit (p.26 to 29). • You need to prepare an MHL cable that matches the jack on your mobile device. Game console • If you cannot hear sounds played on the mobile device, check the volume of the mobile device. • You can operate the mobile device using the menu operation keys, external device operation keys and numeric keys on the remote control. However, some features may not be compatible, depending on the mobile device or its application. In this case, operate the mobile device itself. Camcorder If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX on the remote control on the remote control, the video/audio played back on the device will be output from the unit. • If “Standby Through” (p.114) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, you can output mobile device videos/audio to the TV or operate the mobile device using the remote control of the unit even when the unit is in standby mode. • The unit supplies power to the mobile device in the following conditions. – The unit is turned on. – The unit is in standby mode while “Standby Through” (p.114) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”. • To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT jack of the unit (p.26 to 29). • You need to prepare an HDMI cable that matches the output jacks on your device. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 35 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ❑ Composite video/analog stereo/digital optical connection Connect a playback device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable). 5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit. Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface. • The location of the antenna jacks varies depending on the region of purchase. V L R O FM antenna AM antenna The unit (front) Game console Camcorder The unit (rear) If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played back on the device will be output from the unit. • If you connect video devices to both the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack and VIDEO AUX (VIDEO/AUDIO/OPTICAL) jacks, the unit outputs video/audio input through the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting the FM/AM antennas En 36 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Assembling the AM antenna 6 Connecting to a network Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5 or higher straight cable). You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and Network Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit. Internet Network Attached Storage (NAS) WAN PC LAN Connecting the AM antenna Hold down Insert Modem Release Router • Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit. Network cable Mobile device (such as iPhone) • The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity. The unit (rear) • If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit, as the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network parameters manually (p.115). • You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.123) in the “Information” menu. • Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router) may block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the security software or firewall settings appropriately. • Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit. • To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network En 37 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 7 Connecting other devices Connecting recording devices Connecting a device with analog multi-channel output You can connect video/audio recording devices to the AV OUT jacks. These jacks output video/audio signals selected as the input. You can connect an analog multi-channel output device such as a DVD player and an SACD player to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. The unit (rear) • The AV OUT jacks cannot output video/audio signals input through the HDMI or COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. • Be sure to use the AV OUT jacks only for connecting recording devices. AV OUT jacks The unit (rear) Video/audio input VIDEO AV OUT V V MULTI CH INPUT S VIDEO S Channel output (Center) CENTER S (Subwoofer) AUDIO L L R R L R Video/audio recording device FRONT MULTI CH INPUT jacks SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER L (Surround back) R OPTICAL L O O (Surround) Device with analog multi-channel output R L (Front) R If you select “MULTI CH” as the input source by pressing MULTI on the remote control, the audio played back on the device will be output from the unit. • You can select a video source to be displayed when “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source using “Video Out” (p.96) in the “Input” menu. When connecting a video device (such as a DVD player) to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks, use the input jack specified in “Video Out” for the video connection. • Since the unit does not redirect signals input to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers, make appropriate settings on the external device (such as a DVD player) that suit to the speaker configuration. • When “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source, sound mode selection and tone control adjustment are not available. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting other devices En 38 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function The trigger function can control an external device in conjunction with operating the unit (such as powering on/off and input selection). If you have a power amplifier or a Yamaha subwoofer that supports a system connection or a device with a trigger input jack, you can use the trigger function by connecting the external device to one of the TRIGGER OUT jacks. TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks The unit (rear) Trigger In (+12V) 8 Connecting the power cable After all the connections are complete, connect the supplied power cable to the unit and then to an AC wall outlet. The unit (rear) Power amplifier (such as Yamaha MX-A5000) TRIGGER OUT 1 2 12V 0.1A To an AC wall outlet System connection input Yamaha subwoofer • You can configure the trigger function settings in “Trigger Output1” and “Trigger Output2” (p.120) in the “Setup” menu. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting the power cable En 39 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 SOURCE RECEIVER RECEIVER z Select the desired on-screen menu language from English, Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] 9 Selecting an on-screen menu language 1 2 Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit. 3 4 Press ON SCREEN. 5 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Language” and the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired language. SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE 4 VOLUME ON SCREEN TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit. 6 7 To confirm the setting, press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. • The information on the front display is provided in English only. Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE PREPARATIONS ➤ Selecting an on-screen menu language En 40 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 SOURCE RECEIVER RECEIVER z AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] 10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room. 5 Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position (same height as your ears) and connect it to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel. YPAO MIC jack The unit (front) SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE 4 YPAO MIC • The YPAO function of the unit adopts the YPAO-R.S.C. (Reflected Sound Control) technology that enables to create natural sound fields like a room specifically designed for acoustic perfection. VOLUME E TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY R • Please note the following when using YPAO. 1 2 – Use YPAO after connecting a TV and speakers to the unit. – During the measuring process, test tones are output at high volume. Ensure that the test tones do not frighten small children. Also, refrain from using this function at night when it may be a nuisance to others. 9 3 9 – During the measuring process, you cannot adjust the volume. – During the measuring process, keep the room as quiet as possible. MODE 4 – Do not connect headphones. CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH 1 2 3 Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit. 4 Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If the crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to maximum. Ear height Turn on the power amplifier. Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit. VOLUME MIN MAX CROSSOVER/ HIGH CUT MIN YPAO 5 microphone Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position (same height as your ears). We recommend the use of a tripod as a microphone stand. You can use the tripod screws to stabilize the microphone. (The microphone direction is not considered.) 9 MAX PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 41 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ❑ Multi Position The following screen appears on the TV. SOURCE RECEIVER SOURCE/RECEIVER Selects multi measure or single measure. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE 4 VOLUME • To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone before starting the measurement. TOP MENU Settings POP-UP/MENU 6 OPTION ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY If desired, select the measuring options. Yes Select this option if you will have several listening positions or if you want others to enjoy surround sound. You can take measurements at up to 8 different positions in the room. The speaker settings will be optimized to suit the area defined by those positions (multi measure). No (default) Select this option if your listening position will always be fixed. Take the measurements at only one position. The speaker settings will be optimized to suit that position (single measure). a Use the cursor keys to select “Multi Position” (p.42) or “Angle” (p.43) and press ENTER. b Use the cursor keys to select a setting and then press ENTER. MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL MUTE • If the cursor keys do not work, the remote control may be set to operate external devices. In this case, press SOURCE/RECEIVER (to light up the key in orange) and then use the cursor keys. TV CH This completes the preparations. See the following page to start the measurement. • If you perform the multi measure, the speaker settings will be optimized for you to enjoy surround sound in a wider space. • If you perform the multi measure, first place the YPAO microphone at the listening position you will be seated most frequently. When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”: “Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure)” (p.46) When “Multi Position” is set to “No”: “Measuring at one listening position (single measure)” (p.44) PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 42 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Single measure a Multi measure (5 listening positions) d ❑ Angle Enables/disables the angle measurement. e bac Settings Multi measure Multi measure (1 listening position + front/back/left/right) (2 listening positions + front/back) Yes Enables the angle measurement. The unit will measure angle of each speaker at the listening position and correct the speaker parameters so that CINEMA DSP can create more effective sound fields. No (default) Disables the angle measurement. b c a e d c a b d PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 43 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Measuring at one listening position (single measure) SOURCE RECEIVER 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX Proceed to Step 2. When “Multi Position” is set to “No”, follow the procedure below for measurement. AV 1 (When angle measurement is enabled) AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] • Do not stand between the speakers and the YPAO microphone during the measurement process (about 5 minutes). SCENE 1 2 3 • Move to the corner of the room or leave the room. 4 • If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears, see “Error messages” (p.50) or “Warning messages” (p.51). PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to select “Measure” and press ENTER. 2 Perform the angle measurement. a Use the cursor keys to select “YES” and press ENTER. OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Cursor keys ENTER RETURN The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER again to start the measurement immediately. Select “NO” to cancel the angle measurement. b Place the supplied microphone base at the listening position and set the YPAO microphone to the position “1”. • To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN. MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL MUTE 1 POP-UP/MENU TV CH The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement finishes. (When angle measurement is disabled) Microphone base Proceed to Step 3. FRONT DIRECTION • We recommend using a tripod to place the microphone base at ear height. Use the tripod screws to fix the microphone base in place. • Do not move the microphone base until the third angle measurement finishes. PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 44 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 c Press ENTER to start the first angle measurement. SOURCE RECEIVER The following screen appears on the TV when the first angle measurement finishes. 4 To save the measurement results, use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU 4 VOLUME d In the same way, perform the angle measurement for the positions “2” and “3”. POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN The following screen appears on the TV when the third angle measurement finishes. Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN The adjusted speaker settings are applied. • To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”. 5 DISPLAY Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit. This completes optimization of the speaker settings. MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT Caution PRESET • The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on top of AV equipment). TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE 3 Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and press ENTER. • To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see “Checking the measurement results” (p.48). PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 45 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure) SOURCE RECEIVER When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”, follow the procedure below for measurement. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 3 AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] 1 2 • Do not stand between the speakers and the YPAO microphone during the measurement process. It takes about 15 minutes to measure 8 listening positions. When the measurements at the positions you want to measure are completed, use the cursor keys to select “CANCEL” and press ENTER. When you have taken measurements at 8 listening positions, the following screen appears automatically. (When angle measurement is disabled) Proceed to Step 5. SCENE 3 • Move to the corner of the room or leave the room. 4 • If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears, see “Error messages” (p.50) or “Warning messages” (p.51). PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME 1 POP-UP/MENU To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to select “Measure” and press ENTER. OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER again to start the measurement immediately. Cursor keys ENTER RETURN (When angle measurement is enabled) • To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN. MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement at the first position finishes. PRESET Proceed to Step 4. TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE 2 Move the YPAO microphone to the next listening position and press ENTER. Repeat Step 2 until measurements at all listening positions (up to 8) have been taken. PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 46 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 4 SOURCE RECEIVER d In the same way, perform the angle measurement for the positions “2” and “3”. Perform the angle measurement. a Use the cursor keys to select “YES” and press ENTER. The following screen appears on the TV when the third angle measurement finishes. Select “NO” to cancel the angle measurement. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] b Place the supplied microphone base at the listening position you will be seated most frequently and set the YPAO microphone to the position “1”. AUDIO SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE 4 VOLUME Microphone base TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU 5 FRONT DIRECTION OPTION ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY • To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see “Checking the measurement results” (p.48). • We recommend using a tripod to place the microphone base at ear height. Use the tripod screws to fix the microphone base in place. MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL MUTE Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and press ENTER. • Do not move the microphone base until the third angle measurement finishes. 6 To save the measurement result, use the cursor keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER. c Press ENTER to start the first angle measurement. TV CH The following screen appears on the TV when the first angle measurement finishes. The adjusted speaker settings are applied. • To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”. PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 47 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 7 SOURCE RECEIVER Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit. 2 Use the cursor keys to select an item. This completes optimization of the speaker settings. Wiring Polarity of each speaker Normal: The speaker cable is connected with the correct polarity (+/-). Reverse: The speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity (+/-). Size Size of each speaker (cross-over frequency of the subwoofer) Large: The speaker can reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. Small: The speaker cannot reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. You can check the YPAO measurement results. Distance Distance from the listening position to each speaker 1 Level Output level adjustment for each speaker Angle Angle of each speaker at the listening position AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX Caution AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] 1 2 • The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on top of AV equipment). SCENE 3 4 Checking the measurement results PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Cursor keys ENTER RETURN After the measurement, use the cursor keys to select “Result” and press ENTER. • A speaker with a problem is indicated with a message enclosed in a red box. • You can also select “Result” from “Auto Setup” (p.104) in the “Setup” menu, which displays the previous measurement results. MODE The following screen appears. CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT • If there are speakers that cannot be detected, check the power amplifier settings and connections. PRESET TV 3 PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE 1 2 To finish checking the results and return to the previous screen, press RETURN. 3 1 Measurement result items 2 Measurement result details 3 The number of measured positions (when multi measure is performed) PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 48 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments SOURCE RECEIVER When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not suitable, follow the procedure below to discard the manual settings and reload the previous YPAO adjustments. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE 4 1 In the “Setup” menu, select “Speaker”, “Auto Setup”, and then “Result” (p.103). 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload” and press ENTER. 3 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. VOLUME ON SCREEN TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 49 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Error messages If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again. Error message Cause Remedy E-1: No Front SP Front speakers are not detected. E-2: No Sur. SP One of the surround speakers cannot be detected. E-3: No F.PRNS SP One of the front presence speakers cannot be detected. E-4: SBR → SBL A surround back speaker is connected to the R side only. When using only one surround back speaker, you need to connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit and power amplifier, and then reconnect the speaker. E-5: Noisy The noise is too loud. Keep the room quiet and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If you select “PROCEED”, YPAO takes the measurement again and ignores any noise detected. E-6: Check Sur. Surround back speakers are connected, but no surround speakers are connected. Surround speakers need to be connected in order to use surround back speakers. Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit and power amplifier, and then reconnect the speakers. E-7: No MIC The YPAO microphone has been removed. Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. E-8: No Signal The YPAO microphone cannot detect test tones. Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. E-9: User Cancel The measurement has been canceled. Follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. To cancel the measurement, select “EXIT”. E-10: Internal Error An internal error has occurred. Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. E-11: No R.PRNS SP One of the rear presence speakers cannot be detected. Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit and power amplifier, and then check the power amplifier connections (to the unit or to the rear presence speakers). Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit and power amplifier, and then check the power amplifier connections (to the unit or to the corresponding speakers). (This error message will be also displayed if you perform YPAO when the power amplifier is turned off.) PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Warning messages If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions. However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings. Warning message Cause Remedy A speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity (+/-). Select “Wiring” in “Result” (p.48) and check the cable connections (+/-) of the speaker identified by “Reverse”. If the speaker is connected incorrectly, turn off the unit and power amplifier, and then reconnect the speaker cable. Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message may appear even if the speakers are connected correctly. In this case, you can ignore the message. The pin assignments of the XLR jacks of the unit and power amplifier are not same. Check the pin assignments of the XLR jacks of the power amplifier. If they are not compatible with the pin assignments of the unit (p.23), change the pin assignment setting of the power amplifier or use unbalanced (RCA) connections. W-2: Over Distance A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft) from the listening position. Select “Distance” in “Result” (p.48) and move the speaker identified by “>24.00m (>80.0ft)” within 24 m (80 ft) of the listening position. W-3: Level Error There are significant volume differences between the speakers. Check the usage environment and cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the subwoofer. We recommend using the same speakers or speakers with specifications that are as similar as possible. W-1: Out of Phase PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 51 PLAYBACK SOURCE RECEIVER Basic playback procedure AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] Input selection keys SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU 4 VOLUME VOLUME POP-UP/MENU MUTE ON SCREEN 1 Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or BD/DVD player) connected to the unit. 2 Use the input selection keys to select an input source. 3 Start playback on the external device or select a radio station. Selecting an HDMI output jack 1 Press HDMI OUT to select an HDMI OUT jack. Each time you press the key, the HDMI OUT jack to be used for signal output changes. DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 OPTION ON SCREEN HDMIOUTSel. OUT1+2 MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Refer to the instruction manual for the external device. Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN SUR. MODE DECODE ENHANCER PARTY HDMI OUT INFO MEMORY FM AM 1 2 CLASSICAL LIVE 3 CLUB ENTERTAIN • Listening to FM/AM radio (p.61) HDMI OUT • Playing back iPod music (p.68) • Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.72) TUN./ CH PRESET 4 For details on the following operations, see the corresponding pages. DISPLAY 5 MOVIE 6 STEREO STRAIGHT 8 9 PURE SLEEP DIRECT TV VOL TV CH 0 ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP TV 7 INPUT 10 MUTE • Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) (p.75) • Listening to Internet radio (p.78) • Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) (p.80) 4 OUT 1+2 Outputs the same signal at both the HDMI OUT 1 and HDMI OUT 2 jacks. OUT 1 Output the signals at the selected HDMI OUT jack. OUT 2 Off Does not output the signals at the HDMI OUT jacks. • You can also select an HDMI output jack by selecting a scene (p.53). • When “OUT 1+2” is selected, the unit outputs video signals at the highest resolution supported by both TVs (or projectors) connected to the unit. (For example, if you have connected a 1080p TV to the HDMI OUT 1 jack and a 720p TV to the HDMI OUT 2 jack, the unit outputs 720p video signals.) • If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2 or Zone4 (p.118), you can turn on/off each zone by pressing HDMI OUT repeatedly. Press VOLUME to adjust the volume. • To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute. • To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu or TONE/BALANCE on the front panel (p.91). On-screen input selection a Press ON SCREEN. b Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER. c Use the cursor keys to select the desired input source and press ENTER. PLAYBACK ➤ Basic playback procedure En 52 Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) SOURCE RECEIVER The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source, sound program, HDMI output and various settings with just one touch. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX You can use up to 12 scenes to register your favorite settings and switch them depending on a playback source. 1 AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] 1 2 SCENE 3 PROGRAM MUTE 4 SCENE Press SCENE. The input source and settings registered to the corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on automatically when it is in standby mode. By default, the following settings are registered for each scene. VOLUME SCENE (SCENE key) TOP MENU 1 (BD/DVD) 2 (TV) 3 (NET) 4 (RADIO) POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN Input (p.52) AV 1 AUDIO 1 NET RADIO TUNER Audio Select (p.93) Auto Auto — — HDMI Output (p.52) OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2 Sound Program (p.55) Sci-Fi STRAIGHT 11ch Stereo 11ch Stereo Pure Direct Mode (p.110) Auto Auto Auto Auto Enhancer (p.60) Off On On On Enhancer Hi-Res Mode (p.93) On On On On Input OPTION ON SCREEN HDMI Output DISPLAY MODE Mode CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE • You can select SCENE 1–4 by pressing SCENE on the remote control. Additionally, you can create 8 scenes (SCENE 5–12) and select those scenes from the “Scene” menu (p.97). On-screen scene selection a Press ON SCREEN. b Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER. c Use the cursor keys to select a desired scene and press ENTER. PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) En 53 Configuring scene assignments SOURCE RECEIVER AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 Set the unit to the condition (such as input source and sound program) that you want to assign to a scene. 2 Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front display. AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] 1 2 Input selection keys SCENE 3 PROGRAM MUTE 4 SCENE DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP VOLUME HD 3 TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY 3 SCENE1 SETComplete Selecting setting items to be included as scene assignments In addition to the default scene assignments (Input, HDMI Output and Mode), you can also include the following setting items as the scene assignments in “Detail” (p.99) in the “Scene” menu. Sound Tone Control, Adaptive DRC Surround CINEMA DSP 3D Mode, Dialogue Lift, Dialogue Level, Subwoofer Trim, Extended Surround Video Video Mode, Video Adjustment Volume Master Volume Lipsync Lipsync, Delay Speaker Setup Setting Pattern, PEQ Select MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR If you want to control the corresponding playback device after selecting the scene, hold down the corresponding SCENE key and input selection key together for more than 3 seconds. Once the setting is completed successfully, “OK” appears in the display window on the remote control. MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH • If you have not registered the remote control code of the playback device yet, see “Registering the remote control codes for playback devices” (p.129) to register it. MUTE • The SCENE link playback function allows you to start playback of an external device connected to the unit via HDMI. To enable SCENE link playback, specify the device type in “Device Control” (p.98) in the “Scene” menu. PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) En 54 Selecting the sound mode SOURCE RECEIVER The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and surround decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with your favorite sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo playback). AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] AUDIO ❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for movies • MOVIE THEATER category (p.57): Press MOVIE repeatedly. SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM 4 VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM ON SCREEN TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY • ENTERTAINMENT category (p.57): Press ENTERTAIN repeatedly. This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for viewing video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games. ❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for music or stereo playback • CLASSICAL category (p.58): Press CLASSICAL repeatedly. MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT • LIVE/CLUB category (p.58): Press LIVE/CLUB repeatedly. • STEREO category (p.58): Press STEREO repeatedly. This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for listening music sources or stereo playback. ❑ Selecting a surround decoder SUR. DECODE ENHANCER PARTY HDMI OUT INFO MEMORY FM AM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 SLEEP 10 0 ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP SUR.DECODE ENHANCER ❑ Switching to the Pure Direct mode • Press PURE DIRECT. This mode lets you enjoy pure high fidelity sound by reducing the electrical noise from other circuitry (p.60). ❑ Enabling Compressed Music Enhancer • Press ENHANCER. This mode lets you enjoy compressed music with additional depth and breadth (p.60). On-screen sound program/surround decoder selection a Press ON SCREEN. b Use the cursor keys to select “Sound Program” and press ENTER. c Use the cursor keys to select a sound program/surround decoder and press ENTER. • You can also switch the sound programs and surround decoder by pressing PROGRAM. • You can change the settings of the surround programs and surround decoders in the “Sound Program” menu (p.100). • The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source. • You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the channel indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.12) or at the “Audio Signal” screen in the “Information” menu (p.122). • Press SUR.DECODE repeatedly. This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed multichannel playback from 2-channel sources (p.59). TUN./ CH ❑ Switching to the straight decode mode • Press STRAIGHT. • This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed sounds in original channels (p.59). PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 55 Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP HD3) The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha’s original DSP technology (CINEMA DSP HD³). It allows you to easily create sound fields like actual movie theaters or concert halls in your room and enjoy natural stereoscopic sound fields. ■ Enjoying surround sound with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel speaker system, with stereo headphones by connecting the headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting a sound program or a surround decoder. Sound program category MUSIC DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 CLASSICAL HallinVienna MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Sound program “CINEMA DSP !” lights up • To use the conventional CINEMA DSP, set “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.91) in the “Option” menu to “Off”. • The unit creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce 3-dimensional sound fields even when no front presence speakers are connected. However, we recommend using front presence speakers in order to experience the full effect of the sound fields (and rear presence speakers for further spatial sounds). • The unit creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce natural 3-dimensional sound fields when front presence speakers are connected but no rear presence speakers. ■ Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP) If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 11ch Stereo) when no surround speakers are connected, the unit utilizes Yamaha’s original virtual surround technology to reproduce up to 7-channel surround sound and enable you to enjoy the well-oriented sound field only with the front-side speakers. We recommend using presence speakers in order to enjoy more effective stereoscopic sound field. PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 56 ■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE) ❑ ENTERTAINMENT The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games. Sports This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts and light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’ voices are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the stadium is realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of the fans in a suitable space. Action Game This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field. Roleplaying Game This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction of background music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a clearer and more spatial sound field. Music Video This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as if you were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere thanks to the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence sound field that emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall. Recital/Opera This program controls the amount of reverberations at an optimum level and emphasizes the depth and clarity of human voices to offer the reverberations of an orchestra box in front the listener at the same time as providing the acoustic positioning and feeling of presence on the stage. The surround sound field is relatively moderate, but the data for concert hall effects are used to represent the inherent beauty of music. The listener will not be fatigued even after long hours of opera entertainment. Pavilion This program reproduces vocals clearly, letting you feel the spaciousness of a pavilion. Reverberation, which is somewhat delayed, reproduces the live acoustics unique to a pavilion, and helps to make concert scenes more exciting. Disco This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by high-energy, “immediate” sound. ❑ MOVIE THEATER Standard This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio, such as Dolby Digital and DTS. Its design is based on the concept of the ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right, and rear. Spectacle This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie productions. It delivers an expansive sound space to match the cinemascope wide-screen, and boasts a broad dynamic range, providing everything from small delicate sounds to powerful loud booms. Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialogue, sound effects, and background music. Adventure This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and adventure movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but puts emphasis on reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides, powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth creates a clear and powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation of the sounds and the separation of the channels. Drama Mono Movie This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects and background music are reproduced with a gentle echo that does not impinge on the articulation of the dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for long periods. This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies, in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a pleasant space with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate reverberation to the original audio. PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 57 ■ Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback (MUSIC) Church in Royaumont This program features the sound field created by the refectory (dining hall) of a beautiful medieval Gothic monastery located in Royaumont on the outskirts of Paris. Chamber This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber music. The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources. You can also select stereo playback. ❑ CLASSICAL ❑ LIVE/CLUB Hall in Munich A This sound field simulates a concert hall with approximately 2500 seats in Munich, using stylish wood for the interior finishing as normal standards for European concert halls. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the arena. Hall in Munich B This hall is frequently used for recording orchestral music, and is a shoe-box type concert hall with around 1300 seats. The hall is constructed from marble, resulting in relatively flat resonance. Further, the high ceiling causes sound to reverberate for longer than usual. Hall in Frankfurt Hall in Stuttgart Hall in Vienna This is a large shoe-box type concert hall with around 2400 seats located in Frankfurt. This hall has a very solid, powerful sound. The listener’s virtual seat is in the center-right section on the first floor. This is a large asymmetrical concert hall with around 2000 seats located in downtown Stuttgart. Sound reflected off the concrete wall located to the left of listeners has a powerful presence. This program simulates a 1,700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reverberations from all around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound. Hall in Amsterdam The large, shoe box shaped hall seats about 2,200 around the circle stage. Reflections are rich and pleasing while the sound travels freely. Hall in USA A This is a large 2600 seat concert hall in the United States which features a fairly traditional European design. The interior is relatively simple, in the American style. The middle and high frequencies are richly and beautifully reinforced. Hall in USA B This spacious arch-shaped hall has a dome ceiling and can seat 2600. The ample resonance apparent in the sound is a feature brought about by longer than average period of reverberation. In addition to this, the reflector suspended above the stage allows listeners to experience rich sound from the direction of the stage. Church in Tokyo The acoustic environment of an ordinary church with moderate reverberations. The reverberation lasts 2.5 seconds. This is ideal for reproducing church organ and choral music. Church in Freiburg Located in the south of Germany, this grand, stone-built church has a pointed tower at 120 meters in height. Its long and narrow shape and the high ceiling enable the elongated reverberation time and limited initial reflection time. Thus, the rich reverberation rather than the sound itself reproduces the atmosphere of the church. Village Gate This is the sound field at a jazz club that was in New York. It is in a basement and has a relatively spacious floor area. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall. Village Vanguard The Jazz club is on 7th Avenue, New York. This small club with the low ceiling makes the powerful reflections converge toward the stage located in the center. Warehouse Loft The warehouse resembles some lofts in Soho. Sound reflects off the concrete walls clearly with a lot of energy. Cellar Club This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds that make you feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small stage. The Roxy Theatre This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert venue in Los Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall. The Bottom Line This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound. Arena This program gives you long delays between direct sounds and effect sounds, with the extraordinarily spacious feel of a large arena. ❑ STEREO 2ch Stereo Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and output from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP). 11ch Stereo Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties. • CINEMA DSP HD³ (p.56) and Virtual CINEMA DSP (p.56) do not work when “2ch Stereo” or “11ch Stereo” is selected. PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 58 Enjoying unprocessed playback SOURCE RECEIVER You can play back input sources without any sound field effect processing. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 7 3 V-AUX 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] ■ Playing back in original channels (straight decode) AUDIO When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces stereo sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as CDs, and produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for multichannel sources. SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM 4 VOLUME MUTE TOP MENU 1 POP-UP/MENU ENTER RETURN For details on each decoder see “Glossary” (p.145). 1 Press SUR.DECODE to select a surround decoder. Each time you press the key, the surround decoder changes. HD 3 STRAIGHT DISPLAY The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel playback from 2-channel sources. When a multichannel source is input, it works the same way as the straight decode mode. DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP Press STRAIGHT. Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is enabled or disabled. OPTION ON SCREEN ■ Playing back 2-channel sources in multichannel (surround decoder) VOLUME L C R SL SW1 SR SBL SBR SUR.DECODE ProLogic bPro Logic bPLIIx Movie bPLII Movie MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Uses the Dolby Pro Logic decoder suitable for all sources. Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro Logic II decoder) suitable for movies. MODE bPLIIx Music CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT bPLII Music PRESET STRAIGHT TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH • To enable 6.1/7.1-channel playback from 5.1-channel sources when surround back speakers are used, set “Extended Surround” (p.92) in the “Option” menu to a setting other than “Off”. bPLIIx Game Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro Logic II decoder) suitable for music. bPLII Game Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro Logic II decoder) suitable for games. Neo:6 Cinema Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder suitable for movies. Neo:6 Music Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder suitable for music. MUTE SUR. DECODE ENHANCER PARTY INFO MEMORY FM 1 2 3 HDMI OUT SUR.DECODE • You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoders when headphones are connected or when “Surround Back” (p.107) in the “Setup” menu is set to “None”. AM TUN./ CH 4 5 7 8 6 9 10 0 ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP SLEEP PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 59 Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct) SOURCE RECEIVER When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays back the selected source with the least circuitry in order to reduce the electrical noise from other circuitry (such as the front display). It allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] 1 2 1 Each time you press the key, the Pure Direct mode is enabled or disabled. SCENE 3 PROGRAM 4 DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP VOLUME MUTE Press PURE DIRECT. PUREDIRECT HD 3 TOP MENU MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN • When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the following functions are not available. ENTER RETURN – Some settings for the speakers or sound programs DISPLAY – Operating the on-screen and “Option” menus – Using the multi-zone function MODE – Output from the AV OUT jacks CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT – Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation) Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the sound, allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original sound before it was compressed. This function can be used along with any other sound modes. In addition, Compressed Music Enhancer enhances the quality of uncompressed digital audio (such as 2-channel PCM and FLAC) when “Hi-Res Mode” (p.93) in the “Option” menu is set to “On” (default). 1 Press ENHANCER. Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer is enabled or disabled. DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP EnhancerOn HD 3 MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR PRESET “ENHANCER” lights up TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL PURE DIRECT TV CH MUTE • Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling rate is over 48 kHz. • You can also use “Enhancer” (p.93) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer. SUR. DECODE ENHANCER PARTY HDMI OUT INFO MEMORY FM AM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP ENHANCER TUN./ CH SLEEP PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 60 Listening to FM/AM radio SOURCE RECEIVER You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or selecting from registered radio stations. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 7 3 V-AUX 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] AUDIO TUNER SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM • If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM antennas. 4 1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 2 Press FM or AM to select a band. DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 SLEEP Setting the frequency steps VOLUME MUTE • The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is being used. The explanation of this section uses a display with frequencies used in U.K. and Europe models. Selecting a frequency for reception FM87.50MHz TOP MENU (Asia model only) POP-UP/MENU At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and 9 kHz for AM. Depending on your country or region, set the frequency steps to 100 kHz for FM and 10 kHz for AM. OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN SUR. MODE DECODE DISPLAY ENHANCER PARTY HDMI OUT INFO MEMORY FM AM 1 2 CLASSICAL LIVE 3 CLUB ENTERTAIN 5 MOVIE 6 STEREO STRAIGHT 8 9 PURE SLEEP DIRECT TV VOL TV CH TUN./ CH PRESET 4 7 INPUT 10 MUTE 0 FM AM 1 2 ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP Set the unit to standby mode. When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z. TUN./CH MAIN ZONE z Numeric keys TV MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR HD 3 STRAIGHT 3 Use the following keys to set a frequency. TUN./CH: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the key for about a second to search stations automatically. Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to select 98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT). DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 SLEEP HD 3 FM98.50MHz MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR “TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station. “STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received. PROGRAM 3 Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “TUNER FRQ STEP”. DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 SLEEP HD 3 4 5 TUNERFRQSTEP FM50/AM9 Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”. Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again. • “Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of reception range. • (U.S.A. model only) You can switch between “Auto” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM radio reception in “Audio Mode” (p.94) in the “Option” menu. When the signal reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it. (HD Radio programs are not available when the unit is in the monaural reception mode.) • (Except for U.S.A. model) You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM radio reception in “FM Mode” (p.94) in the “Option” menu. When the signal reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 61 Registering favorite radio stations (presets) SOURCE RECEIVER You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their preset numbers. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX ■ Selecting a preset station Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number. 1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 2 Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio station. AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] 1 2 TUNER • You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals and HD Radio stations (U.S.A. model only) by using “Auto Preset” (p.65, p.67). SCENE 3 PROGRAM 4 Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number. VOLUME MUTE TOP MENU 1 POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by using the numeric keys after pressing PRESET once. ■ Registering a radio station Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.61) to tune into the desired radio station. Preset DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 SLEEP HD 3 01:FM98.50MHz MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR ENTER • “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered. RETURN • (U.S.A. model only) To register a specific HD Radio program, select an audio program (p.63) after tuning into the radio station. DISPLAY MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE 2 Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds. • “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered. • “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered. • To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.65, p.67). The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most recently registered number. Preset number Preset SUR. DECODE ENHANCER PARTY HDMI OUT MEMORY DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 SLEEP HD 3 INFO MEMORY FM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 01:FM98.50MHz PresetOK MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR AM TUN./ CH Numeric keys SLEEP ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP • To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into the desired radio station, use PRESET or numeric keys to select a preset number, and then press MEMORY again. “Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered Preset DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 SLEEP HD 3 02:Empty FM98.50MHz MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 62 SOURCE RECEIVER 2 5 6 3 4 7 V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] 1 2 SCENE 3 PROGRAM 4 TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN (U.S.A. model only) You can select an audio program when the unit is tuned into an HD Radio station that provides multiple audio programs (up to 8). The unit is equipped with an HD Radio reception feature, facilitating CD quality FM broadcasts as well as analog FM stereo quality AM broadcasts. In addition, the unit can receive both audio and data (such as song titles, artist names, album titles and program types) from all HD Radio programs (HD1 to HD8). VOLUME MUTE ■ Selecting an HD Radio™ audio program HD Radio Technology is a new technology that enables FM/AM radio stations to broadcast programs digitally. Digital broadcasting provides listeners with radically improved audio quality and reception as well as new data services. Furthermore, supplemental program services allow listeners to select from up to 8 HD Radio programs multicast on a single FM HD Radio channel. For further information on HD Radio Technology, visit “http://www.ibiquity.com/”. AV 1 HD Radio™ tuning ENTER 1 Press MODE repeatedly to select a desired audio program. You can also enter an audio program number (1 to 8) directly by using the numeric keys. For example, to select program 3, press 3 and then ENT (or just leave it). DOCK TAG HD HD2/3 TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 2 3 4 SLEEP IN OUT 1 OUT 2 HD 3 FM88.9MHz3 WXYZ-FM MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR ■ Displaying the HD Radio™ information You can switch the HD Radio information displayed on the front display. RETURN DISPLAY 1 MODE MODE Program Service Data: Contributes to the superior user experience LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT Adjacent to traditional main stations are extra local FM channels. PRESET These HD2/HD3 Channels provide new, original music as well as deep cuts into traditional genre. TV PURE DIRECT TV VOL Each time you press the key, the item switches. of HD RadioTechnology. Presents song name, artist, station IDs, HD2/HD3 Channel Guide, and other relevant data streams. CLASSICAL INPUT Press INFO. DOCK TAG HD TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 2 3 4 SLEEP IN OUT 1 OUT 2 HD 3 Digital, CD-quality sound. HD Radio Technology enables local radio TV CH Info Category stations to broadcast a clean digital signal. AM sounds like today’s FM and FM sounds like a CD. MUTE MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Item name About 3 seconds later, the information is displayed. When tuning into an HD Radio station ENHANCER PARTY HDMI OUT INFO MEMORY FM AM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 SLEEP 10 0 ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP TUN./ CH INFO TUN./CH Numeric keys ENT DOCK TAG HD HD1/3 TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 SLEEP HD 3 FM88.9MHz1 WXYZ-FM “HD” lights up FM88.9-1 TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 2 3 4 SLEEP IN OUT 1 OUT 2 Relative/total program number (when multiple programs are available) SUR. DECODE DOCK TAG HD HD 3 MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Absolute program number (when multiple programs are available) WXYZ-FM RhythmandBlu MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Station Info Frequency, station name (call sign) Category Station name (call sign), program category Artist/Song Station name (call sign), artist name/song title Album Station name (call sign), album title DSP Program Frequency, sound program selected on the unit Audio Decoder Frequency, decoder selected on the unit • The unit is capable of receiving both hybrid and all-digital FM/AM radio stations. If you cannot search the desired all-digital HD Radio station by holding down TUN./CH, enter the frequency directly using the numeric keys. • When the unit is in the monaural reception mode (p.94), you can tune into the analog part of a hybrid HD Radio station only. • Some audio programs may not provide information depending on the station or period of time. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 63 ■ Holding HD Radio™ information display SOURCE RECEIVER You can hold the HD Radio information currently displayed on the TV (playback screen) and front display by using the hold function. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 When the desired HD Radio information is displayed, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Hold/Unhold” (Hold/Unhold) and press ENTER. AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] TUNER SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU 4 OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN • The hold function is automatically disabled if the unit is set to standby mode or if another input source or another radio station is selected. 3 “TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station. “STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received. Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. • Texts in parentheses denote indications on the front display. OPTION Lights up when an HD Radio station signal is received. 4 TUNED/STEREO indicators 5 Operation menu POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected band (FM/AM) and frequency. When tuning into an HD Radio station, the selected audio program number and HD Radio information (station name [call sign], program category, artist name, album name and song title) are also displayed. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information. 3 HD indicator The current information will remain displayed until “Hold/Unhold” is selected again. VOLUME 2 Radio station information Menu Submenu Function FM To exit from the menu, press OPTION. Switches to FM/AM. AM MODE Tuning (+/-) Selects a frequency. Auto (+/-) Selects a radio station automatically. Program (+/-) Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. Selects an audio program (when multiple audio programs are available). Memory Registers the selected station as presets. The playback screen is displayed on the TV. Direct Enters a frequency directly. ■ HD Radio™ operation on the TV CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE You can view the HD Radio information or select a radio station on the TV. Manual Tuning PURE DIRECT TV CH 1 ❑ Playback screen 1 2 3 4 Browse Moves to the browse screen (preset station list). Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. 5 1 HOLD indicator Flashes when the hold function (p.64) is enabled. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 64 ■ Browse screen SOURCE RECEIVER Radio Data System tuning (U.K. and Europe models only) 1 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 7 3 V-AUX 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] 3 AUDIO 2 SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM ■ Displaying the Radio Data System information 4 1 Preset station list VOLUME MUTE Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset station and press ENTER to tune into it. TOP MENU 1 Tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting station. POP-UP/MENU 2 Preset number OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY SUR. MODE DECODE ENHANCER PARTY HDMI OUT INFO MEMORY FM AM 1 2 CLASSICAL LIVE 3 CLUB ENTERTAIN Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. 6 STEREO Submenu Function Memory Registers the current station to the preset number selected in the list. 2 Press INFO. Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes. INFO TUN./ CH 5 MOVIE • We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System broadcasting stations (p.67). 3 Operation menu Menu PRESET 4 Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many countries. The unit can receive various types of Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station. STRAIGHT DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 SLEEP HD 3 TV 7 INPUT 10 MUTE Auto Preset Automatically registers HD Radio (FM/AM) stations and FM radio stations with strong signals (up to 40 stations). Clear Preset Clear the preset station selected in the list. Clear All Preset Clear all the preset stations. PURE SLEEP DIRECT 8 9 TV VOL TV CH 0 ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP Utility Info ProgramType MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Item name About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the displayed item appears. Frequency (always displayed) 1 Page Up 1 Page Down Moves to the previous/next page of the list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. • If HD Radio stations are detected by “Auto Preset”, only the audio program 1 (HD1) will be registered. If you want to register a specific HD Radio program, register it manually (p.62). DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 SLEEP HD 3 FM98.50MHz CLASSICS MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Information Program Service Program service name Program Type Current program type Radio Text Information on the current program Clock Time Current time DSP Program Sound mode name Audio Decoder Decoder name PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 65 Operating the radio on the TV SOURCE RECEIVER • “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System service. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] ■ Receiving traffic information automatically AUDIO TUNER SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU 4 VOLUME When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, the unit automatically receives traffic information. To enable this function, follow the procedure below to set the traffic information station. 1 When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Traffic Program” (TrafficProgram) and press ENTER. POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY OPTION Cursor keys ENTER RETURN The traffic information station search will start in 5 seconds. Press ENTER again to start the search immediately. You can view the radio information or select a radio station on the TV. • (U.S.A. model only) See “HD Radio™ operation on the TV” (p.64) to operate the radio on the TV. 1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. The playback screen is displayed on the TV. ■ Playback screen 3 1 2 4 MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH • To search upward/downward from the current frequency, press the cursor keys (q/w) while “READY” is displayed. • To cancel the search, press RETURN. • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. The following screen appears for about 3 seconds when the search finishes. Finished DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 SLEEP HD 3 TrafficProgram TPFM101.30MHz MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Traffic information station (frequency) 1 Radio station information Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected band (FM/AM) and frequency. (U.K. and Europe models only) When tuning into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.65), the Radio Data System information (“Program Service”, “Program Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”) is also displayed. 2 Band icon (Except for U.K. and Europe models) Select this icon and press ENTER to switch between FM and AM. • “TP Not Found” appears for about 3 seconds when no traffic information stations are found. 3 TUNED/STEREO indicators “TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station. “STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received. 4 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 66 Menu SOURCE RECEIVER Submenu Function FM AM (U.K. and Europe models only) Switches to FM/AM. Tuning (+/-) Selects a frequency. Auto (+/-) Selects a radio station automatically. Memory Registers the selected station as presets. Direct Enters a frequency directly. ■ Browse screen 1 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 7 3 V-AUX 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] Manual Tuning AUDIO 3 2 SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU 4 Browse Moves to the browse screen (preset station list). Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. VOLUME POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 1 Preset station list Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset station and press ENTER to tune into it. 2 Preset number 3 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. MODE Menu CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET Submenu Function Memory Registers the current station to the preset number selected in the list. Auto Preset Automatically registers FM radio stations with strong signals (up to 40 stations). Clear Preset Clear the preset station selected in the list. Clear All Preset Clear all the preset stations. TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH Utility 1 Page Up 1 Page Down Moves to the previous/next page of the list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. • (U.K. and Europe models only) Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by “Auto Preset”. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 67 Playing back iPod music You can play back iPod music on the unit using a USB cable supplied with the iPod. Connecting an iPod Connect your iPod to the unit with the USB cable supplied with the iPod. • An iPod may not be detected by the unit or some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or software version of the iPod. • To play back iPod videos on the unit, an Apple Composite AV Cable (not supplied) is required. Connect the USB and composite video plugs of the Apple Composite AV cable to the USB jack and VIDEO AUX (VIDEO) jack on the front panel. To select a video, operate the iPod itself in the simple play mode (p.70). Made for. 1 2 Connect the USB cable to the iPod. Connect the USB cable to the USB jack. The unit (front) iPod touch (1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th generation) iPod nano (2nd, 3rd, 4th 5th and 6th generation) iPhone 4S, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G, iPhone iPad (3rd generation), iPad2, iPad (as of June 2013) DOCK TAG HD IN OUT 1 OUT 2 PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 2 3 4 SLEEP HD 3 USB Connected MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR • The iPod charges while it is connected to the unit. If you set the unit to standby mode while the iPod is charging, the iPod continues to charge up to 4 hours. If “Network Standby” (p.115) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, it continues to charge without limit. • Disconnect the iPod from the USB jack when it is not in use. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 68 Playback of iPod content SOURCE RECEIVER ■ Browse screen 1 2 3 Follow the procedure below to operate the iPod contents and start playback. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX You can control the iPod with the menu displayed on the TV screen. AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] USB 1 5 Press USB to select “USB” as the input source. The browse screen is displayed on the TV. 4 SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE 4 1 Status indicators VOLUME Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.71) and playback status (such as play/pause). TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU 2 List name OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY 3 Contents list Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN Displays the list of iPod content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. 4 Item number/total MODE • If playback is ongoing on your iPod, the playback screen is displayed. CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH 2 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. 5 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Menu Function 1 Page Up Moves to the previous/next page of the list. 1 Page Down 10 Pages Up Moves 10 pages forward/backward. 10 Pages Down Return Returns to the higher-level list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. • To operate the iPod manually to select content or control playback, switch to the simple play mode (p.70). PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 69 ■ Playback screen SOURCE RECEIVER ■ Operating the iPod itself or remote control (simple play) 1 2 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] 1 To display the TV menu screen, press MODE again. 2 SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE 4 1 Status indicators VOLUME Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.71) and playback status (such as play/pause). TOP MENU The TV menu screen turns off and iPod operations are enabled. 3 AUDIO Press MODE to switch to the simple play mode. Operate your iPod itself or the remote control to start playback. Operational remote control keys Function Cursor keys Select an item. ENTER Confirms the selection. RETURN Returns to the previous screen. POP-UP/MENU 2 Playback information OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN External device operation keys MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET MODE Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining time. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information. 3 Operation menu a Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. Menu Submenu Function TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL Play Control Starts playback or stops playback temporarily. s Stops playback. f a Resumes playback from pause. g s Stops playback. h d Stops playback temporarily. j TV CH MUTE External device operation keys d Skips forward/backward. Searches forward/backward (by holding down). f g h j Skips forward/backward. Searches forward/backward (by holding down). Browse Moves to the browse screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. • You can also use the external device operation keys on the remote control to control playback. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 70 ■ Shuffle/repeat settings SOURCE RECEIVER You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings of your iPod. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX • During simple play, configure the shuffle/repeat settings directly on your iPod or press MODE to display the TV menu screen and then follow the procedure below. AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] 1 2 1 When “USB” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or “Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER. SCENE 3 PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU 4 VOLUME POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Cursor keys ENTER RETURN MODE MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. OPTION • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. Item Setting Function Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. Songs (Songs) Plays back songs in random order. “x” appears in the TV screen. Albums (Albums) Plays back albums in random order. “x” appears in the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c” appears in the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs repeatedly. “v” appears in the TV screen. PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL Shuffle (Shuffle) TV CH MUTE Repeat (Repeat) 4 To exit from the menu, press OPTION. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 71 Playing back music stored on a USB storage device SOURCE RECEIVER You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on the unit. Refer to the instruction manuals for the USB storage device for more information. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] 1 2 USB • Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack. • Disconnect the USB storage device from the USB jack when it is not in use. SCENE 3 PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU 4 VOLUME POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN • The unit supports WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC and FLAC files (1- or 2-channel audio only). • The unit is compatible with sampling rate of up to 192 kHz for WAV and FLAC files, and 48 kHz for other files. • Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer of the USB storage device. • Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back. CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT TV PURE DIRECT INPUT • Connect a USB memory device directly to the USB jack of the unit. Do not use extension cables. Playback of USB storage device contents Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device contents and start playback. Connecting a USB storage device You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed on the TV screen. 1 1 MODE PRESET • You cannot connect the PC to the USB jack of the unit. • The unit does not support a USB hub. DISPLAY TV VOL • If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In this case, “Loading...” appears in the front display. The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT16 or FAT32 format). Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack. Press USB to select “USB” as the input source. The browse screen is displayed on the TV. The unit (front) TV CH MUTE • If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is displayed. USB storage device DOCK TAG HD IN OUT 1 OUT 2 PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 2 3 4 SLEEP HD 3 USB Connected MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 72 2 SOURCE RECEIVER 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. AV 1 ■ Browse screen Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. 5 AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] 4 SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE 4 1 Status indicators VOLUME Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.74) and playback status (such as play/pause). TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU 2 List name OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY MODE Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 3 Contents list • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. • Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected. • If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during playback, playback stops automatically. 4 Item number/total 5 Operation menu CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL MUTE Menu Function TV CH 1 Page Up Moves to the previous/next page of the list. 1 Page Down 10 Pages Up Moves 10 pages forward/backward. 10 Pages Down Return Returns to the higher-level list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 73 ■ Playback screen SOURCE RECEIVER ■ Shuffle/repeat settings You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for playback of USB storage device contents. 1 2 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 3 AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] 1 When “USB” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or “Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER. SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE 4 1 Status indicators VOLUME • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.74) and playback status (such as play/pause). TOP MENU • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY OPTION Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN External device operation keys MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT 2 Playback information 3 Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information. Item 3 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. Menu Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. Submenu Function a Resumes playback from pause. s Stops playback. d Stops playback temporarily. Shuffle (Shuffle) PRESET TV Setting Function Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. On (On) Plays back songs in the current album (folder) in random order. “x” appears on the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c” appears on the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs in the current album (folder) repeatedly. “v” appears on the TV screen. PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE Play Control Repeat (Repeat) f g Skips forward/backward. Browse Moves to the browse screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. 4 To exit from the menu, press OPTION. • You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote control to control playback. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 74 Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) SOURCE RECEIVER 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 7 V-AUX 3 4 PHONO TUNER MULTI L USB NET [A] [B] [C] 1 2 Playback of PC music contents You can play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit. AV Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and start playback. AUDIO NET SCENE 3 PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU • To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router (p.37). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.123) in the “Information” menu. • The unit supports playback of WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC and FLAC files (1- or 2-channel audio only). 4 • The unit is compatible with sampling rates of up to 192 kHz for WAV and FLAC files, and 48 kHz for other files. VOLUME You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV screen. 1 The browse screen is displayed on the TV. • To play back FLAC files, you need to install server software that supports sharing of FLAC files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files. POP-UP/MENU Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the input source. OPTION ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH Media sharing setup To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS, first you need to configure the media sharing setting on each music server. ■ For a PC with Windows Media Player installed MUTE 1 2 Check that Windows Media Player 11 or later is installed on your PC. In the media sharing settings, enable media sharing and allow media to be shared with the device. • If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the playback screen is displayed. 2 Use the cursor keys to select a music server and press ENTER. ■ For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server software installed Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and configure the media sharing settings. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 75 3 SOURCE RECEIVER 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX ■ Browse screen 1 2 3 If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. AV 1 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. 5 AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] 4 SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE 4 1 Status indicators VOLUME Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.77) and playback status (such as play/pause). TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU 2 List name OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY MODE Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 3 Contents list • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. • Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected. • If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during playback, playback stops automatically. 4 Item number/total 5 Operation menu CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL MUTE Menu Function TV CH 1 Page Up Moves to the previous/next page of the list. 1 Page Down 10 Pages Up Moves 10 pages forward/backward. 10 Pages Down Return Returns to the higher-level list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 76 ■ Playback screen SOURCE RECEIVER ■ Shuffle/repeat settings You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for the playback of PC music content. 1 2 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 3 AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] 1 When “SERVER” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or “Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER. SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE 4 1 Status indicators VOLUME • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.77) and playback status (such as play/pause). TOP MENU • Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display. POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY OPTION Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN External device operation keys MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT 2 Playback information Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. Item 3 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. Menu 3 Submenu Function a Resumes playback from pause. s Stops playback. d Stops playback temporarily. Shuffle (Shuffle) PRESET TV Setting Function Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. On (On) Plays back songs in the current album (folder) in random order. “x” appears on the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c” appears on the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs in the current album (folder) repeatedly. “v” appears on the TV screen. PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE Play Control Repeat (Repeat) f g Skips forward/backward. Browse Moves to the browse screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. 4 To exit from the menu, press OPTION. • You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote control to control playback. • You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.97). PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 77 Listening to Internet radio SOURCE RECEIVER You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] NET 2 3 • To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.37). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.123) in the “Information” menu. Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the input source. The browse screen is displayed on the TV. • You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations. SCENE 1 1 • The unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service. 4 • This service may be discontinued without notice. PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 2 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to Internet radio En 78 ■ Browse screen SOURCE RECEIVER 1 2 3 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 2 3 4 MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] 4 SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU 4 VOLUME 1 Playback indicator 2 List name 2 Playback information Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information. 3 Contents list OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN External device operation keys MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT TV PURE DIRECT INPUT Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. 4 Item number/total 5 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Menu PRESET MUTE 1 Playback indicator POP-UP/MENU TV VOL 3 5 AUDIO 1 PHONO ■ Playback screen 3 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. Menu Submenu Function Play Control s Stops playback. Function Browse Moves to the browse screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. 1 Page Up Moves to the previous/next page of the list. TV CH 1 Page Down 10 Pages Up Moves 10 pages forward/backward. 10 Pages Down Return Returns to the higher-level list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. • You can also use the external device operation key (s) on the remote control to stop playback. • Some information may not be available depending on the station. • You can register your favorite Internet radio stations to the “Bookmarks” folder by selecting “NET RADIO” as the input source on the unit and then accessing the following website with the web browser on your PC. To use this feature, you need the unit’s vTuner ID and your e-mail address in order to create your personal account. You can find the vTunerID (MAC address of the unit) in “Network” (p.123) in the “Information” menu. http://yradio.vtuner.com/ PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to Internet radio En 79 Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes/iPod music on the unit via network. Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music contents on the unit. iTunes PC 1 Router Starts playback on iTunes or iPod The unit Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or display the playback screen on the iPod. If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon ( ) appears. iTunes (example) iPod (example) Playback starts iPod • To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same router (p.37). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.123) in the “Information” menu. AirPlay works with iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch with iOS 4.3.3 or later, Mac with OS X Mountain Lion, and Mac and PC with iTunes 10.2.2 or later. • If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are connected to the router properly. 2 (as of June 2013) On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and select the unit (network name of the unit) as the audio output device. iTunes (example) iPod (example) Network name of the unit 3 Select a song and start playback. The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and starts playback. The playback screen is displayed on the TV. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) En 80 Menu SOURCE RECEIVER • You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by setting “Network Standby” (p.115) in the “Setup” menu to “On”. • You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on iTunes/iPod in “Network Name” (p.116) in the “Setup” menu. AV 1 2 5 6 3 4 7 V-AUX • If you select the other input source on the unit during playback, playback on the iTunes/iPod stops automatically. AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] 1 2 Play Control • You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod during playback. To disable volume controls from iTunes/iPod, set “Volume Interlock” (p.96) in the “Input” menu to “Off”. Function a Resumes playback from pause. d Stops playback temporarily. f g Screen Off SCENE 3 Submenu Skips forward/backward. Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. 4 Caution PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU • When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be unexpectedly loud. This could result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the volume suddenly increases during playback, stop playback on the iTunes/iPod immediately. VOLUME POP-UP/MENU • You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote control to control playback. OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN External device operation keys MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT • To control iTunes playback with the remote control of the unit, you need to configure the iTunes preferences to enable iTunes control from remote speakers in advance. ■ Playback screen 1 2 iTunes (example of English version) 3 PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE 1 Playback indicator 2 Playback information Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining time. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information. Check this box 3 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) En 81 Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) The multi-zone function allows you to play back different input sources in the room where the unit is installed (main zone) and in other rooms (Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4). ■ Enjoying videos/music in other rooms For example, while you are watching TV in the living room (main zone), another person can listen to PC music in the study room (Zone2), and another can listen to radio in the guest room (Zone3) and play DVD in the kitchen (Zone4). ❑ Enjoying videos/music using a TV and speakers You can enjoy videos/music using TVs placed in other rooms. Video (ZONE OUT or HDMI) • Video/audio signals that can be output to each zone vary depending on how you connect the device in each zone to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see “Multi-zone output” (p.149). Audio (ZONE OUT) • Since there are many possible ways to use the unit in a multi-zone configuration, we recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about the multi-zone connections that best meet your requirements. Multi-zone configuration examples Guest room (Zone2 or Zone3) Living room (main zone) ■ Enjoying music in other rooms You can enjoy music using speakers placed in other rooms. Connections TV (for analog video playback): p.84 TV (for digital video playback): p.85 Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.83 ❑ Enjoying videos/music using only a TV Audio (ZONE OUT) Video/audio (HDMI) Study room (Zone2 and/or Zone3) Kitchen (Zone2 or Zone4) Living room (main zone) Connections Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.83 Living room (main zone) Connection TV: p.85 PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 82 Preparing the multi zone system Connect the device that will be used in other rooms to the unit. Caution • Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting an external amplifier. ■ Connecting an external amplifier and speakers to play back audio Connect the external amplifier placed in Zone2 or Zone3 to the unit with a stereo pin cable and connect speakers to the external amplifier. The unit (rear) ZONE OUT (ZONE 2 or ZONE 3) jacks L R External amplifier Audio input (analog stereo) L R AUDIO Zone2 or Zone3 Main zone PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 83 ■ Connecting a video monitor to play back analog videos Connect a video monitor to watch analog videos at Zone2 or Zone3. Depending on the video input jacks available on your video monitor, choose one of the video connection methods. ZONE OUT jacks (any of COMPONENT VIDEO, VIDEO, S VIDEO) Y MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT PB PR Video input (any of component video, composite video, S-video) PR PB Y COMPONENT VIDEO • The video conversion between the analog video jacks does not work for multi-zone video output. To watch videos played back on a video device on the zone video monitor, you need to connect the video monitor to the unit in the same way as the video device. For example, if you want to watch videos input from the DVD player via a component video cable, connect the video monitor to the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks with a component video cable. Y PR PB PR PB Y MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT VIDEO V V S • On-screen operations are not available for Zone3 when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.118) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”. S VIDEO The unit (rear) S Zone2 or Zone3 Main zone To assign the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks to the video monitor for Zone2 or Zone3, set “Monitor Out Assign” (p.118) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2” or “Zone3”. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 84 ■ Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back videos/audio Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as a TV) to play back videos/audio at Zone2 or Zone4. If you connect an AV amplifier, you can enjoy multi-channel playback in another room (Zone4). • When the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2, you can enable/disable the audio output from the HDMI OUT 2 jack by setting “Audio Output” (p.118) in the “Setup” menu to “On” or “Off” (default). • Videos/audio interruptions may happen in another zone when any of the following operations is performed. – Tuning on/off a TV connected to the unit via HDMI or switching the TV input • To watch videos played back on a video device at Zone2 or Zone4, you need to connect the video device to the unit with an HDMI cable (p.32). – Enabling/disabling a zone output or selecting its input source – Changing the sound mode or audio settings (such as “Extended Surround”) • We recommend that you disable HDMI Control on the playback devices connected to the unit. • On-screen operations are not available for Zone4. The unit (rear) HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack (Example: using a TV) HDMI input OUT HDMI 2 (ZONE OUT) HDMI HDMI Zone2 or Zone4 (Example: using an AV amplifier) HDMI input HDMI HDMI Main zone Zone4 To assign the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack to Zone2 or Zone4, set “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.118) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2” or “Zone4”. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 85 ■ Operating the unit from another room (remote connection) You can operate the unit and external devices from Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 using the supplied remote control if you connect an infrared signal receiver/emitter to the unit’s REMOTE IN/OUT 1 or REMOTE IN/OUT 2 jacks. Remote connections between Yamaha products An infrared signal transmitter is not required if you are using Yamaha products that support remote connections, as the unit does. You can transmit remote control signals by connecting the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks with monaural mini-jack cables and an infrared signal receiver. REMOTE IN/OUT jacks REMOTE • To operate external devices with the supplied remote control, you must register a remote control code for each device before using (p.128). REMOTE IN/OUT jacks REMOTE IN IN OUT OUT REMOTE IN/OUT 1–2 jacks The unit (rear) Infrared signal receiver Yamaha products (up to six, including the unit) IN 1 REMOTE OUT IN 2 OUT Remote control Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 Infrared signal transmitter Infrared signal receiver External device (such as a CD player) Remote control Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 Main zone PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 86 SOURCE RECEIVER RECEIVER z 1 AV 1 2 5 6 Controlling Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 3 4 7 V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] 1 2 Input selection keys 4 Start playback on the external device or select a radio station. Press ZONE repeatedly to select a zone. Refer to the instruction manual for the external device. Each time you press the key, the zone to be operated switches. For details on the following operations, see the corresponding pages. Selected zone (turns off when main zone is selected) • Listening to FM/AM radio (p.61) • Playing back iPod music (p.68) SCENE 3 PROGRAM RECEIVER 4 2 POP-UP/MENU ENTER RETURN HDMI OUT INFO MEMORY FM AM 1 2 CLASSICAL LIVE 3 CLUB ENTERTAIN 5 MOVIE 6 STEREO STRAIGHT PURE SLEEP DIRECT • When Zone3 output is enabled, the rear presence right/left channel output is not available in the main zone. TUN./ CH PRESET 4 3 TV 7 INPUT 10 MUTE • Listening to Internet radio (p.78) 8 9 TV VOL TV CH 0 ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP • Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) (p.80) When zone audio output is enabled, the corresponding zone indicator lights up in the front display. DISPLAY PARTY Press RECEIVER z. Each time you press the key, the selected zone is enabled or disabled. OPTION ON SCREEN ENHANCER • Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) (p.75) VOLUME MUTE TOP MENU SUR. MODE DECODE • Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.72) Use the input selection keys to select an input source. ZONE • You can also use the web control to control Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4. For details on the web control function, refer to “Supplement for Web Control” on the CD-ROM. • AirPlay is available in Zone2 and Zone3 only when AirPlay playback is ongoing in the main zone. Caution • To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4. • Video/audio signals that can be output to each zone vary depending on how you connect the device in each zone to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see “Multi-zone output” (p.149). • You cannot select USB and network sources exclusively for each zone. For example, if you select “SERVER” for Zone2 when “USB” is selected for the main zone, the input source for the main zone also switches to “SERVER”. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 87 SOURCE RECEIVER AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 7 V-AUX 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] 1 2 PROGRAM VOLUME MUTE TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU SUR. MODE DECODE MUTE PARTY HDMI OUT INFO MEMORY FM AM 1 2 CLASSICAL LIVE 3 CLUB ENTERTAIN 5 MOVIE 6 STEREO STRAIGHT PURE SLEEP DIRECT 4 PARTY 10 MUTE 8 9 TV VOL TV CH 0 ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP • To register the current settings (input source, volume and tone control) to a scene, hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front display. (Only an input source can be registered for Zone4.) Adjusting the high-/low-frequency range of sounds (for Zone2 and Zone3 only) a Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel to select the zone to be operated. TV 7 INPUT Press PARTY. Each time you press the key, the party mode is turned on or off. Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off). TUN./ CH PRESET 1 When the party mode is turned on, “PARTY” lights up in the front display. Setting the sleep timer DISPLAY ENHANCER Press SCENE. VOLUME ENTER RETURN The party mode allows you to play back in all zones the same music that is being played back in the main zone. During the party mode, stereo playback is automatically selected for all zones. Utilize this function when you want to use main zone music as background music for a house party. Selecting the input source and settings at once (SCENE) SCENE OPTION ON SCREEN The following functions are also available when the zone you want to operate is enabled. Press VOLUME or MUTE. SCENE 4 ■ Enjoying the same source in multiple rooms (party mode) Adjusting the volume (for Zone2 and Zone3 only) AUDIO 3 ■ Other operations for Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 SLEEP • You can select the zones to be included in the party mode in “Party Mode Set” (p.118) in the “Setup” menu. • Zone4 output is available only when an HDMI input is selected in the main zone. b Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”. c Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment. Setting range -10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (2.0 dB increments) Default 0.0 dB Adjusting the front speaker balance (for Zone2 and Zone3 only) a Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel to select the zone to be operated. b Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Balance”. c Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 88 Viewing the current status SOURCE RECEIVER Switching information on the front display AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX Input source group AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] 1 2 1 Press INFO. Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes. USB SERVER AirPlay SCENE 3 4 DOCK TAG HD IN OUT 1 OUT 2 PROGRAM VOLUME MUTE TOP MENU PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 2 3 4 SLEEP HD 3 ENTER DISPLAY DISPLAY DOCK TAG HD PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 SLEEP SUR. MODE DECODE ENHANCER PARTY MEMORY FM AM 1 2 CLASSICAL LIVE 3 CLUB ENTERTAIN 5 MOVIE 6 STEREO STRAIGHT 8 9 PURE SLEEP DIRECT TV VOL TV CH NET RADIO INFO AV1 ProLogic * The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no audio decoder is activated, “Decoder Off” appears. Viewing the status information on the TV MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Information 1 Press DISPLAY. The following information is displayed on the TV. Compressed Music Enhancer/Hi-Res mode status TV 7 INPUT 10 MUTE Song (song title), Album (album name), Station (station name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) TUN./ CH PRESET 4 HD 3 HDMI OUT INFO PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the displayed item appears. OPTION RETURN MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC * During simple playback of iPod: DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) Item name POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Info AudioDecoder Item Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) 0 ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP • Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed item can also be applied separately to each input source group. Input source group Item AV 1–7 V-AUX AUDIO 1–4 PHONO DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) TUNER * (U.S.A. model only) HD Radio data is also available when the unit is tuned into an HD Radio station (p.63). * (U.K. and Europe models only) Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.65). Input source/ Party mode status Volume Audio format/ Decoder Sound mode CINEMA DSP status 2 To close the information display, press DISPLAY. PLAYBACK ➤ Viewing the current status En 89 Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This menu is available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily configure settings during playback. 1 Press OPTION. Option menu items • Available items vary depending on the selected input source. • Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display. DOCK TAG HD IN OUT 1 OUT 2 PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 2 3 4 SLEEP HD 3 Option ToneControl MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Front display Item Function Page Tone Control (Tone Control) Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range of sounds. 91 Adaptive DRC (Adaptive DRC) Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume is adjusted. 91 CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (CINEMA DSP 3D) Enables/disables CINEMA DSP HD³. 91 Dialogue Level Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. Dialogue Adjust (Dialog Lvl) (Dialog Adjust) Dialogue Lift Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. (Dialog Lift) TV screen 2 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. Extended Surround (EXTD Surround) Volume Trim (Volume Trim) 3 4 92 Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources when surround back speakers are used. 92 Corrects volume differences between input sources. 92 Subwoofer Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. Trim (SW.Trim) 93 Enhancer (Enhancer) Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer. 93 Hi-Res Mode (HiRes Mode) Enables/disables the high-resolution mode (for enhancing the quality of uncompressed digital audio). 93 Video Mode (Video Mode) Enables/disables the video signal processing settings configured in the “Setup” menu. 93 Video Adjustment (Video Adjust) Selects a video adjustment setting from presets. 93 Audio Select (Audio Select) Selects the audio input jack to use when more than one audio connection is made for one input source. 93 Audio Mode (Audio Mode) (U.S.A. model only) Switches between stereo and monaural for FM/AM radio reception. 94 • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. Input Trim (In.Trim) 92 Enhancer (Enhancer) To exit from the menu, press OPTION. PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 90 Item Function Page FM Mode (FM Mode) (Except for U.S.A. model) Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception. 94 Hold/Unhold (Hold/Unhold) (U.S.A. model only) Enables/disables the hold function when the unit is tuned into an HD Radio station. 64 Traffic Program (TrafficProgram) (U.K. and Europe models only) Automatically searches for a traffic information station. 66 Shuffle (Shuffle) Configures the shuffle setting for the iPod (p.71), USB storage device (p.74), or media server (p.77). — Repeat (Repeat) Configures the repeat setting for the iPod (p.71), USB storage device (p.74), or media server (p.77). — Default Bypass (Bypass) • If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels. On (On) Automatically adjusts the dynamic range. Off (Off) (default) The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted. If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide at a high volume. On Off Input level Volume: high Output level Output level Volume: low Adjusts the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds. Setting range -6.0 dB to Bypass (Bypass) to +6.0 dB, 0.5 dB increments Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for listening to playback at a low volume at night. Settings ■ Tone Control (Tone Control) Choices Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass) ■ Adaptive DRC (Adaptive DRC) On Off Input level ■ CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (CINEMA DSP 3D) Enables/disables CINEMA DSP HD³ (p.56). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA DSP HD³ functions with the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 11ch Stereo). Settings On (On) (default) Enables CINEMA DSP HD³. Off (Off) Disables CINEMA DSP HD³. Adjusting with the front panel controls a Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”. b Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment. PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 91 ■ Dialogue Adjust (Dialog Adjust) ■ Extended Surround (EXTD Surround) Adjusts the volume or perceive height of dialogue sounds. Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources when surround back speakers are used. ❑ Dialogue Level (Dialog Lvl) Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. If dialogue sounds cannot be heard clearly, you can turn up its volume by increasing this setting. Setting range 0 to 3 Default 0 Settings Auto (Auto) (default) Automatically selects the most suitable decoder if signals that contain surround back channel signals are input, and reproduces the signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel. If two surround back speakers are connected, the unit reproduces the 5.1-channel signals in 7.1-channel. bPLIIx Movie (bPLIIxMo) Always reproduces signals in 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie decoder. This setting is available only when two surround back speakers are connected. bPLIIx Music (bPLIIxMu) Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music decoder. This setting is available only when one or two surround back speakers are connected. EX/ES (EX/ES) Automatically selects the Dolby EX or DTS-ES decoder, and reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel. Off (Off) Always reproduces signals in their original channels. (Even when DTS-ES or Dolby Digital Surround EX signal is input, the unit reproduces the signal in 5.1-channel.) ❑ Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift) Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. If the dialogue sounds as if it is coming from below the TV screen, you can raise its perceived height by increasing this setting. • This setting is available only when one of the following conditions is met. – One of the sound programs (except for 2ch Stereo and 11ch Stereo) is selected when front presence speakers are used. – Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.56) is working. (You may hear dialogue sounds from the surround speakers depending on the listening position.) • Some early Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS-ES sources do not contain a flag for reproducing surround back channel. We recommend you set “Extended Surround” to “bPLIIx Movie” or “EX/ES” when playing back those sources. Setting range 0 to 5 (The bigger the value the higher the position) Default 0 ■ Volume Trim (Volume Trim) Fine-adjusts volume difference between input sources or subwoofer volume. ❑ Input Trim (In.Trim) Ideal position Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it. • This setting is applied separately to each input source. Setting range -6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) Default 0.0 dB PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 92 ❑ Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim) ■ Video Mode (Video Mode) Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video adjustments) settings configured in “Processing” (p.111) in the “Setup” menu. Setting range -6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) Settings Default 0.0 dB ■ Enhancer (Enhancer) Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer and the high-resolution mode. ❑ Enhancer (Enhancer) Processing (Processing) Enables the video signal processing. Direct (Direct) (default) Disables the video signal processing. ■ Video Adjustment (Video Adjust) Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.60). Selects a video adjustment setting from presets you have configured in “Adjustment” (p.112) in the “Setup” menu. • This setting is applied separately to each input source. • This setting is applied separately to each input source. • You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.60). Settings Off (Off) Disables Compressed Music Enhancer. On (On) Enables Compressed Music Enhancer. Settings 1 to 6 ■ Audio Select (Audio Select) Selects the audio input jack to use when more than one audio connection is made for one input source. Default TUNER, USB, (network sources): On (On) Others: Off (Off) • This setting is applied separately to each input source. Settings • Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling rate is over 48 kHz. ❑ Hi-Res Mode (HiRes Mode) Enables/disables the high-resolution mode when “Enhancer” is set to “On”. If this function is set to “On”, you can enhance the quality of uncompressed digital audio (such as 2-channel PCM and FLAC) using Compressed Music Enhancer. Settings Off (Off) Disables the high-resolution mode. On (On) (default) Enables the high-resolution mode. Auto (Auto) (default) Automatically selects the audio input jack in the following priority order. 1. HDMI input 2. Digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL) 3. Analog input (AUDIO [RCA or XLR]) HDMI (HDMI) Always selects HDMI input. No sounds are produced when no signals are input through the HDMI jack. Coax/Opt (Coax/Opt) Always selects digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL). No sounds are produced when no signals are input through the COAXIAL or OPTICAL jack. Analog (Analog) Always selects analog input (AUDIO [RCA or XLR]). No sounds are produced when no signals are input through the AUDIO (RCA or XLR). PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 93 ■ Audio Mode (Audio Mode) (U.S.A. model only) Switches between stereo and monaural for FM/AM radio reception. • This setting is applied separately to each band (FM/AM). Settings Auto (Auto) (default) Receives the selected band (FM or AM) in stereo sounds when the signal reception is good and in monaural sounds when it is not good. Mono (Mono) Receives the selected band (FM or AM) in monaural sounds. • HD Radio programs are not available when the unit is in the monaural reception mode. ■ FM Mode (FM Mode) (Except for U.S.A. model) Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception. Settings Stereo (Stereo) (default) Receives FM radio in stereo sounds. Mono (Mono) Receives FM radio in monaural sounds. PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 94 CONFIGURATIONS Configuring input sources (Input menu) 4 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER. You can change the input source settings using the TV screen. 1 2 Press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER. • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. 3 5 6 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an input source to be configured and press the cursor key (q). Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Input menu items • Available items vary depending on the selected input source. Item Function Rename/Icon Select Changes the input source name and icon. 96 Decoder Mode Sets the format of digital audio playback to DTS. 96 Volume Interlock Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay. 96 Video Out Selects a video to be output with the audio input source. 96 DMC Control Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. 97 Balance Input Attenuator Selects whether to activate the attenuator for the balance input to avoid sound distortion. 97 The input source of the unit also changes. • You can still switch the input source by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3. CONFIGURATIONS Page ➤ Configuring input sources (Input menu) En 95 ■ Rename/Icon Select ■ Decoder Mode Changes the input source name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen. Sets the format of digital audio playback to “DTS”. Input sources AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4, PHONO, USB, MULTI CH ■ Setup procedure 1 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a template and press the cursor key (w). For example, if the unit does not detect DTS audio and outputs noise, set “Decoder Mode” to “DTS”. Input sources AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4 (available only when any audio digital input jack is assigned) Settings Auto (default) Automatically selects an audio format to match the input audio signal. DTS Selects DTS only. (Other audio signals are not reproduced.) ■ Volume Interlock Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay. Input sources AirPlay Settings 2 3 4 • You cannot change the template or icon for “USB” when an iPod is connected. Off Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w). Limited (default) Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod within the limited range (-80 dB to 0 dB and mute). Full Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod in the full range (-80 dB to +16.5 dB and mute). Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry. ■ Video Out Selects a video to be output with the audio input source. Input sources TUNER, (network sources), USB, MULTI CH Settings • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. 5 Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. Off Does not output video. AV 1–7, V-AUX Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks. Default USB: V-AUX Others: Off • To restore the default setting, select “RESET”. 6 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring input sources (Input menu) En 96 ■ DMC Control Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. Input source SERVER Settings Disable Does not allow DMCs to control playback. Enable (default) Allows DMCs to control playback. Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) You can change the settings of the SCENE function (p.53) using the TV screen. 1 2 Press ON SCREEN. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a scene to be configured and press the cursor key (q). 4 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER. Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER. • A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network. When this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media Player 12) on the same network. ■ Balance Input Attenuator Selects whether to activate the attenuator for the balance input (AUDIO 4) so that you can avoid sound distortion when high-level signals are input. Activate the attenuator when connecting an audio device which outputs signals of 3 V (RMS) or higher to the AUDIO 4 (XLR balanced input) jacks (p.34). Input source AUDIO 4 Settings Bypass (default) Does not activate the attenuator for the balance input. ATT.(-6dB) Activates the attenuator for the balance input to reduce the signal level (-6dB). CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) En 97 5 6 ■ Load Use the cursor keys and ENTER to change the setting. Loads the settings registered for the selected scene. Select “DETAIL” to configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the scene assignments. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. ❑ Device Control Scene menu items Item Function Save Registers the current settings in the selected scene. Page 98 Load Loads the settings registered for the selected scene. You can also configure the SCENE link playback setting, select items to be included as the scene assignments, or view the settings currently assigned to the selected scene. 98 Rename/Icon Select Changes the scene name and icon. 99 Reset Restores the default settings for the selected scene. 99 ■ Save Registers the unit’s current settings (such as input source and sound program) in the selected scene. Recalls a selected scene and starts its playback on an external device connected to the unit via HDMI. (SCENE link playback) Settings Off Disables the SCENE link playback function. HDMI Control Enables SCENE link playback using HDMI Control signals. Select this if an HDMI Control-compatible device (such as a BD/DVD player) is connected to the unit via HDMI. It also turns on the TV if it supports HDMI Control. Default SCENE1 (BD/DVD), SCENE2 (TV): HDMI Control SCENE3 (NET), SCENE4 (RADIO), SCENE5–12: Off • To control playback of an HDMI Control-compatible device by SCENE link playback, you need to set “HDMI Control” in the “Setup” menu to “On” and perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.150). • If you have changed the input assignment for a scene, you also need to change the external device assigned to the corresponding SCENE key (p.54). CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) En 98 ❑ Detail ■ Rename/Icon Select Selects items to be included as the scene assignments. You can also view the settings currently assigned to the selected scene. Changes the scene name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen. To include items as the scene assignments, use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to check the box (or uncheck the box to exclude). For example, if you often adjust the volume while watching TV but listen to radio with low volume at night, exclude “Volume” from the assignments for SCENE2 (TV) and include “Volume” in the assignments for SCENE4 (RADIO). ■ Setup procedure 1 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w). 2 3 Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Check or uncheck Choices Input Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry. Input (p.52), Audio Select (p.93) HDMI Output HDMI Output (p.52) Mode Sound Program (p.55), Pure Direct Mode (p.110), Enhancer (p.60), Enhancer Hi-Res Mode (p.93) Sound Tone Control (p.91), Adaptive DRC (p.91) Surround CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (p.91), Dialogue Lift (p.92), Dialogue Level (p.92), Subwoofer Trim (p.93), Extended Surround (p.92) Video Video Mode (p.111), Video Adjustment (p.93) Volume Master Volume (p.52) Lipsync Lipsync (p.109), Delay (p.110) Speaker Setup Setting Pattern (p.106), PEQ Select (p.108) • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. 4 Default Input, HDMI Output, Mode: selected Sound, Surround, Video, Volume, Lipsync, Speaker Setup: not selected Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. • To restore the default setting, select “RESET”. 5 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. ■ Reset Restores the default settings (p.53) for the selected scene. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) En 99 Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) 4 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER. You can change the settings of the sound programs and surround decoders using the TV screen. 1 2 Press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys to select “Sound Program” and press ENTER. • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. • To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”. 5 6 3 Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a sound program to be configured and press the cursor key (q). • You can still switch the sound program by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) En 100 Sound Program menu items • Available items and the default settings vary depending on the selected sound program or surround decoder. ■ Settings for sound programs Item Decode Type Function DSP Level Adjusts the sound field effect level. -6 dB to +3 dB (default: 0 dB) Higher to enhance the sound field effect, and lower to reduce it. Initial Delay Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and presence sound field generation. 1 ms to 99 ms Higher to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it. Surround Initial Delay Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and surround sound field generation. Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and surround back sound field generation. Room Size Adjusts the broadening effect of the presence sound field. Surround Room Size Adjusts the broadening effect of the surround sound field. Surround Back Room Size Adjusts the broadening effect of the surround back sound field. Function Liveness Adjusts the loss of the presence sound field. Surround Liveness Adjusts the loss of the surround sound field. Surround Back Liveness Adjusts the loss of the surround back sound field. Reverb Time Adjust the decay time of the rear reverberant sound. 1.0 s to 5.0 s Higher to enrich the reverberant sound and lower to have clear sound. Reverb Delay Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and reverberant sound generation. 0 ms to 250 ms Higher to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it. Reverb Level Adjusts the volume of the reverberant sound. 0% to 100% Higher to strengthen the reverberant sound, and lower to weaken it. Settings bPro Logic*, bPLIIx Movie (bPLII Movie), bPLIIx Music* (bPLII Selects a surround decoder to be used Music*), in combination with the selected sound bPLIIx Game* (bPLII Game*), program. Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music* (* Available only when “SURROUND DECODER” is selected) Surround Back Initial Delay Item Settings 0 to 10 Higher to enhance the reflectivity, and lower to reduce it. 1 ms to 49 ms Higher to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it. 0.1 to 2.0 Higher to enhance the broadening effect, and lower to reduce it. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) En 101 The following items are available when you select “2ch Stereo” or “11ch Stereo”. Sound program 2ch Stereo The following items are available when you set “Decode Type” of “SURROUND DECODER” to “bPLIIx Music” (bPLII Music) or “Neo:6 Music”. Item Function Settings Direct Selects whether to automatically bypass the DSP circuit when an analog audio source is played back. Auto (default), Off Level Front / Rear Balance Left / Right Balance ■ Settings for decoders Decode Type Adjusts the entire volume. -5 to +5 (default: 0) Adjusts the front and rear volume balance. Adjusts the right and left volume balance. -5 to +5 (default: 0) Higher to enhance the front side, and lower to enhance the rear side. bPLIIx Music (bPLII Music) -5 to +5 (default: 0) Higher to enhance the right side, and lower to enhance the left side. 11ch Stereo Height Balance Monaural Mix Adjust the height volume balance using the presence speakers. 0 to 10 (default: 5) Higher to enhance the upside, and lower to enhance the downside. (The presence speakers do not produce sounds when “Height Balance” is set to “0”.) Enables/disables monaural sound output. Off (default), On Neo:6 Music Item Function Settings Panorama Adjusts the broadening effect of the front sound field. Off (default), On Select “On” to wrap front right/left channel sounds around the field and generate a spacious sound field in combination with the surround sound field. Center Width Adjusts the broadening effect of the center sound field. 0 to 7 (default: 3) Higher to enhance the broadening effect, and lower to reduce it (closer to center). Dimension Adjusts the difference in level between the front and surround sound fields. -3 to +3 (default: 0) Higher to strengthen the front sound field and lower to strengthen the surround sound field. Center Image Adjusts the center orientation level (broadening effect) of the front sound field. 0.0 to 1.0 (default: 0.3) Higher to strengthen the center orientation level (less broadening effect) and lower to weaken (more broadening effect). • Available items in “11ch Stereo” vary depending on the speaker system being used. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) En 102 Configuring various functions (Setup menu) You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen. 1 2 Press ON SCREEN. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a menu. 4 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER. • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. 5 6 Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 103 Setup menu items Menu Item Function Auto Setup Setting Pattern Configuration Manual Setup Lipsync Automatically optimizes the speaker settings (YPAO). 41 Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them. 106 Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction. 106 Front Selects the size of the front speakers. 106 Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. 106 Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size. 107 Setting Data Copy Speaker Page Surround Back Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size. 107 Front Presence Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected. 107 Rear Presence Selects whether or not rear presence speakers are connected. 107 Subwoofer 1 Subwoofer 2 Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack and its phase. 107 SWFR Layout Selects a subwoofer layout when 2 subwoofers are used. 108 Extra Bass Sets the speakers to produce the front channel low-frequency components. 108 Distance Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position. 108 Level Adjusts the volume of each speaker. 108 Parametric EQ Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. 108 Test Tone Enables/disables the test tone output. 109 Delay Enable Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source. 109 Auto/Manual Select Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. 109 Adjustment Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually. 110 Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. 110 Max Volume Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. 110 Initial Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. 110 Pure Direct Mode Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode. 110 Adaptive DSP Level Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level. 110 VPS Selects whether to create Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers. 111 DAC Digital Filter Selects the digital filter type of the audio DAC (digital-to-analog converter). 111 Analog to Analog Conversion Enables/disables the video conversion between the analog video jacks 111 Video Mode Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video adjustments). 111 Sound Video CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 104 Menu Item Function Page HDMI Control Enables/disables HDMI Control. You can also configure the relevant settings (such as ARC and TV audio input). 113 HDMI Audio Output Selects a device to output audio. 114 Standby Through Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. 114 IP Address Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). 115 Network Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices. 115 MAC Address Filter Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. 115 Network Name Network Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. 116 Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 116 Volume Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output. 117 Max Volume Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness in the second zone. 117 Initial Volume Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 initial volume for when the unit is turned on. 117 Mono Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 or Zone3 output. 117 Zone Scene Rename Changes the scene names (for Zone2 or Zone3) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 117 Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for Zone2 or Zone3) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 117 Zone Scene Rename Changes the scene names (for Zone4) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 118 Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for Zone4) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 118 Monitor Out Assign Select the zone for which the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks are used. 118 HDMI OUT2 Assign Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used. 118 Party Mode Set Enables/disables switching to the party mode for each zone. 118 Input Assignment Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input source. 119 Dimmer (Front Display) Adjusts the brightness of the front display. 119 Short Message Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated. 119 Wallpaper Main Zone Set Zone2 Set Zone3 Set Multi Zone Zone4 Set Display Set Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV. 119 Trigger Output1 Trigger Mode Trigger Output2 Target Zone Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function. 120 Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized. 120 DC OUT Selects how to supply power through the DC OUT jack. 120 Memory Guard Prevents accidental changes to the settings. 121 Auto Power Standby Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. 121 Select an on-screen menu language. 122 Function ECO Language Power Mode CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 105 Speaker (Manual Setup) Configures the speaker settings manually. ■ Configuration Configures the output characteristics of the speakers. • When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm (6-1/4”) or larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”). ❑ Front Selects the size of the front speakers. Settings Large Select this option for large speakers. The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency components. Small (default) Select this option for small speakers. The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz). ■ Setting Pattern Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them. When you configure the following speaker settings, the settings will be memorized in the selected pattern. • Measurement results (Auto Setup) • Configuration • “Front” is automatically set to “Large” when both “Subwoofer 1” and “Subwoofer 2” are set to “None”. • Distance ❑ Center • Level Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. Settings • Parametric EQ Settings Pattern1 (default), Pattern2 • The setting pattern currently selected is shown at the top of the “Auto Setup” and “Manual Setup” screens. • This function is useful when you want to save certain settings according to the varying conditions of your listening environment. For example, if you want to switch the settings when curtains are open or closed, you can save the settings suited for each condition and switch between them. Large Select this option for large speakers. The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency components. Small (default) Select this option for small speakers. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz). None Select this option when no center speaker is connected. The front speakers will produce center channel audio. ■ Setting Data Copy Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction. Choices Pattern1 > 2 Copies the “Pattern1” parameters to “Pattern2”. Pattern2 > 1 Copies the “Pattern2” parameters to “Pattern1”. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 106 ❑ Surround ❑ Front Presence Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes. Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected. Settings Settings Large Select this option for large speakers. The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel frequency components. Small (default) Select this option for small speakers. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz). None Select this option when no surround speakers are connected. The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program. Use (default) Select this option when front presence speakers are connected. None Select this option when no front presence speakers are connected. ❑ Rear Presence Selects whether or not rear presence speakers are connected. Settings Use (default) Select this option when rear presence speakers are connected. None Select this option when no rear presence speakers are connected. ❑ Surround Back Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their sizes. • This setting is not available when “Surround” or “Front Presence” is set to “None”. Settings Large x1 Select this option when one large speaker is connected. The surround back speaker will produce all of the surround back channel frequency components. Large x2 Select this option when two large speakers are connected. The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back channel frequency components. Small x1 Select this option when one small speaker is connected. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz). Small x2 (default) None ❑ Subwoofer 1, Subwoofer 2 Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack and its phase. Settings Select this option when a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack (phase not reversed). The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels. Reverse Select this option when a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack (phase reversed). The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels. Use Select this option when two small speakers are connected. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz). Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected. The surround speakers will produce surround back channel audio. Normal (default) None Select this option when no subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack. The front speakers will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels when both “Subwoofer 1” and “Subwoofer 2” are set to “None”. • This setting is not available when “Surround” is set to “None”. • When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 107 ❑ SWFR Layout ■ Level Selects a subwoofer layout when 2 subwoofers are used. Adjusts the volume of each speaker. Settings Choices Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R, Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Rear Presence L, Rear Presence R, Subwoofer 1, Subwoofer 2 Left + Right Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed on the left and right sides of the room. Front + Rear Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed on the front and rear sides of the room. Setting range -10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) Monaural x2 (default) Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed freely. Default 0.0 dB • This setting is not available when “Subwoofer 1” or “Subwoofer 2” is set to “None”. Adjusting while viewing the front display a Press LEVEL. ❑ Extra Bass b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a speaker. Sets the speakers to produce the front channel low-frequency components. c Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the volume of the selected speaker. Settings Off (default) Depending on the size of the front speakers, either the subwoofer or front speakers produce the front channel low-frequency components. On Both the front speakers and subwoofer produce the front channel low-frequency components. ■ Parametric EQ Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. Settings • This setting is not available when both “Subwoofer 1” and “Subwoofer 2” are set to “None”, or when “Front” is set to “Small”. ■ Distance Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance from “Meter” or “Feet”. Choices Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R, Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Rear Presence L, Rear Presence R, Subwoofer 1, Subwoofer 2 Setting range 0.30 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 80.0 ft), 0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments Default 3.00 m (10.0 ft) Manual Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually. For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”. YPAO:Flat Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics. YPAO:Front Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics as the front speakers. YPAO:Natural Adjusts all speakers to achieve a natural sound. Through Does not use the equalizer. • “YPAO:Flat”, “YPAO:Front”, and “YPAO:Natural” are available only when the measurement results of “Auto Setup” have already been saved (p.41). Press ENTER again to view the measurement results. ■ Manual equalizer adjustment 1 2 3 Set “Parametric EQ” to “Manual” and press ENTER. Press ENTER again to enter the edit screen. Use the cursor keys to select a speaker and press ENTER. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 108 Sound • To restore the default settings for all speakers, select “PEQ Data Clear” and then “OK”. • To copy the parametric equalizer values acquired with “Auto Setup” (p.41) to the “Manual” fields for fine adjustment, select “PEQ Data Copy” and then an equalizer type. 4 Configures the audio output settings. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a center frequency from the 7 preset bands (4 for subwoofer) and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain. ■ Lipsync Adjusts the delay between video and audio by holding up the audio output. Setting range Gain: -20.0 dB to +6.0 dB 5 To fine-adjust the center frequency or Q factor (bandwidth), press ENTER repeatedly to select an item. Frequency: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the center frequency of the selected band and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain. Q: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the Q factor (bandwidth) of the selected band and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain. 6 ❑ Delay Enable Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source. Choices AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4 Settings Disable Disable the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source. Enable (default) Enables the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source. Setting range Center frequency: 31.3 Hz to 16.0 kHz (31.3 Hz to 250.0 Hz for subwoofer) Q factor: 0.500 to 10.080 ❑ Auto/Manual Select To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. Setting range ■ Test Tone Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker balance or equalizer while confirming its effect. Auto (default) Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when a TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the unit via HDMI. If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”. Manual Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video and audio output manually. Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”. Settings Off (default) Does not output test tones. On Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance or equalizer. • Even if “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, the automatic adjustment does not work depending on the TV connected to the unit. In this case, adjust the delay manually in “Adjustment”. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 109 ❑ Adjustment ■ Initial Volume Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”. Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on. Settings Off (default) Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby mode. On Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80.0 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB increments). (Specify a volume level which is lower than the “Max Volume” setting.) ■ Pure Direct Mode Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode (p.60). Settings Setting range 0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments) Default 0 ms • When “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, “Offset” shows the difference between automatic adjustment and fine adjustment. ■ Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. Settings Maximum (default) Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range. Standard Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use. Minimum/Auto Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low volumes. When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is automatically adjusted based on the input signal information. Auto (default) Automatically outputs video signals when any videos are input from the selected input source or an input source that can be operated with the on-screen display is selected. When no video signals are input, the wall paper is displayed. Video Off Does not output video signals including the wall paper. ■ Adaptive DSP Level Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level. Settings Off Does not adjust the effect level automatically. On (default) Adjusts the effect level automatically according to the YPAO measurement results and the volume level. ■ Max Volume Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. Setting range -30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB Default +16.5 dB CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 110 ■ VPS Video Selects whether to create Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers. When VPS is enabled, the unit creates front VPS when no front presence speakers are connected, and creates rear VPS when front presence speakers are connected but no rear presence speakers (p.56). Configures the video output settings. Settings Off Disables Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS). On (default) Enables Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS). • Depending on the installation height of the surround speakers, VPS may not be effective. In this case, set “VPS” to “Off”. ■ DAC Digital Filter Selects the digital filter type of the audio DAC (digital-to-analog converter) to have favorite sounds. Settings Sharp Roll-off Type Removes out-of-band noises by the filter with steep attenuation characteristics. It has a tendency to produce clear sounds. Slow Roll-off Type Removes out-of-band noises by the filter with gentle attenuation characteristics. It has a tendency to produce soft sounds. Short Latency Type (default) Reduces the audio delay caused by the DAC internal digital filter. It has a tendency to produce responsive and rhythmical sounds. ■ Analog to Analog Conversion Enables/disables the video conversion (p.148) between the analog video jacks (COMPONENT VIDEO, S VIDEO and VIDEO). Settings Off Disables the video conversion between the analog video jacks. On (default) Enables the video conversion between the analog video jacks. Converted video signals are output from the MONITOR OUT jacks only. • This function works only when “Monitor Out Assign” (p.118) is set to “Main” (default) and “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.118) is set to “Main” (default) or “Zone4”. • The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably. • Only 480i/576i-resolution video signals can be output from the S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks (p.148). ■ Video Mode Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video adjustments). Settings Direct (default) Disables the video signal processing. Processing Enables the video signal processing. Configure the settings in “Resolution”, “Aspect” and “Adjustment”. • When “Video Mode” is set to “Direct”, the unit transmits video signals with the least circuitry in order to reduce video output delay. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 111 ❑ Resolution ❑ Adjustment Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”. Configures the video adjustments when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”. You can register the video adjustments as presets (up to 6). Settings ■ Setup procedure Through Does not convert the resolution. Auto (default) Selects a resolution automatically in accordance with TV resolution. 480p/576p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p, 4K Output video signals with a selected resolution. (Only the resolutions supported by your TV are selectable.) 1 2 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset number and press ENTER. 3 4 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting and press ENTER. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. • If you need to select a resolution that is not supported by your TV, set “MONITOR CHECK” (p.126) in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “SKIP” and try again. (Note that the output video may not be displayed on your TV normally.) ❑ Aspect Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”. Settings Through (default) Does not convert the aspect ratio. 16:9 Normal Outputs 4:3 video signals to a 16:9 TV with black bands on either side of the screen. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Detail Enhancement Adjusts the enhancement effect of video details. Setting range 0 to 50 • This setting functions only when 480i/576i or 480p/576p signals are converted into 720p, 1080i, 1080p, or 2160p (4K) signals. Default 0 Edge Enhancement Adjusts the enhancement effect of video edges. Setting range 0 to 50 Default 0 Brightness Adjusts the video brightness. Setting range -100 to +100 Default 0 CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 112 Contrast HDMI Adjusts the video contrast. Setting range -100 to +100 Configures the HDMI settings. Default 0 Saturation Adjusts the video saturation. Setting range -100 to +100 Default 0 ■ HDMI Control Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.150). Settings Off (default) Disables HDMI Control. On Enables HDMI Control. Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “ARC” and “Standby Sync”. • To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.150) after connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices. ❑ TV Audio Input Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner. Settings AUDIO 1–3 Default AUDIO 1 • When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for connecting an external device because the input will be used for TV audio input. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 113 ❑ ARC ❑ HDMI OUT1, HDMI OUT2 Enables/disables ARC (p.26) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack or HDMI OUT 2 jack. Settings Off Disables ARC. On (default) Enables ARC. Settings Off (default) Disables the audio output from the TV. On Enables the audio output from the TV. • You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers connected to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the unit, set “ARC” to “Off” and use the TV’s speakers. • The HDMI OUT 1–2 jacks output 2-channel audio signals when the unit is turned on. ❑ Standby Sync ■ Standby Through Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. If this function is set to “On”, you can use the input selection keys (AV 1–7 and V-AUX) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in standby mode (the standby indicator on the unit blinks). Settings Off Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off. On Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off. Auto (default) Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the unit is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals. Settings Off (default) Does not output videos/audio to the TV. On Outputs videos/audio to the TV. (The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.) ■ Audio Output Selects a device to output audio. • This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”. • The “Amp” and “HDMI OUT1” settings are available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”. • The “HDMI OUT2” setting is available only when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.118) is set to “Main”. ❑ Amp Enables/disables the audio output from the speakers and headphones connected to the unit. Settings Off Disables the audio output from the speakers and headphones. On (default) Enables the audio output from the speakers and headphones. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 114 Network Configures the network settings. 6 7 To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. ■ Network Standby Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network standby). Settings Off (default) Disables the network standby function. On Enables the network standby function. (The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.) ■ IP Address ■ MAC Address Filter Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. ❑ DHCP ❑ Filter Select whether to use a DHCP server. Enables/disables the MAC address filter. Settings Settings Off Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters manually. For details, see “Manual network settings”. Off (default) Disables the MAC address filter. On (default) Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network parameters (such as IP address). On Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1–10”, specify the MAC addresses of the network devices that will be permitted access to the unit. ■ Manual network settings 1 2 Set “DHCP” to “Off”. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type and press ENTER. IP Address Specifies an IP address. Subnet Mask Specifies a subnet mask. Default Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default gateway. DNS Server (P) Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server. DNS Server (S) Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to select a value. 4 5 To confirm the setting, press ENTER. To configure another network parameter, repeat steps 2 to 4. ❑ MAC Address 1–10 Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be permitted access to the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”. ■ Procedure 1 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MAC Address 1–5” or “MAC Address 6–10” and press ENTER. 2 3 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an MAC address number and press ENTER. 4 5 6 To confirm the setting, press ENTER. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to select a value. To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 115 ■ Network Name Multi Zone Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. Configures the multi zone settings. ■ Procedure 1 2 Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry. ■ Main Zone Set Configures the main zone setting. ❑ Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen. • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. 3 Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. ■ Procedure 1 2 Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry. • To restore the default setting, select “RESET”. 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. 3 Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. • To restore the default setting, select “RESET”. 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 116 ■ Zone2 Set, Zone3 Set ❑ Mono Configures the Zone2 or Zone3 settings. Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 or Zone3 output. Settings ❑ Volume Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output. If you have connected an external amplifier with volume control to the unit, disable the volume adjustment for the corresponding zone. Settings Fixed Disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output. Variable (default) Enables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output. ❑ Max Volume Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. Setting range -30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB Off (default) Produces stereo sounds in Zone2 or Zone3. On Produces monaural sounds in Zone2 or Zone3. ❑ Zone Scene Rename Changes the scene names (for Zone2 or Zone3) displayed on the front display or TV screen. ■ Procedure 1 2 3 Use the cursor keys to select a scene to be renamed and press ENTER. Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry. Default +16.5 dB • This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”. ❑ Initial Volume Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 initial volume for when the unit is turned on. Settings Off (default) Sets the level at the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby mode. On Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80.0 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB increments). (Specify a volume level which is lower than the “Max Volume” setting.) • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. 4 Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. • To restore the default setting, select “RESET”. • This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”. 5 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. ❑ Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for Zone2 or Zone3) displayed on the front display or TV screen. You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main Zone Set” (p.116). CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 117 ■ Zone4 Set ■ Party Mode Set Configures the Zone4 settings. Enables/disables switching to the party mode (p.88) for each zone. ❑ Zone Scene Rename Choice Target: Zone2, Target: Zone3, Target: Zone4 Changes the scene names (for Zone4) displayed on the front display or TV screen. Settings You can change the scene names in the same manner as “Zone Scene Rename” in “Zone2 Set, Zone3 Set” (p.117). Disable Disables switching to the party mode. Enable (default) Enables switching to the party mode. You can turn on/off the party mode by pressing PARTY on the remote control. ❑ Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for Zone4) displayed on the front display or TV screen. You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main Zone Set” (p.116). ■ Monitor Out Assign Select the zone for which the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO, S VIDEO and VIDEO) jacks are used. Settings Main (default), Zone2, Zone3 • To watch videos played back on a video device on the zone video monitor, you need to connect the video monitor to the unit in the same way as the video device. For example, if you want to watch videos input from the DVD player via a component video cable, connect the video monitor to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks with a component video cable. ■ HDMI OUT2 Assign Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used. Settings Main (default), Zone2, Zone4 • For details on video/audio signals that can be output to each zone, see “Multi-zone output” (p.149). ❑ Audio Output Enables/disables the audio output from the HDMI OUT 2 jack when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” is set to “Zone2”. On Enables the audio output. Off (default) Disables the audio output (video output only). CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 118 Function 3 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use. • You cannot assign both COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to the same input source. ■ Display Set Configures the settings related to the front display and TV screen display. ❑ Dimmer (Front Display) Adjusts the brightness of the front display. ■ Input Assignment Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input source. ■ Procedure Example: assigning the OPTICAL (e) jack to the input source “AV 2” 1 Use the cursor keys to select the cell at the intersection of “AV 2” and “Optical”, and press ENTER. Setting range -4 to 0 (higher to brighten) Default 0 ❑ Short Message Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated (such as input selection and volume adjustment). Settings On (default) Displays short messages on the TV screen. Off Does not display short messages on the TV screen. ❑ Wallpaper Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV. Settings 2 Use the cursor keys to select “e” and press ENTER. Picture 1 (default), Picture 2, Picture 3 Displays the selected image on the TV screen when there is no video signal. Gray Displays a gray background on the TV screen when there is no video signal. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 119 ■ Trigger Output1, Trigger Output2 ❑ Target Zone Sets the TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks to function in sync with the power status of each zone or input switching. Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized. Settings ❑ Trigger Mode Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function. Main When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the power status of the main zone. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone. Settings Power (default) The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the power status of the zone specified with “Target Zone”. Zone2 Source The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the input switching in the zone specified with “Target Zone”. An electronic signal is transmitted according to the setting made in “Source”. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the power status of Zone2. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the input switching in Zone2. Zone3 When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with power status of Zone3. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with input switching in Zone3. Zone4 When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with power status of Zone4. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with input switching in Zone4. All (default) When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the power status of any zone. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the input switching in any zone. Manual Select this to manually switch the output level for electronic signal transmission with “Manual”. Source Specifies the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input, switching when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”. Choices AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4, PHONO, TUNER, (network sources), USB, MULTI CH Settings Low Stops the electronic signal transmission when you switch to the input source specified in this option. High (default) Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the input source specified in this option. Manual Switches the output level for electronic signal transmission manually when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Manual”. This setting can also be used to confirm proper function of the external device connected via the TRIGGER OUT jack. Choices Low Stops the electronic signal transmission. High (default) Transmits the electronic signal. ■ DC OUT Configures the DC OUT jack setting. ❑ Power Mode Selects how to supply power to the Yamaha AV accessory connected to the DC OUT jack. Settings Continuous (default) Supplies power through the DC OUT jack continuously regardless of the power state (on/standby) of the unit. Main Zone Power Sync. Supplies power through the DC OUT jack only when the main zone is turned on. (This setting may not work properly on some accessories.) CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 120 ■ Memory Guard ECO Prevents accidental changes to the settings. Configures the auto-standby setting. Settings Off (default) Does not protect the settings. On Protects the settings until “Off” is selected. • When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen. Icon ■ Auto Power Standby Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. If you do not operate the unit for the specified time, the unit will automatically go into standby mode. Settings Off Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically. 2 hours, 4 hours, 8 hours, 12 hours Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for the specified time. For example, when “2 hours” is selected, the unit will switch to standby mode if you do not operate it for 2 hours. Default U.K. and Europe models: 8 hours Other models: Off • Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerStdby” appears and then countdown starts in the front display. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 121 Language Select an on-screen menu language. Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) You can view information about the unit using the TV screen. 1 2 Press ON SCREEN. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an information type. 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys to select “Information” and press ENTER. Settings English (default) English 日本語 Japanese Français French Deutsch German Español Spanish Russian Italiano Italian Chinese • The information on the front display is provided in English only. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) En 122 ■ Network Types of information Displays the network information on the unit. ■ Audio Signal IP Address IP address Displays information about the current audio signal. Subnet Mask Subnet mask Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway DNS Server (P) The IP address of the primary DNS server Format Audio format of the input signal Channel The number of source channels in the input signal (front/surround/LFE) For example, “5.1 (3/2/0.1)” means 5.1ch in total (3 front channels, 2 surround channels, and LFE) Input Sampling The number of samples per second of the input digital signal Bitrate The amount of data per second of the input bitstream signal Dialogue Output The dialogue normalization level of the input bitstream signal The channels (PRE OUT jacks) from which signals are output DNS Server (S) The IP address of the secondary DNS server MAC Address MAC address Network Name Network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.116) Status The connection status of the NETWORK jack ■ System Displays the system information on the unit. • Even when the unit is set to output bitstream signals directly, the signal may be converted depending on the specifications and settings of the playback device. ■ Video Signal Displays information about the current video signal. HDMI Signal Presence or absence of HDMI signal input/output HDMI Resolution Resolutions of input signal (analog or HDMI) and output signal (HDMI) Analog Resolution Resolutions of input signal (analog) and signal output at the MONITOR OUT jacks (analog) ■ HDMI Monitor Remote ID The unit’s remote control ID setting (p.125) TV Format The unit’s video signal type (p.125) Tuner Freq. Step (Asia model only) The FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit (p.125) System ID System ID number Firmware Version The version of firmware installed on the unit • If the unit detects a newer firmware over the network, “!” (exclamation mark) appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and the corresponding message will be displayed in this screen. You can update the unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in this screen and following the procedure in “Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.136). Displays information about the TVs connected to the HDMI OUT jacks. ■ Multi Zone Use the cursor keys (q/w) to switch between “OUT1” and “OUT2”. Displays information about Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4. Interface TV interface Input The input source selected for Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 Video Resolution Resolutions supported by the TV Volume The volume for Zone2 or Zone3 CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) En 123 ADVANCED SETUP menu items Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) Item Page REMOTE SENSOR Turns on/off of the remote control sensor on the main unit. 124 REMOTE CON AMP Selects the unit’s remote control ID. 125 TUNER FRQ STEP (Asia model only) Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting. 125 While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z. TV FORMAT Switches the video signal type. 125 MAIN ZONE z MONITOR CHECK Removes the limitation on HDMI video output. 126 RECOV./BACKUP Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings from the backup. 126 INITIALIZE Restores the default settings. 126 FIRM UPDATE Updates the firmware. 127 VERSION Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. 127 Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display. 1 2 Function Set the unit to standby mode. STRAIGHT PROGRAM 3 4 5 Press PROGRAM to select an item. Turning on/off the remote control sensor (REMOTE SENSOR) Press STRAIGHT to select a setting. Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again. The new settings take effect. SPIMP.- DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 REMOTESENSOR ON MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Turn on/off the remote control sensor on the main unit. While the remote control sensor is turned off, you cannot control the unit from the remote control. Settings ON (default) Turns on the remote control sensor. OFF Turns off the remote control sensor. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 124 Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE CON AMP) SPIMP.- DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 REMOTECONAMP ID1 MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TUNER FRQ STEP) (Asia model only) PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default: ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver. Settings ID1 (default), ID2 DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 SLEEP HD 3 TUNERFRQSTEP FM50/AM9 Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or region. Settings ■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds. Otherwise, the setting will be automatically canceled. 1 2 FM100/AM10 Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz steps and AM by 10-kHz steps. FM50/AM9 (default) Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps and AM by 9-kHz steps. Press SETUP. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “PRESET” and press ENTER. Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) PRESET SPIMP.- 3 4 Press RECEIVER z and press ENTER. Use the numeric keys or cursor keys to enter “5019” (ID1) or “5020” (ID2). 5020 5 Press ENTER to confirm the setting. Once the remote control ID is registered successfully, “OK” appears in the display window. DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 TVFORMAT NTSC MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Switch the video signal type of the unit so that it matches to the format of your TV. Settings NTSC, PAL Default U.S.A., Canada, Taiwan and Korea models: NTSC Other models: PAL If “ERROR” appears, registration failed. Repeat from step 3. 6 To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP. • The registered remote control codes (p.128) are not cleared even if you change the remote control ID. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 125 Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MONITOR CHECK) Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP) SPIMP.- SPIMP.- DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 MONITORCHECK YES DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 RECOV./BACKUP BACKUP MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR The unit automatically detects resolutions supported by a TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack. Disable the monitor check function if you want to specify a resolution in “Resolution” (p.112) when the unit cannot detect the TV’s resolution or when you want to specify a different resolution than the detected resolution. Settings YES (default) Enables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a resolution supported by the TV only.) SKIP Disables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a specified resolution regardless of compatibility with the TV.) Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings from the backup. ■ Backup/recovery procedure 1 Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “BACKUP” or “RECOVERY” and press INFO to start the process. Choices BACKUP Creates backup of the settings of the unit in the internal memory. RECOVERY Recovers the settings of the unit from the backup (available only when backup has been created). Note • Do not turn off the unit during the recovery process. Otherwise, the settings may not be restored correctly. • Reset to “YES” if the unit becomes inoperable because video from the unit cannot be displayed on the TV after “MONITOR CHECK” has been set to “SKIP”. • The backup does not contain user information (such as user accounts and passwords). Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE) SPIMP.- DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 INITIALIZE CANCEL MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Restores the default settings for the unit. Choices VIDEO Restores the default settings for video configurations. ALL Restores the default settings for the unit. CANCEL Does not perform an initialization. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 126 Updating the firmware (FIRM UPDATE) SPIMP.- DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 FIRMUPDATE USB MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be released as needed. Updates can be downloaded from the Yamaha website. If the unit is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For details, refer to the information supplied with updates. ■ Firmware update procedure Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware. 1 Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to start firmware update. Choices USB Update the firmware using a USB memory device. NETWORK Update the firmware via the network. • If the unit detects newer firmware over the network, the corresponding message will be displayed after ON SCREEN is pressed. In this case, you can also update the unit’s firmware by following the procedure in “Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.136). Checking the firmware version (VERSION) SPIMP.- DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 VERSION x.xx MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. • You can also check the firmware version in “System” (p.123) in the “Information” menu. • It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 127 Controlling external devices with the remote control SOURCE RECEIVER AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 7 3 V-AUX 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] AUDIO You can use the unit’s remote control to operate external devices (such as BD/DVD players) if you have registered the remote control code of the external device. You can also use the macro function to sequentially operate multiple functions at once. Registering remote control codes 1 You can use the unit’s remote control to operate a TV if you have registered its remote control code. Press SETUP. SCENE 1 2 3 ■ Registering the remote control code for a TV 4 SETUP PROGRAM • You can also register your TV’s remote control code to the unit’s input selection keys (p.129). This would allow you to use the cursor keys or numeric keys to operate the TV (this function may not be available on some TV models). VOLUME MUTE TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN 1 • If no operation is performed within 30 seconds, the remote control automatically exits from the setup menu. OPTION ON SCREEN DISPLAY 2 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER. • If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list. If that does not work, try the other codes. MODE Item name CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT 2 PRESET PRESET PURE DIRECT TV VOL TV CH TV z MUTE SUR. DECODE ENHANCER PARTY HDMI OUT INFO MEMORY FM AM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 SLEEP 10 0 ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP TUN./ CH Item Function LEARN Assigns a function to each key by learning the code from other remote controls. 130 PRESET Registers the remote control code for external devices. 128 RENAME Edits the device names or scene names displayed on the remote control’s display window. 131 MACRO Programs macro operations (sequence of control commands). 132 CLEAR Clears the remote control configurations. 134 ERASE Erases a function assigned to each key by learning. 135 EX-IR Extended IR code mode. This feature is for the authorized custom installers only. SETUP Page — Press SETUP. Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds. Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens, repeat from Step 2. TV INPUT Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM to find your TV’s remote control code. 3 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “PRESET” and press ENTER. PRESET 4 Press TV z and press ENTER. “----” (empty) or code currently registered ---- • You cannot control an external device that does not have a remote control sensor. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 128 5 SOURCE RECEIVER 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 7 3 V-AUX 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] If “ERROR” appears, registration has failed. Repeat from Step 3. AUDIO Input selection keys 6 SCENE 1 2 3 1 Once the remote control code is successfully registered, “OK” appears in the display window. AV 1 Use the numeric keys or cursor keys to enter the 4-digit remote control code and press ENTER. 4 To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP. • If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list. If that does not work, try the other codes. 2 VOLUME MUTE TOP MENU Once you have registered the remote control code for your TV, you can control it using the TV operation keys, regardless of the input source selected on the unit. POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN INPUT Switches the video inputs of the TV. MUTE Mutes the audio output of the TV. TV VOL Adjust the volume of the TV. 3 DISPLAY TV operation keys MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT TV CH Switch the channels of the TV. TV z Turns on/off the TV. TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH TV operation keys MUTE ■ Registering the remote control codes for playback devices ENHANCER PARTY INFO MEMORY FM 1 2 3 HDMI OUT AM TUN./ CH 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 Numeric keys SLEEP ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP SETUP • Under the unit’s default settings, the amplifier code (Yamaha: 5098) is set for all the input selection keys. With this setting, you can control HDMI Control-compatible devices connected to the unit with the remote control. (This function may not work depending on the specification of the external device.) • If you have registered the remote control code for an external device to the [A], [B] or [C] key, you can operate the device with the remote control without switching the input source after pressing the key. CONFIGURATIONS Press a corresponding input selection key and press ENTER. For example, press AV1 to set the remote control code for the playback device connected to the AV1 jack. You can use the unit’s remote control to operate playback devices if you have registered their remote control codes. You can also use the input selection keys to change the playback devices that are controlled by the remote control, because their remote control codes are assigned to the input selection keys. SUR. DECODE Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “PRESET” and press ENTER. PRESET 4 PRESET Press SETUP. Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds. Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens, repeat from Step 2. ❑ TV operations PROGRAM Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM to find the remote control code for your playback device. Code currently registered 5098 5 Use the numeric keys or cursor keys to enter the 4-digit remote control and press ENTER. Once the remote control code is successfully registered, “OK” appears in the display window. If “ERROR” appears, registration has failed. Repeat from Step 3. ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 129 SOURCE RECEIVER SOURCE/RECEIVER AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] 1 2 6 To set another remote control code, repeat Steps 4 and 5. 7 To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP. AUDIO • For details on how to register a remote control code to a SCENE key, refer to “Configuring scene assignments” (p.54). SCENE 3 PROGRAM ❑ Playback device operations 4 VOLUME MUTE TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU External device operation keys Once you have registered the remote control code for your playback device, you can control it using the following keys after selecting the input source or scene. OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER DISPLAY MODE External device operation keys MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET • By pressing SOURCE/RECEIVER, you can switch the devices (the unit or external device) that are operated by the menu operation keys, DISPLAY and numeric keys. You can operate the unit when SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in orange, and an external device when SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in green. For example, if you register the remote control code of your external device on TUNER, you can operate the unit’s built-in FM/AM radio when SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in orange, and the external device when SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in green. SOURCE z • These keys work only if the corresponding function is available on your playback device and if the device can be operated with an infrared remote control. Programming from other remote controls (learning) The remote control of the unit can receive remote control signals from other infrared remote controls and learn the remote control operation. If you cannot find a remote control code for your playback device or if any key on the remote control does not work after you register the remote control code, use the learning function to assign a function to each key. 1 Press SETUP. Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds. Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens, repeat from Step 1. 2 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “LEARN” and press ENTER. Turns on/off the playback device. TV Cursor keys PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH TV operation keys MUTE TV z SUR. DECODE ENHANCER PARTY HDMI OUT INFO MEMORY FM AM 1 2 3 4 5 6 Menu operation keys Select an item. ENTER Confirms a selected item. RETURN Returns to the previous screen. DISPLAY Switches information on the display. MODE Switches between modes. TOP MENU Displays the top menu. POP-UP/MENU Displays the pop-up menu. s Stops playback. d Stops playback temporarily. a Starts playback of the selected song/video. h Searches forward/backward (by holding down). TUN./ CH Numeric keys 7 8 9 10 0 ENT SLEEP LEVEL ZONE SETUP External device operation keys j SETUP LEARN 3 Press one of the following keys depending on the type of your device. For playback device: press the input selection key (corresponding to the input jacks where the device is connected). For TV: press TV z. f g Skips forward/backward. Numeric keys Enter numerical values. TV operation keys Control the TV (p.129). CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 130 SOURCE RECEIVER RECEIVER z AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 4 5 Note Press ENTER. Aim the infrared transmitters of the remote controls at each other. b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “CLEAR” and press ENTER. AV SOURCE RECEIVER 2 3 4 4 6 f To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP. Perform the following steps (a and b) within 10 seconds. a On the unit, press one of the following keys to which you want to assign a function. You can edit the device names or scene names displayed on the remote control’s display window. 1 TV CH For TV: TV operation keys TV operation keys TV z b On the external device, press the key from which the operation is learned until “OK” appears in the display window. Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens, repeat from Step 1. 2 If “NG” appears, learning has failed. Repeat from Step 4. SUR. DECODE ENHANCER PARTY HDMI OUT INFO MEMORY FM AM 1 2 3 4 5 6 TUN./ CH 7 Repeat Steps 3 to 6 until all desired operations are learned. 8 To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP. 8 10 0 9 SLEEP ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP SETUP Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “RENAME” and press ENTER. RENAME 3 Press one of the following keys to select a device or a scene. For playback device: press the input selection key (corresponding to the input jacks where the device is connected). Numeric keys 7 Press SETUP. Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds. For playback device: SOURCE z, menu operations keys, DISPLAY, MODE, external device operation keys, numeric keys PURE DIRECT TV VOL V-AUX Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER DISPLAY TV MUTE e Hold down ENTER until “OK” appears on the window display. Editing device names PRESET INPUT 7 STRAIGHT AUDIO STEREO 6 MOVIE NET ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N 3 LIVE CLUB USB CLASSICAL d Press RECEIVER z. 5 to 10 cm (2 to 4”) apart MODE External device operation keys MODE 2 DISPLAY 4 RETURN c Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “LEARN” and press ENTER. External device operation keys OPTION ENTER [C] POP-UP/MENU 3 TOP MENU ON SCREEN [B] VOLUME MUTE MULTI SCENE VOLUME PROGRAM 4 SCENE 3 2 2 MUTE 1 [A] SCENE 1 [C] 5 [B] 1 [A] PHONO TUNER Input selection keys 1 4 NET TUNER 3 USB PROGRAM 2 MULTI a Press SETUP. Remote control of external device AUDIO 1 PHONO • If you press RECEIVER z in Step 3, you can assign functions of an external receiver to the menu operation keys, external device operation keys or numeric keys. However, it makes these keys to control the unit impossible. If you need to restore the remote control code for the unit, perform the following steps. • This remote control can learn approximately 200 functions (may be decreased depending on the signals). If “FULL” appears in the display window, clear unnecessary assignments to free some memory space for the new functions. For TV: press TV z. For AV receiver (the unit): press RECEIVER z. For scene: press one of the SCENE keys. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 131 SOURCE RECEIVER • To edit scene names of each zone, press one of the SCENE keys and press ZONE to select a zone. 4 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] 1 2 3 PROGRAM 4 The macro function allows you to sequentially operate multiple functions at once. Press ENTER. Use the cursor keys to rename. To locate the position, use the cursor keys (e/r). SCENE To select a character (A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, space, symbols), use the cursor keys (q/w). SCENE VOLUME MUTE BD/DVD TOP MENU PARTY HDMI OUT INFO MEMORY FM AM 1 2 CLASSICAL LIVE 3 CLUB ENTERTAIN 5 MOVIE 6 STEREO STRAIGHT PURE SLEEP DIRECT Press ENTER to register the new name. Once the new name is successfully registered, “OK” appears in the display window. 7 To edit another device name (or scene name), repeat Steps 3 to 6. 8 To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP. Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens, repeat from Step 1. 2 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MACRO” and press ENTER. TUN./ CH PRESET TV 10 MUTE 6 DISPLAY ENHANCER Press SETUP. Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds. Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 7 INPUT ■ Enabling the macro operations OPTION ENTER 4 For example, when you want to listen to a CD, you can turn on the CD player, select the corresponding input source on the unit and start playback on the CD player sequentially with a single key operation. 1 POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN SUR. MODE DECODE Operating multiple functions at once (macro) 8 9 TV VOL TV CH 0 ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP MACRO 3 SETUP ZONE Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “ON” and press ENTER. ON 4 To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP. “MACRO” lights up (when macro operations are enabled) RECEIVER • To disable the macro operations, select “OFF” in Step 3. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 132 SOURCE RECEIVER RECEIVER z SOURCE/RECEIVER By default, the following macro operations are available after pressing a macro operation key when the macro operations are enabled. 3 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “EDIT” and press ENTER. Macro operations AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] Macro operation key 1st command 2nd commend Turns on the unit. (unregistered) Turns on the unit. Selects the corresponding input source. (unregistered for the [A], [B] and [C] keys) EDIT AUDIO Input selection keys RECEIVER z SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM Input selection keys 4 4 “MACRO 1” appears in the display window. VOLUME MUTE TOP MENU ■ Programming macro operations POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY You can program up to 10 remote control commands for each macro operation key. If you press the corresponding macro operation key, the multiple operations will be carried out sequentially according to the programmed remote control commands. Press the macro operation key (RECEIVER z or input selection key) to which macro operations are assigned and press ENTER. MACRO1 5 MODE Press the keys for functions (up to 10) you want to include in the macro operations in sequence. To switch the devices (the unit or external device) to control, press SOURCE/RECEIVER. CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT • Before programming macro operations, you need to register the remote control codes (p.128) or assign a function to each key using the learning function (p.130). PRESET (Example) Programming for aturning on the unit, bselecting “AV1” as the input source, cturning on the DVD player assigned to “AV1” and dturning on the TV TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH TV z MUTE • We do not recommend including continuous operations (such as volume adjustment) in macro operations. 1 SUR. DECODE ENHANCER PARTY HDMI OUT INFO MEMORY FM AM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 2 Press SETUP. a (MACRO 1) Press RECEIVER z. Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds. b (MACRO 2) Press AV1. Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens, repeat from Step 1. c (MACRO 3) Press SOURCE/RECEIVER repeatedly to select “AV1” and press SOURCE z. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MACRO” and press ENTER. TUN./ CH SLEEP ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP d (MACRO 4) Press SOURCE/RECEIVER repeatedly to select “TV” and press TV z. 6 MACRO To confirm the setting, hold down ENTER until “OK” appears on the window display. If you have programmed 10 functions, “FULL” appears and the setting is confirmed automatically. SETUP 7 CONFIGURATIONS To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP. ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 133 SOURCE RECEIVER RECEIVER z AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 7 V-AUX 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] AUDIO Input selection keys Resetting the remote control configurations To apply the selection to a specific key, proceed to Step 4. ■ Clearing the remote control configurations • When “RESET” is selected, all remote control configurations will be cleared. You cannot select a specific key. Proceed to step 5. You can clear remote control configurations by selecting a type of settings or clear all the remote control configurations. 1 SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM 4 SCENE VOLUME MUTE TOP MENU 2 POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN RETURN Press SETUP. When “LEARN” or “PRESET” is selected: press the input selection key or TV z. Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens, repeat from Step 1. When “RENAME” is selected: press the input selection key, RECEIVER z, TV z or SCENE. When “MACRO” is selected: press the macro operation key (input selection key or RECEIVER z). Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “CLEAR” and press ENTER. CLEAR DISPLAY 3 LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET Hold down ENTER until “OK” appears on the window display. If “NG” or “ERROR” appears, clearing has failed. Repeat from Step 2. MODE CLASSICAL Press a key to which the selected process is applied. Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds. 5 Cursor keys ENTER ENTER 4 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select the settings to be cleared and press ENTER. 6 To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP. TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH TV z MUTE PRESET LEARN SUR. DECODE ENHANCER PARTY HDMI OUT INFO MEMORY FM AM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 SLEEP 10 0 ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP TUN./ CH Clears the functions learned from other remote controls. PRESET Restores the default remote control code settings. RENAME Restores the default device name settings. MACRO Clears the macro operation settings. RESET Clears all remote control configurations and restores default settings. “ALL” appears in the display window. SETUP ALL To apply the selection to all the corresponding keys, proceed to Step 5. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 134 ■ Erasing a function assigned to each key by learning SOURCE RECEIVER You can erase a function assigned to each key by learning and restore the default key assignments. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 7 3 V-AUX 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] 1 2 AUDIO Input selection keys 1 Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds. Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens, repeat from Step 1. SCENE 3 PROGRAM 4 2 VOLUME MUTE TOP MENU Press SETUP. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “ERASE” and press ENTER. POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN ERASE Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY 3 MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT Press one of the following keys to select the device for which key assignments will be cleared. For playback device: press the input selection key. For TV: press TV z. PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH TV z MUTE 4 5 Press ENTER. Hold down the key to be reset until “OK” appears on the window display. If “NG” or “ERROR” appears, clearing has failed. Repeat from Step 2. SUR. DECODE ENHANCER PARTY INFO MEMORY FM 1 2 3 HDMI OUT AM 6 Repeat Steps 3 to 5 until all desired key assignments are erased. 7 To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP. TUN./ CH 4 5 7 8 6 9 SLEEP 10 0 ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP SETUP CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 135 Updating the unit’s firmware via the network SOURCE RECEIVER New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and update it. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] 1 2 3 • Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more (depending on your Internet connection speed). PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU 4 • If the Internet connection speed is slow or if the unit is connected to the wireless network via a wireless network adapter, network update may not be possible depending on the condition of the wireless connection. In this case, try the firmware update later or use the USB memory device (p.127). VOLUME POP-UP/MENU If “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!” appears on the front display, press MAIN ZONE z on the front panel. The firmware update is complete. Note SCENE 3 • If you want to update the firmware later, select “CLOSE” in Step 2. “!” (exclamation mark) appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and a message will be displayed in the “System” screen (p.123). You can update the unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in the “System” screen. OPTION ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY • You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.127). Information icon A firmware update is available if the following message is displayed after ON SCREEN is pressed. MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE Message System Icon 1 2 Read the on-screen description. To start the firmware update, use the cursor keys to select “START” and press ENTER. The on-screen display turns off. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Updating the unit’s firmware via the network En 136 APPENDIX Frequently asked questions The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound balance... If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use “Auto Setup” to optimize the speaker settings again (p.41). If you want to adjust the speaker settings manually, use “Manual Setup” in the “Setup” menu (p.106). Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the volume control... If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or speakers. We recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum volume level for the unit in advance (p.110). You can also set the maximum volume for Zone2 or Zone3 (p.117). I am occasionally startled by a sudden loud sound when turning on the unit... By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the volume to be applied when the receiver is turned on (p.110). You can also set the initial volume for Zone2 or Zone3 (p.117). We are bothered by volume differences when switching between input sources… enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system. For information on how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback devices, refer to the instruction manuals for each device. I want to turn off the on-screen messages displayed during operations... By default, short messages are displayed on the TV screen when the unit is operated (such as input selection and volume adjustment). If the short messages bother you when you are watching movies or sports, configure “Short Message” (p.119) in the “Setup” menu to turn off the short messages. I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings... You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by utilizing “Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.121). The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another Yamaha product as well as the unit... When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another Yamaha product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens, register different remote control IDs for the devices that you want to control with each remote control (p.125). You can correct volume differences between input sources by utilizing “Input Trim” in the “Option” menu (p.92). I want to enjoy videos/audio played back on the video device even when the unit is in standby mode... I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at all... If you have connected a video device to the unit with HDMI, you can output videos/audio played back on the video device to the TV even when the unit is in standby mode. To use this function, set “Standby Through” (p.114) in the “Setup” menu to “On”. You can also switch the input source using the remote control of the unit when this function is enabled. To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.150). After connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit, APPENDIX ➤ Frequently asked questions En 137 Troubleshooting Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit and power amplifier, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. First, check the following: a The power cables of the unit, power amplifier, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets securely. b The unit, power amplifier, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on. c The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device. Power, system and remote control Problem Cause Remedy The power does not turn on. The protection circuitry has been activated three times consecutively. When the unit is in this condition, the standby indicator on the unit blinks if you try to turn on the power. As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair. The power does not turn off. The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power supply voltage. Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.) The unit enters standby mode automatically. The unit is not reacting. The unit cannot be controlled using the remote control. The sleep timer worked. Turn on the unit and start playback again. The auto-standby function kicked in because the unit was not used for the specified time. To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Standby” in the “Setup” menu to “Off” (p.121). The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power supply voltage. Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.) The unit is out of the operating range. Use the remote control within the operating range (p.5). The batteries are weak. Replace with new batteries. The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or strong lighting. Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit. The remote control is set to control external devices. Press SOURCE/RECEIVER to set the remote control to control the unit (the key lights up in orange). The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not identical. Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.125). APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 138 Problem Cause Remedy The remote control is set to control the unit. Press SOURCE/RECEIVER to set the remote control to control external devices (the key lights up in green). The corresponding remote control code is not set properly. Set the remote control code again (p.128). Even if the remote control code is registered properly, some products may not respond to the remote control. A remote control code for another playback device is assigned to V-AUX. Reset the remote control code registered to V-AUX (p.134). The mobile device or its application is not externally controllable. Directly operate the mobile device itself. The batteries of the remote control of the unit and/or the external device are weak. Replace with new batteries. The distance between the two remote controls is not appropriate. Place the remote controls at a proper distance (p.130). External devices cannot be controlled using the remote control. The MHL-compatible mobile device cannot be controlled using the remote control. The remote control does not learn new functions. The signal coding or modulation of the other remote control is not compatible with the remote control. Learning is impossible in this case. Memory capacity is full. Clear unnecessary assignments to free some memory space for new functions (p.135). Cause Remedy Audio Problem No sound. Another input source is selected. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys. Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input. Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio format of the input signal, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.123). The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. The maximum volume is set. Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.110). The volume cannot be increased. A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit. The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel. To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.123). The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the speaker. To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.109). Audio output of the speaker is disabled. Perform “Auto Setup” (p.41) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change the speaker settings (p.106). The volume of the speaker is set too low. Perform “Auto Setup” (p.41) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the speaker volume (p.108). The speaker cable connecting the power amplifier and the speaker is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable. The speaker is malfunctioning. To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the power amplifier may be malfunctioning. The extended surround is disabled. Use “Extended Surround” in the “Option” menu to select a decoder to be used (p.92). No sound is coming from a specific speaker. No sound is coming from the surround back speaker. APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 139 Problem Cause Remedy The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency signals. To check it, set “Extra Bass” in the “Setup” menu to “On”, in order to output the front channel low-frequency components from the subwoofer (p.108). Subwoofer output is disabled. Perform “Auto Setup” (p.41) or set “Subwoofer 1” or “Subwoofer 2” in the “Setup” menu to “Use” (p.107). The volume of the subwoofer is too low. Adjust the volume on the subwoofer. The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function. Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level. The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications. The unit is set not to output audio input through HDMI jacks from the SPEAKERS terminals. In “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu, set “Amp” to “On” (p.114). The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices. The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers. Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the speakers connected to the unit. A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with an HDMI cable. Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection (p.26). (If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable) The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection. Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack (p.113). (If you are trying to use ARC) ARC is disabled on the unit or TV. Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.114). Also, enable ARC on the TV. No sound from the Zone2 TV (connected to the unit with HDMI). The audio output from the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is disabled. Set “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.118). Only the front speakers work on multichannel audio. The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as PCM) only. To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.123). If necessary, change the digital audio output setting on the playback device. The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device. Move the unit further away from the device. The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. No sound is coming from the subwoofer. No sound from the playback device (connected to the unit with HDMI). No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is used). Noise/hum is heard. The sound is distorted. The sound is interrupted. The volume of the unit is too high. Turn down the volume. The input signal level is too high when AUDIO 4 (XLR) is selected as the input source. Adjust the output signal level on the playback device or use “Balance Input Attenuator” in the “Input” menu (p.97). A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks. If the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2 or Zone4, HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone operations due to internal circuitry switching. For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back videos/audio” (p.85). APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 140 Video Problem No video. No video from the playback device (connected to the unit with HDMI). The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV. The video is interrupted. Cause Remedy Another input source is selected on the unit. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys. Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit. The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV. Set “MONITOR CHECK” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “YES” (p.126). The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit. To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Video Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.123). For information about video signals supported by the unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.151). The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications. The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices. Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit. (If you are using 2 TVs in the main zone) Another TV is turned off when “HDMI OUT 1+2” is selected. Select “HDMI OUT 1” or “HDMI OUT 2” to output the signals only to the TV you are using (p.52). (If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2 or Zone4) HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone operations due to internal circuitry switching. For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back videos/audio” (p.85). APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 141 FM/AM radio Problem Cause There is multi-path interference. Remedy Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location. (U.S.A. model only) Set “Audio Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio reception (p.94). FM radio reception is weak or noisy. Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter. (Except for U.S.A. model) Set “FM Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio reception (p.94). Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna. AM radio reception is weak or noisy. The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats, or other electrical equipment. It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor AM antenna. Select the station manually (p.61). Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter. Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna. Adjust the AM antenna orientation. Radio stations cannot be selected automatically. The AM radio signal is weak. Select the station manually (p.61). Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with the supplied AM antenna. AM radio stations cannot be registered as presets. Auto Preset has been used. Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations and HD Radio station (U.S.A. model only) only. Register AM radio stations manually (p.62). The unit does not receive HD Radio signals. (U.S.A. model only) The unit is in the monaural reception mode. Set “Audio Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Auto” (p.94). APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 142 USB and network Problem Cause Remedy The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely. Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again. The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32. Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format. Folders and files in the USB device cannot be viewed. The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption. Use a USB device without an encryption function. The files in the USB device cannot be played back continuously. Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder. If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files in the playback folder. The network feature does not function. The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained properly. Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup” menu to “On” on the unit (p.115). If you want to configure the network parameters manually, check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other network devices in your network (p.115). The media sharing setting is not correct. Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared (p.75). Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access of the unit to your PC. Check the settings of security software installed on your PC. The unit and PC are not in the same network. Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit and the PC to the same network. The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit. In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or specify the MAC address of your PC to allow it to access to the unit (p.115). The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played back. The files are not supported by the unit or the media server. Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For information about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.75). The files in the PC cannot be played back continuously. Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder. If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files in the playback folder. The selected Internet radio station is currently not available. There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have been stopped. Try the station later or select another station. The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting silence. Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try the station later or select another station. Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your network devices (such as the router). Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station. The port number varies depending on the radio station. The unit and smartphone/tablet are not in the same network. Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit and smartphone/tablet to the same network. The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit. In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or specify the MAC address of your smartphone/tablet to allow it to access to the unit (p.115). It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network. Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device (p.127). The unit does not detect the USB device. The unit does not detect the PC. The Internet radio cannot be played. The application for smartphone/tablet “AV CONTROLLER” does not detect the unit. Firmware update via the network is failed. APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 143 Error indications on the front display Message Cause Remedy Access denied Access to the PC is denied. Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared (p.75). Access error The unit cannot access the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. The unit cannot access the iPod. Turn off the iPod and turn it on again. The connected iPod is not supported by the unit. Use an iPod supported by the unit (p.68). Make sure your router and modem are turned on. There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit. Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.37). Internal Error An internal error has occurred. Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. MHL Overloaded An overcurrent is flowing through the MHL-compatible mobile device. Turn off the unit and check the connection between the unit and mobile device. No content There are no playable files in the selected folder. Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit. The unit cannot detect the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. No device The unit cannot detect the iPod. Turn off the iPod and then turn it on again. Please wait The unit is preparing for connecting to the network. Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn it on again. RemID Mismatch The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not identical. Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.125). Remote Off The unit cannot be operated from remote control because the remote control sensor on the main unit is turned off. Use the controls on the front panel. To use the remote control, set “REMOTE SENSOR” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “ON” (p.124). The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the USB device for some reasons. Check the song data. If it cannot be played on another device, the song data may be defective. The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPod for some reason. Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPod itself, the song data or storage area may be defective. The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some reason. Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.75). If the unit supports the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with heavy traffic. Unable to play USB Overloaded An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. Version error Firmware update is failed. Update the firmware again. APPENDIX ➤ Error indications on the front display En 144 Glossary Audio information ■ Audio decoding format Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs. Dolby Digital EX Dolby Digital EX creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports 7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II enables 5-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources. Dolby Pro Logic IIx DTS Express DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher compression rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is developed for audio streaming services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). DTS-HD High Resolution Audio DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports 7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). DTS-HD Master Audio DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). DTS Neo:6 DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete full-bandwidth matrix channels of surround sound. DSD (Direct Stream Digital) Dolby Pro Logic IIx enables 7-channel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for game sources (for 2-channel sources only). DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super Audio CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz. The highest frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This technology offers better audio quality than that used for CDs. Dolby TrueHD FLAC Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality. DTS 96/24 DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This format remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for music DVDs, etc. DTS Digital Surround DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs. DTS-ES DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a surround back sound is recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a discrete surround back channel is recorded. MP3 One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data quantity by about 1/10 maintaining a certain level of audio quality. MPEG-4 AAC An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming services on Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality than MP3. PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This technology is the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called Linear PCM for audio on a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray discs). APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 145 Sampling frequency/Quantization bit Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal is digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”. • Sampling frequency Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate. When the sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider. • Quantization bit The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a numeric value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more accurate. WAV Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by converting audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other compression methods. WMA (Windows Media Audio) One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality. ■ Others LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio effects. This channel is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio. Lip sync Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an increase in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag between audio and video output. HDMI and video information Component video signal With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and the Pb and Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. Composite video signal With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined and transmitted with a single cable. Deep Color Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems process the color using 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology allows HDTVs and other displays to increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors. HDMI HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video signal transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable without any loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a secure audio/video interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/”. MHL MHL (Mobile High-definition Link) is the interface standard for high-speed digital video signal transmission that is developed for mobile devices. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals from mobile devices (such as smartphones) using a single cable with any loss. As with HDMI, MHL complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). S-video signal With the S-video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance through the S-video cable. This technology achieves more accurate color reproduction than the composite video signal system. x.v.Color “x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than sRGB and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid, natural images. APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 146 Yamaha technologies CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor) Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best experienced in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions (such as room size, wall material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound that you hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP, Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own home. CINEMA DSP 3D The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA DSP 3D mode achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the accurate and intensive 3D sound fields in a listening room. CINEMA DSP HD³ The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA DSP HD³ feature achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the accurate and intensive stereoscopic sound fields in a listening room. Compressed Music Enhancer The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music formats (such as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound system. SILENT CINEMA Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound programs can be enjoyed on headphones. Virtual CINEMA DSP Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with front left and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic sound field in a listening room. Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field without presence speakers. Even if the presence speakers are not connected, the unit creates the 3D sound field in your room. APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 147 Video signal flow Video signals input from a video device to the unit are output to a TV as shown below. m (solid line) is always available. , (dotted line) is available only when “Analog to Analog Conversion” (p.111) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On” (default). Video device The unit ■ Video conversion table • You can select the resolution and the aspect ratio applied to HDMI-output video processing in “Video Mode” (p.111) in the “Setup” menu. • The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably. HDMI out TV Resolution 480i/ 576i 480p/ 576p 720p 1080i 1080p 4K 480i/576i m m m m m m m m m m m 720p m m m m 1080i m m m m 1080p/ 50, 60 Hz m m m m m m 480p/576p HDMI in HDMI out HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI in 1080p/24 Hz COMPONENT VIDEO in COMPONENT VIDEO out COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO m m m m m m m m m m COMPONENT 720p VIDEO in m m m m 1080i m m m m 480i/576i COMPONENT VIDEO PR PR PR PR PB PB PB PB Y Y Y Y 480i/ 576i m S VIDEO VIDEO in VIDEO VIDEO 720p 1080i 1080p 480p/576p m 480i/ 576i 480i/ 576i , , m m m m 1080p S VIDEO in S VIDEO 480p/ 576p m 4K COMPONENT VIDEO S VIDEO VIDEO out out COMPONENT VIDEO out S VIDEO out S VIDEO S VIDEO S VIDEO in 480i/576i m m m m m m , m , VIDEO in m m m m m m , , m VIDEO out VIDEO VIDEO 480i/576i APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 148 Multi-zone output ■ Audio output Out In Digital audio (HDMI) Digital audio (COAXIAL/OPTICAL) Analog audio (AUDIO) USB (including iPod) ■ Video output ZONE OUT jacks Zone2 Zone3 m (*3) m (*5) HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack Zone2 (*1) Zone4 (*2) m (*3) m (*4) MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks (*6) Out In m (*5) m m m m S-video m Composite video On-screen display (browse/playback) Network sources m m m TUNER m m m S VIDEO VIDEO Zone2/3 Zone2/3 Zone2/3 HDMI video Component video m COMPONENT VIDEO HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack (*7) Zone2 Zone4 m m m m m m (*8) m (*8) m (*8) m m: Available m: Available *1 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.118) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” (Audio Output: On) *2 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.118) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone4” *3 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input source selected in the main zone is selected) *4 HDMI audio pass-through (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input source selected in the main zone is selected) *5 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input *6 Available when “Monitor Out Assign” (p.118) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” or “Zone3” *7 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.118) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” or “Zone4” *8 Not available in Zone3 when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.118) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 149 (Example) Information on HDMI HDMI Control HDMI Control HDMI Control HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as power and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with an HDMI cable. For details on connections, see “Connecting a TV” (p.26) and “Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)” (p.32). Operations available from the TV’s remote control Press SCENE (BD/DVD) To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after connecting the TV and playback devices. • This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system. • Standby synchronization • Volume control including mute • Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner • Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device 1 2 • Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker) HDMI Control Playback device also turns off The unit turns off (standby) Turn off the TV Operations available from the unit’s remote control • Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene selection (p.53) • Switching the TV input to display the on-screen menu (when ON SCREEN is pressed) • Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) without registering remote control codes (p.129) Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices. Enable HDMI Control on the unit, TV, and playback devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players). To enable HDMI Control on the unit, set “HDMI Control” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu to “On” and configure the related items (“TV Audio Input”, “ARC”, and “Standby Sync”). (Example) HDMI Control Turns on and displays video from the playback device Playback starts 3 Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and playback devices. 4 5 6 Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit. Check the followings. On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not, select the input source manually. On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed. APPENDIX ➤ Information on HDMI En 150 7 Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control. HDMI signal compatibility Audio signals Audio signal type Audio signal format Compatible media (example) 2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio • If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on the TV. Multichannel Linear PCM 8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit DVD-Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD • We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works more effectively. DSD 2 to 5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video Bitstream (High definition audio) Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD High Resolution Audio, DTS Express • If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 3 and plugging in the TV again in Step 4. It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices exceeds the limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use. Video signals The unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions: • VGA • 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz • 480i/60 Hz • 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz • 576i/50 Hz • 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz • 480p/60 Hz • 4K/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz • 576p/50 Hz • When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be output, depending on the type of the DVD player. • The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to the instruction manual for each device. • To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device). For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback device. APPENDIX ➤ Information on HDMI En 151 Reference diagram (rear panel) (U.S.A. model) • The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections. APPENDIX ➤ Reference diagram (rear panel) En 152 Trademarks Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic, Surround EX and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872; 7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS-HD, the Symbol, & DTS-HD and the Symbol together are registered trademarks & DTS-HD Master Audio is a trademark of DTS, Inc. Product includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. “Made for iPod,” “Made for iPhone,” and “Made for iPad” mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, iPhone, or iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone, or iPad may affect wireless performance. AirPlay, iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod nano, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries. MHL and the MHL logo are a trademark, registered trademark or service mark of MHL, LLC in the United States and/or other countries. x.v.Color™ “x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation. DLNA™ and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of Digital Living Network Alliance. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited. Windows™ Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media Player are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Android™ Android is a trademark of Google Inc. Rovi™ MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson. This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Rovi Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Rovi Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. This receiver supports network connections. “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation. HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD, HD Radio, and “Arc” logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp. APPENDIX ➤ Trademarks En 153 Specifications Input jacks • Analog Audio Audio (Unbalance) x 9 (AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–3, PHONO, V-AUX) Audio (Balance) x 1 (AUDIO 4) (1:GHD, 2:HOT, 3:COLD) MULTI CH INPUT x 1 (8 ch) (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R, SUBWOOFER) • Audio Format • Video MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT - Dolby TrueHD - Composite x 1 - Dolby Digital Plus - S-video x 1 - Dolby Digital - Component x 1 - DTS-HD Master Audio AV OUT - DTS-HD High Resolution Audio - Composite x 1 - DTS Express - S-video x 1 - DTS • Digital Audio (Supported frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz) Optical x 4 (AV 3–4, AUDIO 1, V-AUX) Coaxial x 3 (AV 1–2, AUDIO 2) - DSD 2-ch to 6-ch • HDMI Output *5 HDMI OUT x 2 (HDMI OUT 1–2 ) *5 barter to ZONE OUT (ZONE2/ZONE4) - PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit) • Content Protection: HDCP compatible • Video Composite x 5 (AV 1–4, V-AUX) Other jacks • Link Function: CEC supported S-video x 4 (AV 1–4) • YPAO MIC x 1 MHL • REMOTE IN x 2 • Video Format (Repeater Mode) Component x 4 (AV 1–4) • HDMI Input • REMOTE OUT x 2 HDMI x 8 (AV 1–7, V-AUX*) * V-AUX: MHL input compatible • Others USB x 1 (USB2.0) NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T) Output jacks • Analog Audio - Pre Out (Unbalance) x 11 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R, F.PRESENCE L/R, R.PRESENCE L/R) - Pre Out (Balance) x 11 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R, F.PRESENCE L/R, R.PRESENCE L/R) (1:GND, 2: HOT, 3: COLD) - Subwoofer Out x 2 (SUBWOOFER 1–2, Stereo/Front&Rear/Monox2) - Audio x 1 (AV OUT) - ZONE OUT x 2 (ZONE2/ZONE3) • Digital Audio • TRIGGER OUT x 2 - VGA - 480i/60 Hz - 576i/50 Hz • RS-232C x 1 - 480p/60 Hz • DC OUT x 1 - 576p/50 Hz HDMI • HDMI features: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lip Sync, ARC (Audio Return Channel), 3D, Ultra HD (4K) • Video Format (Repeater Mode) - VGA - 480i/60 Hz - 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz - 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz - 1080p/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz • Audio Format - PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit) • Current Supply Capacity: 1.0 A - 576i/50 Hz TUNER - 480p/60 Hz • Analog Tuner - 576p/50 Hz [U.K. and Europe models] - 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz FM/AM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER) - 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz [Other models] - 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz - 4K/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz FM/AM x 1 (TUNER) • HD Radio tuner [U.S.A. model] x 1 (TUNER) Optical x 1 (AV OUT) APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 154 USB Audio Section • Capable of iPod, Mass Storage Class USB Memory • Rated Output Level/Impedance • Current Supply Capacity: 2.1 A (RCA Unbalance Preout) • Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance PHONO ............................................................... 3.5 mV/47 k RCA Unbalance (Audio 2 etc.) .......................... 200 mV/47 k Front L/R .............................................................. 1.0 V/470 XLR Balance (Audio 4) Network Center.................................................................. 1.0 V/470 Attenuator Off..................................................... 200 mV/47 k • PC Client Function Surround L/R ....................................................... 1.0 V/470 Attenuator On..................................................... 400 mV/47 k • Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5 Surround Back L/R .............................................. 1.0 V/470 • AirPlay supported • Internet Radio Compatible Decoding Formats • Decoding Format - Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus - Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX - DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS Express - DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 - DTS Digital Surround • Post Decoding Format - Dolby Pro Logic - Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie, Dolby Pro Logic II Game - Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game - DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema • Maximum Input Signal Front Presence L/R.............................................. 1.0 V/470 PHONO ..............................................................60 mV or more Rear Presence L/R .............................................. 1.0 V/470 RCA Unbalance (Audio 2 etc.) ............................2.4 V or more Subwoofer 1–2 ....................................................1.0 V/470 XLR Balance (Audio 4) Zone2/Zone3 ....................................................... 1.0 V/470 Attenuator Off.......................................................2.4 V or more (XLR Balance Preout) Front L/R .............................................................. 2.0 V/470 Attenuator On.......................................................4.8 V or more • Output Level / Output Impedance Center.................................................................. 2.0 V/470 AV OUT ............................................................. 200 mV/1.2 k Surround L/R ....................................................... 2.0 V/470 HEADPHONE OUT............................................. 150 mV/100 Surround Back L/R .............................................. 2.0 V/470 Front Presence L/R.............................................. 2.0 V/470 Rear Presence L/R .............................................. 2.0 V/470 • Maximum Output Level (0.06%THD) (RCA Unbalance Preout) Front L/R ......................................................... 4.25 V or more Center............................................................. 4.25 V or more Surround L/R .................................................. 4.25 V or more Surround Back L/R ......................................... 4.25 V or more • Frequency Response AUDIO 2 etc. (10 Hz to 100 kHz)................................ +0/-3 dB • RIAA Equalization Deviation PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) ......................................... 0±0.5 dB • Total Harmonic Distortion PHONO to AV OUT ............................................. 0.02% or less MULTI CH INPUT to Preout (Pure Direct).......... 0.008% or less • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) Front Presence L/R......................................... 4.25 V or more PHONO to AV OUT (Input Shorted 5 mV) Rear Presence L/R ......................................... 4.25 V or more [U.S.A., Canada, China and Taiwan models] .... 86 dB or more Subwoofer 1–2 ................................................. 6.8 V or more [Other models] ................................................... 81 dB or more Zone2/Zone3 .................................................. 4.25 V or more AUDIO 2 etc. to Preout (Balance/Unbalance) (XLR Balance Preout) Front L/R ........................................................... 8.5 V or more Center............................................................... 8.5 V or more Surround L/R .................................................... 8.5 V or more Surround Back L/R ........................................... 8.5 V or more Front Presence L/R........................................... 8.5 V or more Rear Presence L/R ........................................... 8.5 V or more (Pure Direct, Input Shorted 1 k, Analog Input) ......................................................................... 112 dB or more • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Preout (RCA Unbalance) .................................... 1.5 µV or less Preout (XLR Balance)............................................. 3 µV or less • Channel Separation PHONO (Input Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz) ...60 dB/55 dB or more AUDIO 2 etc. (Input 1 k Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz) .................................................................86 dB/68 dB or more APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 155 • Maximum Gain (Volume: Maximum) • Video Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off) • Standby Power Consumption Main Zone Preout ............................................................ 14 dB .......................................................................1.5 Vp-p or more HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off ........... 0.3 W (Typical) Zone2/Zone3 Preout ........................................................ 14 dB • Signal to Noise Ratio (Video Conversion Off)..... 60 dB or more HDMI Control On, Standby Through On ........... 5.0 W (Typical) • Volume Control Main Zone.................MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step) Zone2/Zone3 ............MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step) • Tone Control Characteristics Main Zone Bass Boost/Cut .........................±6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step) • Monitor Out Frequency Response (Video Conversion Off) Component (MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT) ........................................................... 5 Hz to 100 MHz, ±3 dB • Dimensions (W x H x D) ......................435 x 192 x 448 mm (17-1/8” x 7-1/2” x 17-5/8”) • Tuning Range * Including legs and protrusions [U.S.A. and Canada models] .............. 87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz Treble Boost/Cut ..................... ±6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step) [Asia model] .................. 87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz Treble Turnover .......................................................... 3.5 kHz [Other models] ................................ 87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz Bass Boost/Cut .............................±10 dB/50 Hz (2 dB Step) Bass Turnover............................................................. 350 Hz Treble Boost/Cut ...........................±10 dB/50 Hz (2 dB Step) Treble Turnover .......................................................... 3.5 kHz • Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz) H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back: Small) .................................................................................. 12 dB/oct. L.P.F. (Subwoofer)..................................................... 24 dB/oct. Video Section • Video Signal Type [U.S.A., Canada, Taiwan and Korea models].................. NTSC [Other models].................................................................... PAL .......................................................................... 4.2 W (Typical) Network Standby On......................................... 2.2 W (Typical) FM Section Bass Turnover............................................................. 350 Hz Zone2/Zone3 HDMI Control Off, Standby Through On (AV 1, No Signals) • Weight ........................................................... 13.6 kg (30.0 lbs) • 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.) Mono .................................................................3 µV (20.8 dBf) * Specifications are subject to change without notice. • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo [except U.S.A. model] .....................72 dB/70 dB HD [U.S.A. model]........................................................... 80 dB • Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz) Mono/Stereo [except U.S.A. model] ....................... 0.3%/0.5% HD [U.S.A. model]...........................................................0.03% • Antenna Input................................................ 75 unbalanced AM section • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] .................. 530 kHz to 1710 kHz [Asia model] ............................ 530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz [Other models] ........................................ 531 kHz to 1611 kHz • Video Signal Type (Video Conversion) .....................NTSC/PAL • Video Signal Level Composite ............................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 S-video General • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] ..........................AC 120 V, 60 Hz Y.......................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 [Taiwan model] ................................AC 110 to 120 V, 50/60 Hz C (NTSC) [U.S.A., Canada, Taiwan and Korea models] [China model]..................................................AC 220 V, 50 Hz ..................................................................... 0.286 Vp-p/75 [Korea model] .................................................AC 220 V, 60 Hz C (PAL) [Other models] ................................... 0.3 Vp-p/75 [Australia model] .............................................AC 240 V, 50 Hz Component [U.K. and Europe models] ..............................AC 230 V, 50 Hz Y.......................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 [Asia model] ....................................AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz Pb/Pr ................................................................ 0.7 Vp-p/75 • Power Consumption ..........................................................80 W APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 156 Index Symbols Exclamation mark (!) Lock icon (o) 121 136 Numerics 11.2-channel system 19 11ch Stereo (sound program) 58 16:9 Normal (Aspect, Setup menu) 2.1-channel system 21 2ch Stereo (sound program) 58 3.1-channel system 21 5.1-channel system 20, 21 7.1-channel system 20 9.2-channel system 19, 20 112 A Access denied (error indication) 144 Access error (error indication) 144 Action Game (sound program) 57 Adaptive DRC (Option menu) 91 Adaptive DSP Level (Sound, Setup menu) 110 Adjustment (Lipsync, Setup menu) 110 Adjustment (Video Mode, Setup menu) 112 ADVANCED SETUP menu 124 Adventure (sound program) 57 AirPlay 80 Album (HD Radio™) 63 AM antenna connection 36 AM radio listening 61 Amp (Audio Output, Setup menu) 114 Analog to Analog Conversion (Video, Setup menu) 111 Angle (YPAO measurement result) 48 Angle measurement (YPAO) 44, 47 ARC (Audio Return Channel) 26 ARC (HDMI Control, Setup menu) 114 Arena (sound program) 58 Artist/Song (HD Radio™) 63 Aspect (Video Mode, Setup menu) 112 Audio Decoder (front display information) 89 Audio device connection 34 Audio file format (PC/NAS) 75 Audio file format (USB storage device) 72 AUDIO jack 22 Audio Mode (Option menu) 94 Audio Output (HDMI OUT2 Assign, Setup menu) 118 Audio Output (HDMI, Setup menu) 114 Audio program selection (HD Radio™) 63 Audio Return Channel (ARC) 26 Audio Select (Option menu) 93 Audio Signal (Information menu) 123 Auto Power Standby (ECO, Setup menu) 121 Auto Preset (FM radio) 67 Auto Preset (HD Radio™) 65 Auto Setup (Speaker, Setup menu) 41 Auto/Manual Select (Lipsync, Setup menu) 109 Automatic speaker setting optimization 41 Automatic station preset (FM radio) 67 Automatic station preset (HD Radio™) 65 AutoPowerStdby (ECO, Setup menu) 121 AV OUT jack 13 B Backup/recovery of the settings 126 Balance Input Attenuator (Input menu) 97 Balanced connection (power amplifier) 24 Basic playback operation 52 Basic speaker configuration 19 Bass (Tone Control, Option menu) 91 Bitrate (Audio Signal, Information menu) 123 Bitstream 151 Brightness (Video Mode, Setup menu) 112 C CAT-5 cable 37 Category (HD Radio™) 63 Cellar Club (sound program) 58 Center (Speaker, Setup menu) 106 Center Image (Sound Program menu) 102 Center Width (Sound Program menu) 102 Chamber (sound program) 58 Channel (Audio Signal, Information menu) 123 Channel indicator (front display) 12 Check Sur. (YPAO error message) 50 Church in Freiburg (sound program) 58 Church in Royaumont (sound program) 58 Church in Tokyo (sound program) 58 CINEMA DSP 3D (Option menu) 91 CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (Option menu) 91 CINEMA DSP HD³ 56 CLASSICAL (sound program subcategory) 58 Clear Preset (FM/AM radio) 67 Clear Preset (HD Radio™) 65 Clearing (remote control) 134 Clock Time (Radio Data System) 65 COAXIAL jack 22 Component video cable 22 Component video connection (video device) 32 COMPONENT VIDEO jack 22 Composite video connection (video device) 33 Compressed Music Enhancer 60 Configuration (Speaker, Setup menu) 106 Contrast (Video Mode, Setup menu) 113 Crossover frequency setting (subwoofer) 41 D DAC Digital Filter (Sound, Setup menu) 111 DC OUT (Function, Setup menu) 120 DC OUT jack 13 Decode Type (Sound Program menu) 101 Decoder Mode (Input menu) 96 Decoder Off (front display information) 89 Default Gateway (IP Address, Setup menu) 115 Default Gateway (Network, Information menu) 123 APPENDIX ➤ Index En 157 Default setting restoration 126 Delay Enable (Lipsync, Setup menu) 109 Detail (Load, Scene menu) 99 Detail Enhancement (Video Mode, Setup menu) 112 Device Control (Load, Scene menu) 98 DHCP (IP Address, Setup menu) 115 Dialog Adjust (Option menu) 92 Dialog Lift (Dialog Adjust, Option menu) 92 Dialog Lvl (Dialog Adjust, Option menu) 92 Dialogue (Audio Signal, Information menu) 123 Dialogue Adjust (Option menu) 92 Dialogue Level (Dialogue Adjust, Option menu) 92 Dialogue Lift (Dialogue Adjust, Option menu) 92 Dialogue normalization level 123 Digital coaxial cable 22 Digital Media Controller (DMC) 97 Digital optical cable 22 Dimension (Sound Program menu) 102 Dimmer (Front Display) (Display Set, Setup menu) 119 Direct (Sound Program menu) 102 Direct Stream Digital (DSD) 145 Disco (sound program) 57 DISPLAY key 15 Display Set (Function, Setup menu) 119 Display window (remote control) 15 Distance (Speaker, Setup menu) 108 Distance (YPAO measurement result) 48 DLNA 75 DMC (Digital Media Controller) 97 DMC Control (Input menu) 97 DNS Server (IP Address, Setup menu) 115 DNS Server (Network, Information menu) 123 Dolby Digital EX (Extended Surround) 92 Dolby Pro Logic (surround decoder) 59 Dolby Pro Logic II Game (surround decoder) 59 Dolby Pro Logic II Movie (surround decoder) 59 Dolby Pro Logic II Music (surround decoder) 59 Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game (surround decoder) 59 Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie (Extended Surround) 92 Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie (surround decoder) 59 Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music (Extended Surround) 92 Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music (surround decoder) 59 Drama (sound program) 57 DSD (Direct Stream Digital) 145 DSP Level (Sound Program menu) 101 DSP Program (front display information) 89 DTS Neo:6 Cinema (surround decoder) 59 DTS Neo:6 Music (surround decoder) 59 DTS-ES (Extended Surround) 92 Dynamic Range (Sound, Setup menu) 110 Front (Speaker, Setup menu) 106 Front / Rear Balance (Sound Program menu) 102 Front display (part names and functions) 12 Front display brightness 119 Front display information 89 Front panel (part names and functions) 10 Front panel door (front panel) 10 Front panel jack connection 35 Front Presence (Speaker, Setup menu) 107 Function (Setup menu) 119 E G ECO (Setup menu) 121 Edge Enhancement (Video Mode, Setup menu) 112 Enhancer (Option menu) 93 ENHANCER (sound mode) 60 ENTERTAINMENT (sound program subcategory) 57 Erasing (remote control) 135 Error indication (front display) 144 EX/ES (Extended Surround, Option menu) 92 EXTD Surround (Option menu) 92 Extended Surround (Option menu) 92 External device control (remote control) 128 External device operation key (remote control) 15 Extra Bass (Speaker, Setup menu) 108 GND terminal 34 Ground lead 34 F Filter (MAC Address Filter, Setup menu) 115 FIRM UPDATE (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 127 Firmware update 127 Firmware update (network) 127, 136 Firmware update (USB) 127 Firmware Version (System, Information menu) 123 Firmware version check 127 FM antenna connection 36 FM Mode (Option menu) 94 FM radio listening 61 FM/AM radio tuning 61 Format (Audio Signal, Information menu) 123 Frequency (FM/AM radio) 61 Frequency step setting 61, 125 H Hall in Amsterdam (sound program) 58 Hall in Frankfurt (sound program) 58 Hall in Munich A (sound program) 58 Hall in Munich B (sound program) 58 Hall in Stuttgart (sound program) 58 Hall in USA A (sound program) 58 Hall in USA B (sound program) 58 Hall in Vienna (sound program) 58 HD Radio™ information 63 HD Radio™ tuning 63 HDMI (Setup menu) 113 HDMI cable 22 HDMI connection (video device) 32 HDMI Control (HDMI, Setup menu) 113 HDMI jack 22 HDMI Monitor (Information menu) 123 HDMI OUT1 (Audio Output, Setup menu) 114 HDMI OUT2 (Audio Output, Setup menu) 114 HDMI OUT2 Assign (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 118 HDMI output selection 52 HDMI signal compatibility 151 Headphones 56 Height Balance (Sound Program menu) 102 High definition audio 151 High speed HDMI cable 22 APPENDIX ➤ Index En 158 Hi-Res Mode (Enhancer, Option menu) 93 Hold/Unhold (HD Radio™, Option menu) 64 I In.Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 92 Indicator (part names and functions) 12 INFO key 11, 16 Information display (front display) 12 Information menu 122 Information switching (front display) 89 Initial Delay (Sound Program menu) 101 Initial Volume (Sound, Setup menu) 110 Initial Volume (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 117 Initial Volume (Zone3 Set, Setup menu) 117 INITIALIZE (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 126 Input (Audio Signal, Information menu) 123 Input Assignment (Function, Setup menu) 119 Input jack assignment 119 Input menu 95 Input selection key (remote control) 15 Input Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 92 Internal Error (error indication) 144 Internal Error (YPAO error message) 50 Internet radio listening 78 IP Address (Network, Information menu) 123 IP Address (Network, Setup menu) 115 iPod charge 68 iPod connection 68 iPod content playback 69 iPod content playback (AirPlay) 80 iTunes content playback (AirPlay) 80 L Language (Setup menu) 122 Learning (remote control) 130 Left / Right Balance (Sound Program menu) Level (Sound Program menu) 102 Level (Speaker, Setup menu) 108 Level (YPAO measurement result) 48 Level Error (YPAO warning message) 51 LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 146 102 LIGHT key 15 Lipsync 146 Lipsync (Sound, Setup menu) 109 LIVE/CLUB (sound program subcategory) Liveness (Sound Program menu) 101 Load (Scene menu) 98 Low Frequency Effects (LFE) 146 58 M MAC Address (MAC Address Filter, Setup menu) 115 MAC Address (Network, Information menu) 123 MAC Address Filter (Network, Setup menu) 115 Macro (remote control) 132 Main Zone Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 116 Manual Setup (Speaker, Setup menu) 106 Manual speaker configuration 106 Manual station preset (FM/AM radio) 62 Max Volume (Sound, Setup menu) 110 Max Volume (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 117 Max Volume (Zone3 Set, Setup menu) 117 Measurement result (YPAO) 48 Media sharing setup 75 Memory Guard (Function, Setup menu) 121 Menu language selection 40 Menu operation key (front panel) 11 Menu operation key (remote control) 15 MHL cable 22 MHL connection 35 MHL jack 22 MHL Overloaded (error indication) 144 MHL-compatible mobile device 35 Microphone base 44, 47 MODE key 15 Monaural Mix (Sound Program menu) 102 Monaural reception (FM radio) 61 Monaural reception (FM/AM radio) 61 Monitor check 126 MONITOR CHECK (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 126 Monitor Out Assign (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 118 Mono (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 117 Mono (Zone3 Set, Setup menu) 117 Mono Movie (sound program) 57 MOVIE (sound program category) 57 MOVIE THEATER (sound program subcategory) MULTI CH INPUT jack 14 Multi measurement (YPAO) 46 Multi Zone (Information menu) 123 Multi Zone (Setup menu) 116 Multi-channel analog connection 38 Multiple room playback 82 Multi-zone 82 Multi-zone output 149 MUSIC (sound program category) 58 Music Video (sound program) 57 MUTE key 15 Muting 52 57 N NAS (Network Attached Storage) 37 NAS connection 37 NAS content playback 75 Network (Information menu) 123 Network (Setup menu) 115 Network Attached Storage (NAS) 37 Network cable 37 Network connection 37 Network information 123 Network Name (Network, Information menu) 123 Network Name (Network, Setup menu) 116 Network Standby (Network, Setup menu) 115 No content (error indication) 144 No device (error indication) 144 No F.PRNS SP (YPAO error message) 50 No Front SP (YPAO error message) 50 No MIC (YPAO error message) 50 No R.PRNS SP (YPAO error message) 50 No Signal (YPAO error message) 50 No Sur. SP (YPAO error message) 50 Noisy (YPAO error message) 50 Normal (Wiring, YPAO measurement result) 48 APPENDIX ➤ Index En 159 NTSC (TV FORMAT, ADVANCED SETUP menu) Numeric key (remote control) 16 125 Q Q factor 109 O R ON SCREEN key 15 OPTICAL jack 22 OPTION key 15 Option menu 90 Out of Phase (YPAO warning message) 51 Output (Audio Signal, Information menu) 123 Over Distance (YPAO warning message) 51 Radio Data System (FM radio) 65 Radio Data System information 65 Radio Data System tuning 65 Radio Text (Radio Data System) 65 Rear panel (part names and functions) 13 Rear Presence (Speaker, Setup menu) 107 Recital/Opera (sound program) 57 Recording device connection 38 RECOV./BACKUP (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 126 RemID Mismatch (error indication) 144 REMOTE CON AMP (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 125 Remote connection 86 Remote control (part names and functions) 15 Remote control code registration (playback device) 129 Remote control code registration (TV) 128 Remote Control Code Search 128, 129 Remote control ID setting 125 Remote control ID setting (remote control) 125 Remote control sensor 10 Remote control sensor setting 124 Remote control signal transmitter (remote control) 15 Remote ID (System, Information menu) 123 REMOTE IN jack 13 Remote Off (error indication) 144 REMOTE OUT jack 13 REMOTE SENSOR (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 124 Rename (device name on the remote control) 131 Rename (input name) 96 Rename (network name) 116 Rename (scene name) 99 Rename/Icon Select (Input menu) 96 Rename/Icon Select (Scene menu) 99 Repeat (iPod, Option menu) 71 Repeat (PC/NAS, Option menu) 77 Repeat (USB storage device, Option menu) 74 P PAL (TV FORMAT, ADVANCED SETUP menu) 125 Panorama (Sound Program menu) 102 Parametric EQ (Speaker, Setup menu) 108 PARTY key 16 Party mode 88 Party Mode Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 118 Pavilion (sound program) 57 PC connection 37 PC content playback 75 PHONES jack 11 PHONO jack 13 Playback device connection 32 Playback device operation (remote control) 130 Please wait (error indication) 144 Power amplifier connection 24 Power cable connection 39 Power management 121 Power Mode (DC OUT, Setup menu) 120 PRE OUT (RCA) jack 14 PRE OUT (XLR) jack 14 Preset station selection (FM/AM radio) 62 Program Service (Radio Data System) 65 Program Type (Radio Data System) 65 Pure Direct 60 PURE DIRECT (sound mode) 60 Pure Direct Mode (Sound, Setup menu) 110 Reset (remote control) 134 Reset (Scene menu) 99 Resolution (Video Mode, Setup menu) 112 Reverb Delay (Sound Program menu) 101 Reverb Level (Sound Program menu) 101 Reverb Time (Sound Program menu) 101 Reverse (Wiring, YPAO measurement result) Roleplaying Game (sound program) 57 Room Size (Sound Program menu) 101 Router connection 37 48 S S VIDEO jack 22 Sampling (Audio Signal, Information menu) 123 Saturation (Video Mode, Setup menu) 113 Save (Scene menu) 98 SBR → SBL (YPAO error message) 50 Scene configuration 54 SCENE function 53 SCENE link playback 54 Scene menu 97 Sci-Fi (sound program) 57 Setting Data Copy (Speaker, Setup menu) 106 Setting Pattern (Speaker, Setup menu) 106 Setup menu 103 Short Message (Display Set, Setup menu) 119 Shuffle (iPod, Option menu) 71 Shuffle (PC/NAS. Option menu) 77 Shuffle (USB storage device, Option menu) 74 Signal information 123 SILENT CINEMA 56 Simple play (iPod) 70 Single measurement (YPAO) 44 Size (YPAO measurement result) 48 SLEEP key 16 Sleep timer 16 Sleep timer (Zone2/Zone3/Zone4) 88 Sound (Setup menu) 109 Sound field effect 56 Sound mode selection 55 APPENDIX ➤ Index En 160 Sound program 57, 58 Sound Program menu 100 Speaker (Setup menu) 106 Speaker placement 18 Spectacle (sound program) 57 Sports (sound program) 57 Standard (sound program) 57 Standby indicator (front panel) 10 Standby Sync (HDMI Control, Setup menu) 114 Standby Through (HDMI, Setup menu) 114 Station Info (HD Radio™) 63 Station preset (FM/AM radio) 62 Status (Network, Information menu) 123 STEREO (sound program subcategory) 58 Stereo pin cable (RCA unbalanced cable) 22 Stereo reception (FM radio) 61 Stereo reception (FM/AM radio) 61 STP network cable 37 STRAIGHT (sound mode) 59 Straight decode 59 Subnet Mask (IP Address, Setup menu) 115 Subnet Mask (Network, Information menu) 123 Subwoofer 1 (Speaker, Setup menu) 107 Subwoofer 2 (Speaker, Setup menu) 107 Subwoofer connection 25 Subwoofer Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 93 SUR.DECODE (sound mode) 59 Surround (Speaker, Setup menu) 107 Surround Back (Speaker, Setup menu) 107 Surround Back Initial Delay (Sound Program menu) 101 Surround Back Liveness (Sound Program menu) 101 Surround Back Room Size (Sound Program menu) 101 Surround decoder 59 Surround Initial Delay (Sound Program menu) 101 Surround Liveness (Sound Program menu) 101 Surround Room Size (Sound Program menu) 101 S-video cable 22 S-video connection (video device) 33 SW.Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 93 SWFR Layout (Speaker, Setup menu) 108 System (Information menu) 123 System ID (System, Information menu) 123 USB Overloaded (error indication) 144 USB storage device connection 72 USB storage device content playback 72 User Cancel (YPAO error message) 50 T V Target Zone (Trigger Output, Setup menu) 120 Test Tone (Speaker, Setup menu) 109 The Bottom Line (sound program) 58 The Roxy Theatre (sound program) 58 Tone Control (Option menu) 91 TONE/BALANCE key 11 TP (Traffic Program) 66 Traffic information (Radio Data System) 66 Traffic Program (FM radio, Option menu) 66 Treble (Tone Control, Option menu) 91 Trigger function 39 Trigger Mode (Trigger Output, Setup menu) 120 TRIGGER OUT jack 13 Trigger Output1 (Function, Setup menu) 120 Trigger Output2 (Function, Setup menu) 120 Tuner Freq. Step (System, Information menu) 123 TUNER FRQ STEP (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 125 Turntable connection 34 TV Audio Input (HDMI Control, Setup menu) 113 TV connection 26 TV connection (ARC-compatible TV) 26 TV connection (HDMI Control-compatible TV) 28 TV connection (TV with HDMI input jacks) 29 TV connection (TV without HDMI input jacks) 30 TV FORMAT (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 125 TV Format (System, Information menu) 123 TV operation (remote control) 129 TV operation key (remote control) 15 VERSION (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 127 Version error (error indication) 144 Video (Setup menu) 111 Video Adjust (Option menu) 93 Video Adjustment (Option menu) 93 VIDEO AUX jack 11 Video device connection 32 VIDEO jack 22 Video Mode (Option menu) 93 Video Mode (Video, Setup menu) 111 Video Out (Input menu) 96 Video pin cable 22 Video Signal (Information menu) 123 Video signal flow 148 Video signal type setting 125 Village Gate (sound program) 58 Village Vanguard (sound program) 58 Virtual CINEMA DSP 56 Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) 56 Volume (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 117 Volume (Zone3 Set, Setup menu) 117 Volume Interlock (Input menu) 96 Volume Trim (Option menu) 92 VPS (Sound, Setup menu) 111 VPS (Virtual Presence Speaker) 56 U Ultra HD (4K) 151 Unable to play (error indication) 144 Unbalanced connection (power amplifier) USB jack 11 USB mass storage class device 72 W Wallpaper (Display Set, Setup menu) 119 Warehouse Loft (sound program) 58 Wiring (YPAO measurement result) 48 X 25 XLR balanced cable XLR jack 23 23 APPENDIX ➤ Index En 161 Y Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) 41 YPAO (Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer) YPAO error message 50 YPAO MIC jack 11 YPAO microphone 41 YPAO warning message 51 41 Z Zone Rename (Main Zone Set, Setup menu) 116 Zone Rename (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 117 Zone Rename (Zone3 Set, Setup menu) 117 Zone Rename (Zone4 Set, Setup menu) 118 Zone Scene Rename (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 117 Zone Scene Rename (Zone3 Set, Setup menu) 117 Zone Scene Rename (Zone4 Set, Setup menu) 118 Zone2 Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 117 Zone3 Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 117 Zone4 Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 118 APPENDIX ➤ Index En 162 © 2013 Yamaha Corporation YF484A0/EN-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
-
63
-
64
-
65
-
66
-
67
-
68
-
69
-
70
-
71
-
72
-
73
-
74
-
75
-
76
-
77
-
78
-
79
-
80
-
81
-
82
-
83
-
84
-
85
-
86
-
87
-
88
-
89
-
90
-
91
-
92
-
93
-
94
-
95
-
96
-
97
-
98
-
99
-
100
-
101
-
102
-
103
-
104
-
105
-
106
-
107
-
108
-
109
-
110
-
111
-
112
-
113
-
114
-
115
-
116
-
117
-
118
-
119
-
120
-
121
-
122
-
123
-
124
-
125
-
126
-
127
-
128
-
129
-
130
-
131
-
132
-
133
-
134
-
135
-
136
-
137
-
138
-
139
-
140
-
141
-
142
-
143
-
144
-
145
-
146
-
147
-
148
-
149
-
150
-
151
-
152
-
153
-
154
-
155
-
156
-
157
-
158
-
159
-
160
-
161
-
162
-
163
Yamaha CXA5000BL Manual de usuario
- Categoría
- Sistemas de cine en casa
- Tipo
- Manual de usuario
- Este manual también es adecuado para
En otros idiomas
- français: Yamaha CXA5000BL Manuel utilisateur
- italiano: Yamaha CXA5000BL Manuale utente
- English: Yamaha CXA5000BL User manual
- Deutsch: Yamaha CXA5000BL Benutzerhandbuch
- русский: Yamaha CXA5000BL Руководство пользователя
- Nederlands: Yamaha CXA5000BL Handleiding
- português: Yamaha CXA5000BL Manual do usuário
- dansk: Yamaha CXA5000BL Brugermanual
- svenska: Yamaha CXA5000BL Användarmanual
- Türkçe: Yamaha CXA5000BL Kullanım kılavuzu
- suomi: Yamaha CXA5000BL Ohjekirja
Documentos relacionados
-
Yamaha RX-730 El manual del propietario
-
Yamaha RX-V1075 El manual del propietario
-
-
-
Yamaha CX-A5100 El manual del propietario
-
-
-
Yamaha MUSICCAST RXA3060 El manual del propietario
-
Yamaha A-S801 El manual del propietario
-
Yamaha RX-A2020 Manual de usuario